all | frequencies |
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 1.91 MiB | / May 02 2015 | |||
1 2 |
|
Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.23 MiB | ||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | / May 02 2015 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | External Photos | / May 02 2015 | ||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 | Internal Photos | / May 02 2015 | ||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | / May 02 2015 | ||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | / May 02 2015 | ||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / May 02 2015 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | / May 02 2015 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | / May 02 2015 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | / May 02 2015 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | / May 02 2015 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | / May 02 2015 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | / May 02 2015 |
1 2 | User Manual | Users Manual | 1.91 MiB | / May 02 2015 |
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint V100R001C10 Administrator Guide Issue Date 01 2014-12-23 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website:
http://enterprise.huawei.com Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide About This Document About This Document Before you use the product, refer to the product vendor for version mapping information and to confirm compatibility with other videoconferencing equipment. This document describes how to use the HUAWEI TE40 Videoconferencing Endpoint (TE40 or endpoint for short), HUAWEI TE50 Videoconferencing Endpoint (TE50 or endpoint for short), and HUAWEI TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint (TE60 or endpoint for short), including conference experience, device control, address book management, system settings, installation, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Intended Audience This document is intended for but not limited to endpoint administrators. An endpoint administrator has access to all functions on the endpoint web interface, touch panel (optional), and remote controlled user interface (UI). It is recommended that endpoint administrators set parameters and manage the address book on the endpoint web interface. When using this document, note the following:
Unless otherwise specified, the descriptions in this document are applicable to the TE40, TE50, and TE60.
Except chapters 7.7 Security and 9.4 Customizing the Remote Controlled UI which apply to the endpoint user interface controlled by the remote control (remote controlled UI for short), descriptions and configurations in this document apply to the endpoint web interface. Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Symbol Description About This Document Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results. NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal injury. Calls attention to important information, best practices and tips. NOTE is used to address information not related to personal injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration. Change History Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the changes made in earlier issues. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) This issue is the first official release. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Contents Contents About This Document ............................................................................................................... ii 1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 1 1.1 Definition of an Endpoint Administrator ...................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 Requirements on an Administrator ............................................................................................................................... 2 1.3 Related Documentation................................................................................................................................................. 3 1.4 Safety Precautions ........................................................................................................................................................ 4 1.5 How to Obtain Help .................................................................................................................................................... 10 2 Web-based Login .................................................................................................................... 11 3 Menu Structure of the Web Interface .................................................................................. 14 4 Conference Experience .......................................................................................................... 16 4.1 Initiating a Point-to-Point Conference ........................................................................................................................ 17 4.1.1 Initiating a Conference from the Call Page .............................................................................................................. 17 4.1.2 Initiating a Conference from the Address Book ....................................................................................................... 18 4.1.3 Holding a Call .......................................................................................................................................................... 18 4.2 Initiating a Multipoint Conference.............................................................................................................................. 19 4.2.1 Understanding the MCU and Built-in MCU ............................................................................................................ 19 4.2.2 Initiating a Conference from the Predefined Conference Page ................................................................................ 22 4.2.3 Initiating a Conference from the Conference History Page ..................................................................................... 25 4.2.4 Initiating a Conference from the Address Book Page .............................................................................................. 25 4.3 Scheduling a Conference ............................................................................................................................................ 26 4.4 Joining a Conference Using the Conference Access Number ..................................................................................... 27 4.5 Joining an MSUC Convergent Conference ................................................................................................................. 28 4.6 Joining an HD-Video Conference over an IMS Network ........................................................................................... 30 4.7 Sharing a Presentation ................................................................................................................................................ 33 4.8 Creating and Sending Captions ................................................................................................................................... 34 4.9 Using the Do-Not-Disturb Function ........................................................................................................................... 35 4.10 Controlling a Conference .......................................................................................................................................... 35 4.11 Recording a Conference ............................................................................................................................................ 43 4.12 Sending and Receiving Instant Messages ................................................................................................................. 44 5 Device Control ........................................................................................................................ 46 5.1 Viewing the Video....................................................................................................................................................... 47 Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Contents 5.2 Controlling a Camera .................................................................................................................................................. 48 5.3 Setting a Camera Preset .............................................................................................................................................. 49 5.4 Selecting Video Sources ............................................................................................................................................. 51 5.5 Controlling Audio ....................................................................................................................................................... 52 5.6 Setting the Combined Picture ..................................................................................................................................... 55 5.7 Setting Camera Parameters ......................................................................................................................................... 55 5.8 Setting Preferred Video Parameters ............................................................................................................................ 57 5.9 Setting Up a PPPoE Dial-Up Connection ................................................................................................................... 58 5.10 Using the Remote Control ........................................................................................................................................ 59 6 Managing the Local Address Book ...................................................................................... 60 6.1 Editing the Local Address Book ................................................................................................................................. 60 6.2 Using Virtual Conference Rooms ............................................................................................................................... 63 6.3 Importing and Exporting Address Book .................................................................................................................. 64 6.4 Customizing a Site Template ...................................................................................................................................... 64 7 System Settings ...................................................................................................................... 66 7.1 Setting Basic Parameters ............................................................................................................................................ 67 7.1.1 Setting the System time ........................................................................................................................................... 67 7.1.2 Setting the Ringtone for Incoming Calls ................................................................................................................. 68 7.1.3 Managing Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 68 7.1.4 Setting Number Key Functions ................................................................................................................................ 70 7.2 Specifying Caption Settings ........................................................................................................................................ 70 7.3 Setting Video Parameters ............................................................................................................................................ 72 7.3.1 Understanding Video Input Capabilities .................................................................................................................. 72 7.3.2 Configuring Video Input .......................................................................................................................................... 75 7.3.3 Setting the Multi-View Mode .................................................................................................................................. 77 7.3.4 Understanding Video Output Capabilities ............................................................................................................... 78 7.3.5 Configuring Video Output ....................................................................................................................................... 81 7.4 Configuring Audio ...................................................................................................................................................... 88 7.5 Specifying Conference Settings .................................................................................................................................. 90 7.5.1 Setting Audio and Video Protocols .......................................................................................................................... 90 7.5.2 Setting General Conference Parameters .................................................................................................................. 90 7.5.3 Setting Advanced Conference Parameters ............................................................................................................... 94 7.6 Specifying Network Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 98 7.6.1 Setting IP Parameters ............................................................................................................................................... 98 7.6.2 Setting H.323 Parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 103 7.6.3 Setting SIP Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 105 7.6.4 Setting Wi-Fi Parameters ....................................................................................................................................... 108 7.6.5 Setting SNMP Parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 111 7.6.6 Setting Network Address Book Parameters ........................................................................................................... 114 7.6.7 Setting Firewall Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 117 7.6.8 Setting Network Diagnostics Parameters ............................................................................................................... 119 Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Contents 7.6.9 Setting QoS Parameters ......................................................................................................................................... 120 7.6.10 Connecting to a 4E1 Network .............................................................................................................................. 122 7.6.11 Connecting to a PSTN Network ........................................................................................................................... 126 7.7 Security ..................................................................................................................................................................... 126 7.7.1 Enabling Encryption .............................................................................................................................................. 126 7.7.2 Supporting Remote Logins .................................................................................................................................... 127 7.7.3 Setting the Password of the Remote Control Administrator .................................................................................. 128 7.7.4 Setting the Upgrade Password ............................................................................................................................... 129 7.7.5 Setting the Air Content Sharing Password ............................................................................................................. 129 7.7.6 Setting Web Account Security ............................................................................................................................... 130 7.7.7 Setting Whitelist .................................................................................................................................................... 131 7.8 Importing Security Certificates ................................................................................................................................. 132 7.8.1 Importing a Certificate ........................................................................................................................................... 132 7.8.2 Importing Web Certificates .................................................................................................................................... 133 7.8.3 Updating Web Certificates ..................................................................................................................................... 134 7.9 Managing System Files ............................................................................................................................................. 134 7.9.1 Importing and Exporting Settings .......................................................................................................................... 134 7.9.2 Backing Up Settings .............................................................................................................................................. 135 7.9.3 Importing License Files ......................................................................................................................................... 135 7.9.4 Importing a Layout Policy File .............................................................................................................................. 136 7.9.5 Creating and Downloading a CSR File .................................................................................................................. 137 8 Upgrading ............................................................................................................................. 138 8.1 Automatic Upgrade ................................................................................................................................................... 139 8.2 Tool Upgrade ............................................................................................................................................................ 140 8.3 Upgrading the Endpoint Using the Mini System ...................................................................................................... 143 8.4 Upgrading the Endpoint on Its Web Interface ........................................................................................................... 144 9 Maintenance .......................................................................................................................... 145 9.1 Checking the Working Environment Periodically .................................................................................................... 146 9.2 Managing Common Users and Passwords ................................................................................................................ 146 9.3 Customizing the Web Interface ................................................................................................................................. 147 9.4 Customizing the Remote Controlled UI ................................................................................................................... 149 9.4.1 Customizing Onscreen Status Icons ....................................................................................................................... 149 9.4.2 Customizing the Home Screen............................................................................................................................... 149 9.4.3 Customizing Conference Control Functions to Be Displayed ............................................................................... 151 9.4.4 Customizing the Option Bar .................................................................................................................................. 151 9.5 Checking the Endpoint Periodically ......................................................................................................................... 152 9.6 Viewing System Status ............................................................................................................................................. 152 9.7 Querying System Information................................................................................................................................... 153 9.8 Querying Logs .......................................................................................................................................................... 153 9.9 Restoring Your Endpoint to Default Settings ............................................................................................................ 154 10 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................. 155 Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Contents 10.1 Understanding Diagnosis Methods ......................................................................................................................... 155 10.2 Common Faults ....................................................................................................................................................... 159 11 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................... 171 11.1 Physical Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 171 11.2 Performance and Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... 172 11.3 Ports and Protocols ................................................................................................................................................. 173 11.4 Standards Compliance............................................................................................................................................. 176 A E1 and T1 Grounding Criteria ........................................................................................... 178 B Menu Structure of the Remote Controlled UI ................................................................. 179 C Requirements on Room Layout and Lighting ................................................................. 181 D Status Icons .......................................................................................................................... 182 E Default Settings ................................................................................................................... 185 F Glossary ................................................................................................................................. 187 Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 1 Overview 1 Overview About This Chapter This document guides you through configuring, managing, maintaining, and troubleshooting the endpoint. 1.1 Definition of an Endpoint Administrator An endpoint administrator is an enterprise employee who is responsible for managing and maintaining endpoint operations. 1.2 Requirements on an Administrator As an administrator, you must meet the following basic endpoint administrator proficiencies and be capable of collecting all information related to the endpoint and its working environment. 1.3 Related Documentation This section lists the documentation that you may refer to when you perform routine operations and maintenance as well as answering questions from standard users. 1.4 Safety Precautions For safety purposes, carefully read through these safety precautions and observe them during operation. 1.5 How to Obtain Help When you encounter an endpoint issue, use the help on the endpoint web interface or contact technical support personnel. 1.1 Definition of an Endpoint Administrator An endpoint administrator is an enterprise employee who is responsible for managing and maintaining endpoint operations. An endpoint administrator has the following job responsibilities:
Configures and manages the endpoint.
Routinely maintains the endpoint. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide
Troubleshoots the endpoint failures.
Answers standard users' questions about endpoint use. 1 Overview 1.2 Requirements on an Administrator As an administrator, you must meet the following basic endpoint administrator proficiencies and be capable of collecting all information related to the endpoint and its working environment. Basic Endpoint Administrator Proficiencies
Windows operating system
Gatekeeper (GK) and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) servers
Ethernet, TCP/IP, and Client/Server (C/S) model
H.323 and SIP protocols
Safe and effective use of electronic devices
Common maintenance tools
Videoconferencing endpoint functions and services Information About the Endpoint and Its Working Environment Table 1-1 lists the endpoint and working environment information that must be collected, which helps you fulfill your job responsibilities and check the preparations for a recovery from an emergency. Table 1-1 Information to be collected Category No. Item Description Device information 1 Device location 2 Networking condition 3 Endpoint information Software and tools 4 Software versions and tools Record the endpoint location in as much detail as possible so the endpoint can be quickly located. Record the network topology and hardware connection diagram that include every device. List the IP address, user name, and password for the endpoint so you can quickly log in to the endpoint in case of an emergency. If you are not permitted to record the password for security reasons, memorize it. List the software versions corresponding to the endpoint. Prepare troubleshooting tools. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 1 Overview Category No. Item Description Contact information 5 Purchased parts' service information 6 Technical support personnel's contact information Spare parts 7 Spare parts Record the manufacturer contact information, serial numbers, and manufacturers'
warranty clauses for purchased parts. Maintain a list of technical support personnel with their contact information and responsibilities. List all spare parts (including the spare parts that Huawei can provide) and corresponding procurement methods. 8 Redundant or temporary devices List all redundant or temporary devices in the system, such as standby file servers and database servers. 1.3 Related Documentation This section lists the documentation that you may refer to when you perform routine operations and maintenance as well as answering questions from standard users. You can refer to the documentation listed in Table 1-2. Table 1-2 Reference documentation Document Description When to Use How to Obtain HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint V100R001C10 Quick Installation Guide Describes the packaged items and provides guidance for quick installation, and common configuration. When checking whether the carton contains all the required items and when installing the endpoint HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint V100R001C10 Quick Installation Guide HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Describes the remote controlled UI and provides quick instructions in commonly-used endpoint functions. When answering questions from standard users who are using the endpoint for the first time or unfamiliar with the endpoint Describes how to operate the endpoint. When answering standard users'
questions about Hold Ctrl and click the following hyperlink: Product Support > Unified Communications and Collaboration >
Telepresence and Videoconferencing
> Telepresence Endpoints > Group Endpoints. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 1 Overview Document Description When to Use How to Obtain Endpoint V100R001C10 User Guide HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint V100R001C10 Administrator Guide
(this document) Describes conference experience, device control, address book management, system settings, upgrade, maintenance, and troubleshooting based on the endpoint web interface. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint V100R001C10 Help Describes the endpoint web interface and method for using this interface. daily endpoint operations When setting parameters, managing the address book, controlling conferences, upgrading the endpoint, and performing daily maintenance. When answering questions that standard users encounter on the endpoint web interface or explaining the parameters on this interface Log in to the endpoint web interface and click the Help tab. 1.4 Safety Precautions For safety purposes, carefully read through these safety precautions and observe them during operation. Basic Precautions
Keep the device dry and secure from collision during storage, transportation, and operation of the device.
Do not attempt to dismantle the device by yourself. In case of any fault, contact the appointed maintenance center for assistance or repair.
Without prior written consent, no organization or individual is permitted to make any change to the structure or safety and performance design of the device.
While using the device, observe all applicable laws, directives, and regulations, and respect the legal rights of others. Environmental Precautions
Place the device in a well-ventilated place. Do not expose the device to direct sunlight. Install the device strictly according to the requirements of the manufacturer. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 1 Overview
Do not place any object on the top of the device. Reserve a minimum space of 10 cm at the four sides of the device for heat dissipation.
Do not place the device on or near inflammable materials such as foam.
Keep the device away from heat source or fire, such as a radiator or a candle.
Keep the device away from any household appliances with strong electromagnetic fields, such as a microwave oven, refrigerator, or mobile phone. Operating Precautions
Do not allow children to play with the device or accessories. Swallowing the accessories may be fatal.
Use the accessories such as the power adapter and battery provided or authorized only by the manufacturer.
Ensure that the device does not get wet. If water gets into the device, disconnect the power supply immediately and unplug all the cables connected to the device, including the power cable, telephone cable, video cable, audio cable, network cable, and serial cable, and then contact the appointed maintenance center.
Before plugging or unplugging any cable, shut down the device and disconnect the power supply. While plugging or unplugging any cable, ensure that your hands are dry.
Do not step on, pull, or overbend any cable. Otherwise, the cable may be damaged, leading to malfunction of the device.
Do not use old or damaged cables.
In lightning weather, disconnect the device from the power supply and unplug all the cables connected to the device.
Keep the power plug clean and dry, to prevent electric shock or other dangers.
If the device is not used for a long time, disconnect the power supply and unplug the power plug. If smoke, sound, or smell is emitted from the device, stop using the device immediately, disconnect the power supply, unplug the power plug and other cables, and remove the batteries. Then, contact the appointed maintenance center for repair. Ensure that no object (such as metal shavings) enters the device through the heat dissipation vent.
Before connecting any other cable, connect the ground cable of the device. Do not disconnect the ground cable until you have disconnected all the other cables.
Ensure that the three-phase power socket is grounded properly. The neutral line and the live line cannot be connected inversely.
Do not scratch or abrade the shell of the device. The shed painting may lead to skin allergy or malfunction of the device. If the shed painting material drops into the host, a short circuit may occur. Cleaning Precautions
Before cleaning the device, stop using it, disconnect the power supply, and unplug all the cables connected to the device, including the power cable, telephone cable, video cable, audio cable, network cable, and serial cable.
Do not clean the device shell with any cleaning solution or cleanser spray. Use a piece of soft cloth to clean the device shell. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Battery Usage Precautions of the Remote Control 1 Overview
Use only the recommended battery. Pay attention to the polarity of the batteries while installing them.
If a battery does not fit in the device, do not apply force. Otherwise, the battery may leak or explode. To reduce the risk of explosion, do not use batteries of different types together. For example, do not use an alkaline battery and a Mn-Zn battery together. It is recommended that you use batteries provided or recommended by the manufacturer.
Do not use a new battery with an old battery. When you replace batteries, replace all of them at the same time.
If you are not going to use the device for a long time, remove all the batteries. If any battery leaks, emits smoke, or emits abnormal smell, stop using it immediately. If the battery fluid comes in contact with your skin or clothes, rinse with water immediately and seek medical assistance. If the battery fluid goes into your eyes, do not rub your eyes. Rinse your eyes with water immediately and seek medical assistance. LCD Usage Precautions
Do not expose the LCD to direct sunlight.
Do not scratch or strike, apply force to, or place heavy objects on top of the LCD.
Do not watch the LCD screen for extended periods of time. This may harm your eyes or blur your vision. Touch Panel Usage Precautions
Do not tap the touch panel with excessive force.
Do not let the touch panel exposed to water or other liquids.
Place the touch panel on the desktop steadily to prevent it from falling. LCD Cleaning Precautions
According to the instructions in the attached manual, use a piece of soft cloth to remove dust from the surface of the LCD.
Do not clean the LCD with volatile solvents, such as alcohol, benzene, or a dilution agent. Do not keep the LCD in contact with a rubber or plastic materials for long periods of time. This will deteriorate the surface gloss of the LCD. Wireless Product Usage Precautions
Keep the wireless device away from magnetic storage devices, such as a magnetic card or a floppy disk to prevent loss of the stored information.
Stop using the wireless device and disconnect it from the power supply in places where using of wireless devices is prohibited or using of a wireless device may lead to interference or danger.
Unplug the wireless device from the endpoint and turn off the endpoint close to a high-precision controlled electronic device, such as an audio phone, a pacemaker, fire alarm, or an automatic gate. Otherwise, this will lead to malfunction of the electronic device. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 1 Overview
The user who uses an electronic assistant medical-treatment device needs to confirm with the service center regarding the effects of the radio wave on this device.
Do not take the wireless device to the operation theater, Intensive Care Unit (ICU), or the Coronary Care Unit (CCU).
When using the device, ensure that the antenna of the device is at least 20 cm away from all parts of your body.
In the area with inflammable or explosive materials, turn off your wireless device and follow the relevant instructions given on the label to prevent an explosion or fire.
Use your wireless device and its accessories in a clean and dust-free environment. Ensure that the wireless device does not come in contact with flame or a lit cigarette.
Ensure that the wireless device and its accessories are dry.
Do not drop, throw, or bend your wireless device.
Do not place the wireless device and its accessories in areas with extreme temperatures. Reduction of Hazardous Substances This device is compliant with the EU Registration, Evaluation, Authorization and Restriction of Chemicals (REACH) Regulation (Regulation No 1907/2006/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council) and the EU Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive (Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council). For more information about the REACH compliance of the device, visit the website www.huaweidevice.com/certification. You are recommended to visit the website regularly for up-to-date information. Statement on a Class A Product This is a class A product. In a national environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. European Regulatory Compliance The endpoint complies with the following European directives and regulations.
1999/5/EC (R&TTE) 2002/95/EC & 2011/65/EU (RoHS) EC NO. 1907/2006 (REACH) 2002/96/EC (WEEE) The endpoint complies with Directive 2002/95/EC, 2011/65/EU and other similar regulations from the countries outside the European Union, on the RoHS in electrical and electronic equipment. The endpoint does not contain lead, mercury, cadmium, and hexavalent chromium and brominated flame retardants (Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB) or Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)) except for those exempted applications allowed by RoHS directive for technical reasons. The endpoint complies with Regulation EC NO. 1907/2006 (REACH) and other similar regulations from the countries outside the European Union. Huawei will notify to the European Chemical Agency (ECHA) or the customer when necessary and regulation requires. The endpoint complies with Directive 2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). Huawei is responsible for recycling its end-of-life devices, and please contact Huawei local service center when recycling is required. Huawei strictly complies with the EU Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive (WEEE Directive) and electronic Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 1 Overview waste management regulations enacted by different countries worldwide. In addition, Huawei has established a system for recycling and reuse of electronic wastes, and it can provide service of dismantling and recycling for WEEE. By Huawei recycling system, the waste can be handled environmentally and the resource can be recycled and reused fully, which is also Huawei WEEE stratagem in the word. Most of the materials in the endpoint are recyclable, and our packaging is designed to be recycled and should be handled in accordance with your local recycling policies. In accordance with Article 11(2) in Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE), The endpoints were marked with the following symbol: a cross-out wheeled waste bin with a bar beneath as below:
North American Regulatory Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device does not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If this device is modified without authorization from Huawei, the device may no longer comply with FCC requirements for Class A digital devices. In that a case, your right to use the device may be limited by FCC regulations. Moreover, you may be required to correct any interference to radio or television communications at your own expense. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 1 Overview This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters between the radiator and your body. The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment. Such modifications could void the user authority to operate the equipment. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the device is operated in a commercial environment. This device generates, uses and radiates radio frequency energy. If it is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference. In this case the user will be requested to correct the interference at his or her own expense. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. Cet appareil numrique de classe A est conforme la norme ICES-003 du Canada. Cet quipement est conforme aux limites IC d'exposition aux radiations dfinies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis distance minimum de 20cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 1.5 How to Obtain Help 1 Overview When you encounter an endpoint issue, use the help on the endpoint web interface or contact technical support personnel. Viewing the Help on the Endpoint Web Interface The help on the endpoint web interface includes context-sensitive help and operation guide. Context-sensitive help includes status icons and configuration verification messages. For example, if certain settings on the system settings screen are incorrect, a message will be displayed to indicate the error and how to rectify it. The operation guide describes how to operate the endpoint web interface. When you are using the endpoint and the documents delivered with the endpoint are unavailable, you can click in the upper right corner to read the operation guide. Obtaining Technical Support The Huawei support website is an efficient and real-time communication platform where you can obtain technical documents, submit technical questions, service requests, and troubleshooting questions, and provide feedback on Huawei products. To seek technical help over the Internet, please visit http://enterprise.huawei.com. Provide the following information to help Huawei engineers answer your questions:
Endpoint serial number (web interface query path: Help > Version) Software version (web interface query path: Help > Version)
Network information (web interface query path: Maintenance > System Status > Line Status)
Diagnostic and troubleshooting measures you have taken Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 2 Web-based Login 2 Web-based Login To remotely manage the endpoint in web mode, log in to its web interface. Configuring the Browser Before running the endpoint web interface on a web browser, configure the browser. The web interface can run on Microsoft Internet Explorer, Mozilla FireFox, and Google Chrome. Microsoft Internet Explorer 8.0 is recommended. If you use other browsers or versions, the user interface (UI) display may appear slightly different. The web interface will still work as expected. Before you begin, ensure that the latest patches for the operating system and browser are installed. If you want to use Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 to access the endpoint web interface in HTTPS mode, enable HTTPS login mode for Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 as follows: Log in to the endpoint in Telnet or SSH mode. (The default user name and password are debug and Change_Me, respectively.) Run the web ie6httpsmode 1 command to enable the HTTPS login mode. The following description uses Window7 as an example to describe how to configure Microsoft Internet Explorer 8.0 and FireFox 3.6. The methods for configuring other browser versions are similar. Step 1 Start Internet Explorer. Step 2 From the Internet Explorer menu bar, choose Tools > Internet Options. In the displayed Internet Options dialog box, click the Security tab. Step 3 In the bottom of the tab, click Custom level. Step 4 In the Security Settings dialog box that is displayed, perform the operations as follows:
1. Set all options under Downloads and Scripting to Enable. 2.
(Only Microsoft Internet Explorer 8.0) Select Display mixed content under Miscellaneous. Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 (Optional) On the Security tab, click Trusted sites and then Sites. The Trusted sites dialog box is displayed. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 2 Web-based Login Step 7 (Optional) In the Add this website to the zone text box, enter the IP address of your endpoint. Then click Add. Step 8 (Optional) Click OK. Step 9 Click the Privacy tab. Move the slider to display the Medium level. Step 10 Click the Advanced tab. Select Use TLS 1.0 under Security. Step 11 Click OK. The configuration is complete.
----End To ensure that information can be properly displayed, if you choose to skip Step 6 through Step 8, choose Tools > Pop-up Blocker > Turn Off Pop-up Blocker from the menu bar of Internet Explorer. To set Firefox, do the following:
Start the Firefox. On the menu bar, choose Tools > Options. On the Main tab, select Show the Downloads window when downloading a file. On the Privacy tab, select Accept cookies from sites. Then select OK. Logging In to the Web Interface Step 1 Open Internet Explorer. Step 2 In the address box, enter the endpoint IP address, such as 192.168.1.1. Step 3 Press Enter. The login page is displayed. Step 4 Fill in User name and Password. The default user name and password are admin and Change_Me respectively. You are advised to change the default password the first time you log in to the web interface, and then change your password regularly. Step 5 From the Language drop-down list, select a language. Step 6 Click Log In. The home page is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-1. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 2 Web-based Login Figure 2-1 Home page of the endpoint web interface
(1) Menu bar
(2) Expand/Collapse button
(3) Area for displaying your site name
(4) Shortcut bar
(5) Desktop icons
(6) Area for displaying logs
(7) Area for displaying messages
(8) Status icons
----End To ensure data security, after accessing the endpoint web interface, close the browser and delete browser caches. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 3 Menu Structure of the Web Interface 3 Menu Structure of the Web Interface Knowing the menu structure of the endpoint web interface helps you quickly find each function item. All function items on the web interface can be accessed from the menu bar on the home page. Figure 3-1 shows the menu structure. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Figure 3-1 Web interface menu structure 3 Menu Structure of the Web Interface Only the TE60 supports 4E1 functions. To quickly access a function item, you can also choose Help > Site Map and click the hyperlink for the function item. For details about the menu structure of the remote controlled UI, see B Menu Structure of the Remote Controlled UI. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Conference Experience 4 Conference Experience About This Chapter You can initiate or join conferences in multiple ways on the endpoint web interface. During a conference, you can control the conference or share presentations. 4.1 Initiating a Point-to-Point Conference You can initiate a point-to-point conference in multiple ways on the endpoint web interface. 4.2 Initiating a Multipoint Conference You can initiate a multipoint conference in multiple ways on the endpoint web interface. During a multipoint conference, all the sites can hear and view each other. 4.3 Scheduling a Conference On your endpoint, you can schedule a conference to hold at specific time. 4.4 Joining a Conference Using the Conference Access Number When initiating a conference for which the participant sites are uncertain, you can set only the number of anonymous sites. With this setting, a site can join the conference by dialing the conference access number and then following the interactive voice response (IVR) instructions. 4.5 Joining an MSUC Convergent Conference Huawei videoconferencing systems can be used in the Microsoft Unified Communications
(MSUC) environment. Register the endpoint (networked with MSUC) with a Lync Server using SIP. After that, the endpoint can place calls to Lync clients, receive calls from Lync clients, and view Lync clients' online status. 4.6 Joining an HD-Video Conference over an IMS Network The endpoint can join an HD video conference over an IMS network. 4.7 Sharing a Presentation A computer can be connected to the endpoint to share files, and the remote sites can view both your video and the desktop contents of the computer. 4.8 Creating and Sending Captions You can create and preview a banner or caption on your endpoint. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Conference Experience 4.9 Using the Do-Not-Disturb Function If you do not want to be disturbed by incoming calls, you can enable the Do-not-disturb function. 4.10 Controlling a Conference After initiating a multipoint conference, you can control the video and audio of sites using conference control functions. 4.11 Recording a Conference Your endpoint can record local and multipoint conferences. 4.12 Sending and Receiving Instant Messages During a conference, you can send instant messages to remote sites and view or close the instant messages sent from remote sites. 4.1 Initiating a Point-to-Point Conference You can initiate a point-to-point conference in multiple ways on the endpoint web interface. 4.1.1 Initiating a Conference from the Call Page On the call page, you can select a site, configure the line type and rate for the site, and place a call to the site to start a conference. Step 1 Choose Conference > Call. Step 2 Select a remote site you want to call using either of the following methods:
Click Call History and select the remote site.
Enter the name, number, or IP address of the remote site. Step 3 Set the site parameters, listed in Table 4-1. Table 4-1 Site parameters Parameter Description Setting Site name/IP address/Nu mber Specifies the name, number, or IP address of the site you want to call. To call a Cisco TelePresence site, you must set this parameter to the name of the Cisco TelePresence site. Line type Specifies the type of the line used to place the call. By default, the last used line type is displayed. To call a Microsoft Lync site, set this parameter to Auto or SIP. Rate Specifies the data transmission rate required. Select the highest available data transmission rate. The data transmission rates supported by your endpoint vary depending on the type of site you want to call. NOTE If this parameter is set incorrectly, the video quality will be affected or the call might even fail to be set Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Parameter Description 4 Conference Experience Setting up. Call mode Specifies the call type. The default value is Video.
Video: Place video calls
Voice: Place audio-only calls This parameter is available only when Line type is set to Auto or SIP. The default settings of advanced conference parameters can meet the requirements of most simple conferences. Alternatively, you can click Advanced Settings and set advanced conference parameters. For the description of each advanced conference parameter, see 7.5.3 Setting Advanced Conference Parameters. Step 4 Click Call.
----End 4.1.2 Initiating a Conference from the Address Book You can select a site from the address book and place a call to the site to initiate a conference. Procedure Step 1 Choose Address Book > Address Book. Step 2 Select one site you want to call from the local address book or the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) address book. Step 3 Click Call.
----End To modify the settings of a site you want to call, click the site. 4.1.3 Holding a Call If you receive a call or want to call another site in a point-to-point conference, you can perform call hold operations. Prerequisites Procedure The Multipoint call mode parameter has been set to Multipoint converge on System Settings > Conference > Normal on the endpoint web interface. Scenario 1: You are in a point-to-point conference with site B, and site C calls you. You can perform any of the operations described in Table 4-2. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Table 4-2 Call hold operations 4 Conference Experience Click... Reject To... Reject the incoming call and continue the current point-to-point conference. Accept & Hold Active Answer the incoming call and place the current point-to-point conference on hold. NOTE After performing this operation, you can choose Conference > Hold Call and click any of the following:
Resume: Resume the conference call placed on hold and place the active call on hold.
On hold: Place the active call on hold.
Hang up: Disconnect a site. Accept & End Active Answer the incoming call and end the current point-to-point conference. Ignore Ignore the incoming call and close the call handling dialog box. Scenario 2: You are in a point-to-point conference with site B and call site C. You can perform any of the following operations described in Table 4-3 in the dialog box that is displayed. Table 4-3 Call operations Click... To... Hold Active & Call Place the current point-to-point conference on hold and call site C. NOTE After performing this operation, you can choose Conference > Hold Call and click any of the following:
Resume: Resume the conference call placed on hold and place the active call on hold.
On hold: Place the active call on hold.
Hang up: Disconnect a site. Cancel Cancel calling site C. 4.2 Initiating a Multipoint Conference You can initiate a multipoint conference in multiple ways on the endpoint web interface. During a multipoint conference, all the sites can hear and view each other. 4.2.1 Understanding the MCU and Built-in MCU The endpoint needs to use the MCU or built-in MCU to initiate a multipoint conference. If the endpoint uses the built-in MCU to initiate a conference, no external MCU is required. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide MCU 4 Conference Experience As an indispensable component in a multipoint conference, the MCU is responsible for multiple functions, such as site access, video exchange, audio mixing, data processing, and signaling interaction. Built-in MCU An endpoint with the built-in MCU function can initiate a multipoint conference by implementing functions such as site access, video exchange, audio mixing, data processing, and signaling interaction. The endpoint can work independently, without involving the other components on the videoconferencing network in conference scheduling. In this case, the endpoint functions as a mini MCU.
On the endpoint web interface, choose Maintenance > System Information, and check whether the endpoint has a built-in MCU.
To provide the built-in MCU function, the endpoint requires a specified license. Contact Huawei post-sales engineers to purchase the license. Conferences held with the built-in MCU function have the following features:
After a point-to-point call is set up, site-by-site calls can be made to hold a multipoint conference.
BFCP or H.239 presentation dual-stream conferences are supported. A SIP site supports BFCP dual-stream, an H.323 site supports H.239 dual-stream, and a hybrid conference supports both BFCP and H.239 dual-stream.
Conferences can be locked from the built-in MCU. After a conference is locked, calls from new sites are restricted.
Conferences can be attended by both H.323 and SIP sites and support H.323 site control.
If a conference is held with a built-in MCU, only Presentation is available. Built-in MCU Capabilities of TE40/TE50 The built-in MCU supports the access from six HD video sites and three audio-only sites simultaneously in a conference.
The six HD video sites include the local site that uses its built-in MCU, that is, the built-in MCU site.
A maximum of six 720p30 full-adaptive sites are supported.
G.722 or G.711 full adaptation is supported. Built-in MCU Capabilities of TE60 The built-in MCU supports the access from nine HD video sites and three audio-only sites simultaneously in a conference.
The nine HD video sites include the local site that uses its built-in MCU, that is, the built-in MCU site.
A maximum of nine 720p30 full-adaptive sites are supported.
G.722 or G.711 full adaptation is supported. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Conference Experience Initiating a Multipoint Conference on the endpoint with a Built-in MCU Before initiating a multipoint conference, you must enable the built-in MCU function. To do so, choose System Settings > Conference > Normal and set Multipoint call mode to AUTO or Built-in MCU. To initiate a multipoint conference using the built-in MCU, call the first site and then place calls one at a time to several other sites. For details about other methods for initiating a multipoint conference, see 4.2.2 Initiating a Conference from the Predefined Conference Page, 4.2.3 Initiating a Conference from the Conference History Page, and 4.2.4 Initiating a Conference from the Address Book Page. For example, to use the built-in MCU of endpoint A to initiate a conference that includes endpoints A, B, C, and D, perform the following steps:
From endpoint A, call endpoints B, C, and D until all the calls are set up. If the built-in MCU of an endpoint is used during a conference, Lock conference can be selected from the Conference control screen on the endpoint whose built-in MCU is being used to prevent unwanted additional sites joining the conference. Conference Control Three types of roles exist in a multipoint conference initiated using the built-in MCU:
Endpoint to which the built-in MCU belongs, chair site, and non-chair sites. A site can request chair control rights only after chair control is enabled on the Endpoint to which the built-in MCU belongs. The chair control is enabled by default. Only H.323 sites support conference control functions. Table 4-4 Conference control in a multipoint conference initiated using the built-in MCU Role Conference Control Endpoint to which the built-in MCU belongs Chair site Enable chair control, Disable chair control, Lock conference, Set Continuous Presence, and Recording Release Chair, End conference, Delete Site, Add site, Set Continuous Presence, and Recording NOTE Only H.323 sites where the endpoints in V100R001C10 are used support the Conference Video Layout and Start functions. Non-chair site Request chair The recording function is available only when the recording server address is configured on the Endpoint to which the built-in MCU belongs. Continuous Presence on the Endpoint to Which the Built-in MCU Belongs The Endpoint to which the built-in MCU belongs adjusts the continuous presence layout based on the number of sites in the conference, and can add the local video and presentation Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Conference Experience to continuous presence. A maximum of 7 sites are supported in continuous presence on the TE40/TE50, and a maximum of 10 sites are supported in continuous presence on the TE60.
The maximum number of sites in continuous presence includes the local video and presentation.
For details about how to add the local video and presentation to continuous presence, see the description of Add presentation to continuous presence and Add local video to continuous presence in 7.5.2 Setting General Conference Parameters. The two parameters are invalid to H.323 sites where the endpoints in V100R001C10 are used. For these sites, you can press remote control to add the local video or presentation to continuous presence. on the 4.2.2 Initiating a Conference from the Predefined Conference Page On your endpoint, you can create a conference on the predefined conference page and initiate it from this page. Prerequisites You can use SiteCall or the built-in MCU to initiate a multipoint conference.
SiteCall: Before initiating a conference, define the participant sites and register your endpoint with the GK server. Then disable the built-in MCU as follows: Choose System Settings > Conference > Normal and set Multipoint call mode to Multipoint converge or OFF.
Built-in MCU: Before initiating a conference, enable the built-in MCU as follows:
Choose System Settings > Conference > Normal and set Multipoint call mode to Built-in MCU or AUTO. If it is defined on the Service Management Center (SMC) as a manageable participant, its built-in MCU capabilities will be restricted by the SMC. In this case, consult the SMC administrator about the maximum number of calls supported by the endpoint. To provide the built-in MCU function, the endpoint requires a specific license. Contact Huawei post-sales engineers to purchase the license. Procedure Step 1 Choose Conference > Start Conference and click the Predefined Conferences tab. Step 2 Click Create Conference and perform either of the following:
Click Address Book. On the displayed tab, select the desired sites.
Click LDAP Address Book. On the displayed tab, search for and select the desired sites. Step 3 Click
. The selected sites are added to the site list on the right. Step 4 Set the conference parameters.
If you use the built-in MCU to initiate the conference, set Conference Name, Rate, and Support recording only.
If you use SiteCall to initiate the conference, set all the parameters listed in the table. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Table 4-5 Conference parameters 4 Conference Experience Parameter Description Setting Conference Name Rate Continuous presence Specifies the name of the conference.
-
To help ensure conference quality, set this parameter to 1920 kbps or a larger value. The default value is Disable. Specifies the data transmission rate for the conference. Specifies the maximum number of site videos that can be viewed simultaneously during the conference. When continuous presence is broadcast, the sites in the conference can view the videos of multiple sites simultaneously. If you select Disable, the conference does not support continuous presence. Other parameters Specifies the mode for setting conference parameters. The default value is Auto-sensing.
Auto-sensing: Your endpoint sets conference parameters to be the same as the parameter settings described in 7.5 Specifying Conference Settings.
User defined: You must manually set Conference control password, Anonymous H.323 sites, Anonymous PSTN sites, H.235 conference, and Paying site. Conference control password Specifies the password to the conference. This password is required for:
Enter a value that contains 1 to 32 digits.
The site that wants to chair the conference to obtain the chair control rights.
Anonymous sites to join the conference for authentication. For details about how to use the password to join an authentication conference, see 4.4 Joining a Conference Using the Conference Access Number. Anonymous H.323 sites Anonymous PSTN sites Specify the number of IP or public switched telephone network (PSTN) anonymous sites that are allowed to join the conference. The default value is 0. Anonymous sites are the sites whose numbers are not defined. To allow five IP or PSTN anonymous sites to join the conference, set the Anonymous H.323 sites parameter to 5. To disallow any IP or PSTN anonymous sites to join the conference, set the Anonymous PSTN Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Conference Experience Parameter Description Setting H.235 conference sites parameter to 0. Specifies the conference security type.
Insecure conference: No data transmitted during the conference is encrypted.
Secure media conference: Media streams are encrypted. Paying site Specifies the party that will be charged for the conference.
Local site: The local site pays for the conference.
Another site: Another site pays for the conference. If you select this option, you must fill in Paying account and Paying password. The default value is Insecure conference. To enhance the communication security on your endpoint, select Secure media conference. NOTE If you select Secure media conference, confirm that Encryption is set to Enable or Maximum interconnectivity on your endpoint and the endpoints to call. Otherwise, the calls will fail. The default value is Local site. Support live broadcast Specifies whether your endpoint supports live broadcasting for multipoint conferences hosted by standalone MCUs. Support recording Specifies whether your endpoint supports recording for multipoint conferences hosted by standalone MCUs. Date Specifies the conference start time. This parameter is mandatory only when you schedule a conference. By default, this parameter is deselected, indicating that the endpoint does not support live broadcasting. By default, this parameter is deselected, indicating that the endpoint does not support recording. No default value is set for this parameter. Duration Specifies the conference duration. Unit: minute This parameter is mandatory only when you schedule a conference. Do not leave this parameter blank. Step 5 Click Hold Conference. The conference is initiated according to the parameters you set.
----End Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Conference Experience 4.2.3 Initiating a Conference from the Conference History Page The conference history contains the records of conferences your endpoint initiated or attended and sites your endpoint placed calls to or received calls from. You can select a record from the conference history to initiate a new conference. Prerequisites Background Procedure You can use SiteCall or the built-in MCU to initiate a multipoint conference.
SiteCall: Your endpoint has registered with a GK server, and Multipoint call mode is set to Multipoint converge or OFF under System Settings > Conference > Normal.
Built-in MCU: Multipoint call mode is set to Built-in MCU or AUTO under System Settings > Conference > Normal. To provide the built-in MCU function, the endpoint requires a specific license. Contact Huawei post-sales engineers to purchase the license. The conference history stores a maximum of 50 records. Step 1 Choose Conference > Start Conference and click the Conference History tab. Step 2 Select a record and click
. The conference starts.
----End 4.2.4 Initiating a Conference from the Address Book Page From the address book on your endpoint, you can select sites to initiate a conference. Prerequisites You can use SiteCall or the built-in MCU to initiate a multipoint conference.
SiteCall: Your endpoint has registered with a GK server, and Multipoint call mode is set to Multipoint converge or OFF under System Settings > Conference > Normal.
Built-in MCU: Multipoint call mode is set to Built-in MCU or AUTO under System Settings > Conference > Normal. To provide the built-in MCU function, the endpoint requires a specific license. Contact Huawei post-sales engineers to purchase the license. Procedure Step 1 Choose Address Book > Address Book. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Conference Experience Step 2 Select sites from the local address book. Alternatively, search for sites from the LDAP address book, save the found sites in the local address book, and select the sites from the local address book. Then click Start Conference. Step 3 Set the conference parameters. Refer to 4.2.2 Initiating a Conference from the Predefined Conference Page. Step 4 Click Hold Conference. The conference starts.
----End 4.3 Scheduling a Conference On your endpoint, you can schedule a conference to hold at specific time. Prerequisites You have set Conference line type in advanced conference settings to H.323 or Auto. For details about the settings, see 7.5.3 Setting Advanced Conference Parameters. Your endpoint has registered with a GK server, and Multipoint call mode is set to Multipoint converge or OFF under System Settings > Conference > Normal. Procedure Method 1: Create and schedule a conference. Step 1 Choose Conference > Start Conference and click the Schedule Conference tab. Step 2 Click New Schedule. Select conference sites and set the conference parameters. Refer to 4.2.2 Initiating a Conference from the Predefined Conference Page. Step 3 Click Schedule. The conference is scheduled.
----End Method 2: Create and schedule a predefined conference or schedule a predefined conference that exists in the Predefined Conferences list. Step 1 Choose Conference > Start Conference and click the Predefined Conferences tab. Step 2 Click Create Conference or an entry in the Conference Name column. The Hold Conference page is displayed. Step 3 Select conference sites and set the conference parameters. Refer to 4.2.2 Initiating a Conference from the Predefined Conference Page. Step 4 Click Schedule. The conference is scheduled.
----End Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Conference Experience Method 3: Schedule a conference in the Conference History list. Step 1 Choose Conference > Start Conference and click the Conference History tab. Step 2 Click an entry in the Conference Name column. The Hold Conference page is displayed. Step 3 Select conference sites and set the conference parameters. Refer to 4.2.2 Initiating a Conference from the Predefined Conference Page. Step 4 Click Schedule. The conference is scheduled.
----End Conferences scheduled using any of the preceding methods are displayed in the Schedule Conference list. 4.4 Joining a Conference Using the Conference Access Number When initiating a conference for which the participant sites are uncertain, you can set only the number of anonymous sites. With this setting, a site can join the conference by dialing the conference access number and then following the interactive voice response (IVR) instructions. Background Procedure A site dials a conference access number and follows the IVR instructions to enter the specified password to join a conference. This process is called two-stage dialing. Step 1 Obtain the access number for the authentication conference. When a conference starts, endpoints that have joined the conference can view the conference access number by choosing Maintenance > System Status > Conference. Anonymous sites can obtain the conference access number and authentication password from the SMC administrator or chair site using other methods. Step 2 Choose Conference > Call. Step 3 In Site name/IP address/Number, enter the access number. Step 4 Set the call parameters. Refer to 4.1.1 Initiating a Conference from the Call Page. Select the highest data transmission rate supported by your endpoint to increase the call success rate. Step 5 Click Call. Step 6 Choose Conference > Second Dial. Follow the IVR instructions to select a language and enter the password (if any) to join a conference. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide
----End 4 Conference Experience 4.5 Joining an MSUC Convergent Conference Huawei videoconferencing systems can be used in the Microsoft Unified Communications
(MSUC) environment. Register the endpoint (networked with MSUC) with a Lync Server using SIP. After that, the endpoint can place calls to Lync clients, receive calls from Lync clients, and view Lync clients' online status. Background After the endpoint joins the MSUC network, the following can be implemented.
The endpoint and Lync clients can place calls to each other. During a point-to-point call, switching between audio-only and video calls is available on both the endpoint and Lync client. The endpoint supports call forwarding on Lync clients. For example, if calls to Lync A has been set to be forwarded to Lync B, then after a call between Lync A and endpoint C is set up, endpoint C automatically disconnects from Lync A and calls Lync B.
From Address Book you can view Lync clients' online status. To view a Lync client's online status, you must save that Lync client to the local address book. The following describes how the endpoint places a call to the Lync client. Procedure Step 1 Register the endpoint with the MSUC network. 1. On the endpoint web interface, choose System Settings > Network and click the H.323/SIP Settings tab. 2. Click the SIP tab and set the parameters for interworking with the MSUC to register the endpoint with a Lync server. Table 4-6 describes the related parameters. Table 4-6 SIP parameters Parameter Description Setting Register with server Specifies whether your endpoint registers with a Lync Server. Set this parameter to Enable. An endpoint that registers with a Lync Server can place calls to remote sites using their IP addresses or site numbers if the remote sites also register with Lync Servers. NOTE If you select this parameter, you must also set Server address, Site number, User name, and Password. Server Specifies the IP address or domain name Example 1: 192.168.1.10 Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Conference Experience Parameter Description Setting address of the Lync Server with which you want the endpoint to register. Example 2: lync.zdtest.com If you set this parameter to the Lync Server domain name, enable the domain name server (DNS). If the DNS is not enabled, enable Proxy server. Conference service number Enable proxy server Proxy server address Site number
-
-
-
Specifies the site number for your endpoint. If your endpoint registers with a Lync Server, endpoints that also register with the Lync Server can dial this site number to call your endpoint. User name Password Specifies the user name for authentication registration. You do not need to set this parameter. You do not need to set this parameter. You do not need to set this parameter. Example: 123@zdtest.com Obtain this value from the Lync Server administrator. Example: lync_1@zdtest.com Obtain the value of this parameter from the Lync Server administrator. Server type Specifies the SIP server type. Set this parameter to OCS.
OCS: Select this option if your endpoint registers with the Microsoft Office Communications Server
(OCS) or Microsoft Lync Server.
CISCO VCS: Select this option if your endpoint registers with the Cisco TelePresence Video Communication Server (VCS).
Standard: Select this option if your endpoint registers with other SIP servers. Transmissio n type Specifies the protocol used for SIP signaling transmission. Only TCP and TLS transmission are supported.
TCP: Use the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) to implement transmission reliability.
UDP: Use the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) to implement transmission with reduced latency.
TLS: Use Transport Layer Security
(TLS) to implement transmission Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Conference Experience Parameter Description Setting security. Note that selecting this option may affect the call rate. If you select this parameter, you can set SSL version. SSL version Specifies the encryption protocol used for SIP calls, including TLS 1.0 and SSL 3.0. The default value is TLS 1.0. The default value is Manual. Video request handling Specifies how your endpoint handles video requests from a remote endpoint during a point-to-point SIP audio call or multipoint conference.
Accept automatically: Your endpoint automatically accepts video requests from the remote endpoint.
Reject automatically: Your endpoint automatically rejects video requests from the remote endpoint.
Manual: Your endpoint prompts you to accept video requests from the remote endpoint. 3. Click Save. Step 2 Place a call from the endpoint to the Lync client. 1. Choose Conference > Call. 2. In the text box, enter the Lync client number. 3. Click Call.
----End 4.6 Joining an HD-Video Conference over an IMS Network The endpoint can join an HD video conference over an IMS network. Background Borne by the standard IP protocol, IMS uses VoIP applications based on the standard SIP applications of the 3GPP to provide fixed and mobile multimedia services for operators. Integrating MCUs can enhance the functionality of the Huawei IMS HD videoconferencing solution. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Prerequisites 4 Conference Experience You have obtained the required authentication information from the IMS administrator:
unified access number, conference ID, and conference password. Endpoint users can obtain the required authentication information allocated by the IMS through emails, text messages, notices, or other methods. Procedure Step 1 Register the endpoint with the network where the IMS is located. 1. On the endpoint web interface, choose System Settings > Network and click the H.323/SIP Settings tab. 2. Click the SIP tab and set the parameters for interworking with the IMS, as described in Table 4-7. Table 4-7 SIP parameters Parameter Description Setting Register with server Specifies whether your endpoint registers with an IMS server. Set this parameter to Enable. Only endpoints that have registered with IMS servers can join the IMS network. An endpoint that registers with an IMS server can place calls to remote sites using their IP addresses or site numbers if the remote sites also register with IMS servers. NOTE If you select this parameter, you must also set Server address, Conference service number, Site number, User name, and Password. Specifies the IP address or domain name of the IMS server with which you want the endpoint to register. If you set this parameter to the IMS server domain name, enable the domain name server (DNS). If the DNS is not enabled, enable Proxy server. Server address IP address example:
192.168.1.10 Domain name example:
huawei.com It is recommended that you set Server address to the domain name of the IMS server with which you want the endpoint to register. Conference service number Specifies the conference service number for your endpoint to initiate conferences over an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) network. Set this parameter to the conference service number obtained from the IMS network administrator. Proxy server Specifies whether to enable the proxy Set this parameter to Enable. server. You must enable the proxy server when Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Conference Experience Parameter Description Setting using the IMS network. Proxy server address Specifies the address of the proxy server. If you set Server address to the IMS server domain name, set this parameter to the IP address bound to that domain name. Example: 192.168.1.10. Site number Specifies the site number for your endpoint. The parameter value must contain only digits. If your endpoint registers with an IMS server, endpoints that also register with the IMS server can dial this site number to call your endpoint. Example: 12345 User name Password Specifies the user name for authentication registration. The value can contain digits, letters, and special characters, such as @ # %. Example:
+0867552842007@huawei.co m Obtain the value of this parameter from the IMS server administrator. Server type Specifies the SIP server type. Set this parameter to Standard.
OCS: Select this option if your endpoint registers with the Microsoft Office Communications Server
(OCS) or Microsoft Lync Server.
CISCO VCS: Select this option if your endpoint registers with the Cisco TelePresence Video Communication Server (VCS).
Standard: Select this option if your endpoint registers with other SIP servers. Transmissio n type Specifies the protocol used for SIP signaling transmission.
TCP: Use the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) to implement transmission reliability.
UDP: Use the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) to implement transmission with reduced latency.
TLS: Use Transport Layer Security
(TLS) to implement transmission security. Set this parameter to UDP. The IMS network only supports UDP transmission. Video request Specifies how your endpoint handles video requests from a remote endpoint The default value is Manual. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Conference Experience Parameter Description Setting handling during a point-to-point SIP audio call or multipoint conference.
Accept automatically: Your endpoint automatically accepts video requests from the remote endpoint.
Reject automatically: Your endpoint automatically rejects video requests from the remote endpoint.
Manual: Your endpoint prompts you to accept video requests from the remote endpoint. 3. Click Save. Step 2 Choose Conference > Call. Step 3 In the text box, enter the conference unified access number. Step 4 Click Call. Step 5 Choose Conference > Second Dial. Enter the required authentication information, such as the conference ID and password, as prompted.
----End Result After the IMS authenticates the password, the endpoint can join an HD video conference over an IMS network. 4.7 Sharing a Presentation A computer can be connected to the endpoint to share files, and the remote sites can view both your video and the desktop contents of the computer. Prerequisites The presentation sharing function has been enabled, and the presentation parameters have been set. By default, the endpoint has the presentation sharing function enabled, and the default presentation parameter settings support presentation sharing. To modify these parameters, see 7.5.3 Setting Advanced Conference Parameters. The presentation video source has been connected.
Wired connection Use a cable to connect the computer to a video input port on the endpoint.
Air content sharing client 1.
(Optional) In the address box, enter the endpoint IP address and press Enter. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Conference Experience 2.
(Optional) In the upper left corner of the login page, click Download Air Content Sharing Client and install the client as prompted. The installation is complete. icon of the air content sharing client is displayed on the desktop when the If this is the first time you are installing the air content sharing client, you must restart your computer before you can use it. 3. Double-click
. 4. Double-click the endpoint to connect, or enter the endpoint IP address and click Connect. 5. In the displayed dialog box, enter the password and click Connect. The default password is Change_Me. For details, see 7.7.5 Setting the Air Content Sharing Password. Alternatively, ignore the dialog box and watch for the message An air content sharing source device requests to connect to your endpoint. Accept? that will be displayed on the endpoint web interface and remote controlled UI. When the message is displayed, select Accept. The client then successfully connects to the endpoint without any passwords. You can select either of the following modes for sharing a presentation:
Auto: The endpoint automatically sends the video along with the presentation. This mode is available only when Presentation mode is set to Live.
Manual: You can use the remote control to share a presentation. For details, see 7.5.3 Setting Advanced Conference Parameters. However, in live mode, the endpoint does not support presentation sharing using SIP. On a Microsoft unified communications (MSUC) network, the endpoint does not support presentation sharing. Background Procedure Step 1 Choose Conference > Presentation. Step 2 In the displayed dialog box, click Share. The presentation is shared with remote sites.
----End To stop sharing the presentation, click Stop. 4.8 Creating and Sending Captions You can create and preview a banner or caption on your endpoint. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Procedure 4 Conference Experience Step 1 Choose Conference > Caption. Step 2 Click Middle Caption, Bottom Caption, or Banner. Then you can:
Share a caption in the Caption List list or a banner in the Banner Title list. Preview a caption or banner on the display at your site. Edit a caption or banner. Save a caption or banner. You can save a maximum of 10 entries to the Caption List or Banner Title list.
Create or delete a caption or banner.
----End 4.9 Using the Do-Not-Disturb Function If you do not want to be disturbed by incoming calls, you can enable the Do-not-disturb function. Procedure Step 1 Choose Conference > Do-not-disturb. The Do-not-disturb dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Select Enable for Do-not-disturb and click OK.
----End 4.10 Controlling a Conference After initiating a multipoint conference, you can control the video and audio of sites using conference control functions. Icons on the Conference Control Page Table 4-8 lists common icons displayed on the conference control page. Table 4-8 Icons on the conference control page Ico n Description Description Ico n The site is not in the conference. The site is in the conference. Your site is chairing the conference. The site is being broadcast. The site is being viewed. The speakers of the site have been muted, and the site cannot hear the The microphones of the site have been muted, and the other sites in the Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Conference Experience Description Description Ico n current conference. conference cannot hear the site. The site is sharing a presentation. The site is a PSTN, H.323 PHONE, or SIP audio site. Ico n Table 4-9 lists the icons used to adjust the site display mode on the conference control page. Table 4-9 Icons used to adjust the site display mode Icon Description Refreshes the conference control page. Displays sites in a list. Displays sites as icons. Controlling a Multipoint Conference Hosted by the MCU
Note that not all the conference control functions listed in Table 4-10 are available on the conference control page during a conference, depending on your role in the conference and the settings of conference control page. Table 4-10 lists the conference control functions available in a multipoint conference hosted by the MCU. Table 4-10 Conference control functions Conferenc e Control Function Applica ble Role Description Request Chair Non-cha ir site The conference chair site can use more conference control functions than other sites. Only non-chair sites can request chair control rights when no chair site exists in a conference. Audio-only sites cannot request chair control rights. To request chair control rights, click Request Chair and enter the conference control password, that is, the chair password. NOTE Obtain the conference control password from the SMC administrator or the site that initiates the conference. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Conference Experience Conferenc e Control Function Applica ble Role Request Floor Non-cha ir site Description If a non-chair site wants to speak during a conference, the site can request the floor from the chair site. This function is especially useful when a remote site is being broadcast. This function is available only when a chair site exists in the conference. After a site requests the floor, the request is submitted to the chair site. The chair site can then determine whether to give the floor to the site.
To give the floor to the requesting site, the chair site clicks Sites Requesting Floor and clicks the site in the list. The site is broadcast, and all the sites, except the chair site and the site given the floor, are muted.
If the chair site does not give the floor to the requesting site, the conference status remains unchanged. View Site Non-cha ir site Chair site
Non-chair site: can use this function when no site or continuous presence is being broadcast during a conference;
can view the sites residing on the local MCU or MCUs of the same level only.
Chair site: can view any sites residing on the local MCU and MCUs cascaded to the local MCU; can view a site even when another site is being broadcast in continuous presence. To view a single site, click View Site and select the site or continuous presence to view. To view sites in turn, click View Site, select In Turn on the View Site page, select the sites to view one by one, and click Start Viewing Sites in Turn. To stop viewing sites in turn, click Stop Viewing Sites in Turn. Click Revoke Chair. When chair control rights are revoked, no chair site exists in the conference. Sites in the conference can then request to chair the conference. Revoke Chair Site that initiates the conferen ce Call Site Call All Chair site You can place a call to a site that is not in the conference. The site joins the conference after answering the call. To call an absent site, click Call Site. To call all absent sites included in the conference site list into the conference, click Call All. The status of a successfully connected site changes from to
. Add Site Chair site You can add sites to an ongoing conference, regardless of whether those sites have been defined in the address book. The MCU hosting the conference then places calls to the added sites. To add sites from the local or LDAP address book or add sites that have not been defined in the address book, click Add Site. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Conferenc e Control Function Applica ble Role Description 4 Conference Experience Delete Site Chair site To delete an absent site or a site that has joined the conference, click Delete Site, select the site, and confirm the operation. The chair site can disconnect a site from the conference and remove the site from the site list. To enable the site to join the conference again, the chair site must add the site to the conference by performing the Add Site operation. Hang Up Chair site To disconnect a site that has joined the conference, click Hang Up, select the site, and confirm the operation. After a site is disconnected, the site still belongs to the conference but is marked with chair site can perform the Call Site operation. To have the site join the conference again, the Broadcast Site Chair site The chair site can broadcast any non-audio-only site, including the chair site itself, or broadcast multiple sites in turn. To broadcast a single site, click Broadcast Site and select the site to broadcast. When a site is broadcast, all non-chair sites are forced to view the video of the broadcast site while the chair site can view the video of any site that is present at the conference. To stop broadcasting a site, perform Stop Broadcasting or Discussion operation. To broadcast sites in turn, click In Turn, select In Turn on the Broadcast Site page, select the sites to broadcast one by one, and click Start Broadcasting Sites in Turn. When multiple sites are broadcast in turn, all sites are forced to view the video of the broadcast sites. To stop broadcasting sites in turn, click Stop Broadcasting Sites in Turn. End Conference Chair site If a conference is completed before the scheduled time, the chair site can use the End Conference function to end the conference in advance. Set Continuous Presence Chair site Mute/Unm ute Speaker Chair site View multiple sites at the same time. The continuous presence function is used to display the video from two or more sites on the same display at the same time. The number of the sites to be displayed and the layout of the site videos vary according to continuous presence modes. This function is available only when continuous presence resources have been reserved for the conference. Click Set Continuous Presence, and choose a layout mode from the Layout drop-down list box on the Set Continuous Presence page. You can click a site to display the site in the highlighted pane as required.
To disable the speaker of a site, click Mute Speaker and select the site. The site is marked with other sites in the conference. and cannot hear
To enable the speaker of a site, click Unmute Speaker and select the site. Then the site can hear other sites in the Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Conferenc e Control Function Applica ble Role Description conference. 4 Conference Experience Mute/Unm ute MIC Chair site
To disable the microphone of a site, click Mute Microphone and select the site. The site is marked with heard by other sites in the conference. and cannot be
To enable the microphone of a site, click Unmute Microphone and select the site. Then the site can be heard by other sites in the conference. Voice activation Chair site Voice activation is used in discussion mode. When voice activation is enabled, the site with the loudest voice is displayed to other sites in the conference. To enable voice activation, click Voice activation, set Sensitivity on the Voice activation page based on your experience, and click Start.
High: Voice activation threshold volume is low.
Medium: Voice activation threshold volume is set to a medium level.
Low: Voice activation is performed when the voice volume is high. After you enable voice activation and set the sensitivity:
If the sound of one or multiple sites exceeds the voice activation threshold defined on the MCU, the video of the loudest site is broadcast. If the voice activation threshold is not exceeded, the conference status is not changed. To disable the voice activation function, click Disable. Restrict the presentation sharing rights of a site or a conference.
Locking site presentation: When the chair site locks the presentation rights of a site, only that site can share presentations.
Locking conference presentation: When the chair site locks the conference presentation, a site can share its presentation if no other site in the conference is doing so. To cancel locking, click Unlock Presentation. NOTE Before using this function, ensure that the MCU and service software used with your endpoint support this function. If a conference is not likely to be complete by the scheduled time, click Extend Conference, set Extension time (in min.) on the Extend Conference page, and click OK to extend the conference for the specified time. Before extending a conference, you must ensure that the videoconferencing resources and your account balance are sufficient to cover an extension. To increase the chances of Lock Presentatio n Chair site Extend Conference Chair site Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Conferenc e Control Function Applica ble Role Description 4 Conference Experience success, extend the conference by 30 minutes at most at a time. Revoke Presentatio n Chair site To stop a site from sharing a presentation, the chair site can revoke the presentation sharing right of the site. This function is available in a dual-stream conference. Discussion Chair site The chair site can enable discussion to cancel certain ongoing site control or conference control operations, such as broadcasting sites. This Discussion function is used to cancel the following operations performed by the chair site:
Broadcasting a site
Muting the speaker
Muting the microphone
Giving the floor In discussion mode:
Audio: All sites have unmuted microphones, and the sound of all the sites together are broadcast to every site.
Video: The video viewed by each site does not change and each site can view any other site. Give Floor Chair site Using this function, the chair site can give the floor to a site and mute all other sites. After the chair site gives the floor to a site, the video and sound of the site are broadcast, and all sites are muted, except the chair site and the site that has the floor. Although the Stop Broadcasting function is available even when a site has the floor, the chair site cannot take back the floor using Stop Broadcasting. After the chair site gives the floor to a site, the video and sound of the site are broadcast, and all sites are muted, except the chair site and the site that has the floor. If the chair site clicks Stop Broadcasting at this time, broadcasting a site stops, but the other non-chair sites are still muted. During a conference, after a non-chair requests the floor, the site is added to the floor-requesting sites list. The chair site can select a site from the list to give the floor to that site. The video of that site is then broadcast, and the microphones of all sites are muted, except the chair site and the site that has the floor. Once given the floor, the site is removed from the floor-requesting sites list. Sites Requesting Floor Chair site Release Chair Chair site Releases chair control rights. When chair control rights are released, any sites in the conference can request to become the chair site. Monitor Video All sites View the video and presentation of a remote site in real time. You can also adjust the sizes of the video and presentation. In this way, you can monitor the status and video quality of the Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Conferenc e Control Function Applica ble Role Description remote site. 4 Conference Experience You can also monitor the video from the page described in section 5.1 Viewing the Video. NOTE The video and presentation can be viewed in real time only when the video monitoring function is enabled. This function involves personal privacy. Ensure that its use complies with local laws and regulations. Recording Chair site From the conference control page, click Start to start recording and Stop to stop recording. NOTE To ensure rights of sites, read the instructions and suggestions for using recording products in the latest HUAWEI RSE6500 Security Maintenance before using the products. Controlling a Multipoint Conference Hosted by a Built-in MCU Table 4-11 lists the conference control functions available in a multipoint conference hosted by a built-in MCU. Table 4-11 Conference control functions Conferenc e Control Function Applicabl e Role Request Chair Non-chair site Enable Chair Control endpoint to which the built-in MCU belongs Description For details, see Table 4-10. NOTE Obtain the conference control password from the endpoint to which the built-in MCU belongs. The sites in the conference can request chair control rights only after you enable the chair control on the endpoint. After a site becomes the chair site, the following conference control functions are unavailable to the endpoint:
Lock conference
Conference video layout
Recording You can use the preceding conference control functions on the endpoint only after click Disable Chair Control. Disable Chair Control endpoint to which the built-in MCU belongs This function is used to disable chair control in a conference. For example, if a chair site exists in a conference, the site whose built-in MCU is being used can use this function to revoke chair control rights. In addition, the sites in the conference cannot request to become the chair site afterward. Lock endpoint to The Lock conference operation can be performed only from Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Conferenc e Control Function Applicabl e Role conference which the Conference Video Layout built-in MCU belongs
(when no chair site exists in the conference
) endpoint to which the built-in MCU belongs
(when no chair site exists in the conference
) Chair site Recording endpoint to which the built-in MCU belongs
(when no chair site exists in the Description 4 Conference Experience the endpoint whose built-in MCU is being used. After the Lock conference operation is performed, the endpoint whose built-in MCU is being used can call the other endpoints to join the conference, but other endpoints cannot call into the conference. To enable other endpoints to call into the conference, perform the Unlock Conference operation. This function is used to set the view displayed to all sites.
Voice activated, full screen: The remote sites view, in full screen, the video of the site that generates the loudest volume.
Voice activated, in panes: The remote sites view continuous presence, with the main pane displaying the video of the site that generates the loudest volume.
Bisect: The remote sites view, in bisect mode, the videos of the other sites. The site that generates the louder volume is highlighted. A presentation will not be displayed in this layout.
Fixed site, full screen: The remote sites view, in full screen, the video of a specified site. To view a site in full screen, click it in the site list.
Fixed sites, in panes: The remote sites view continuous presence, with the main pane displaying the video of a specified site. To add a site to the main pane, click it in the site list. NOTE
After you set this parameter, the viewed site views other sites in full screen or continuous presence mode.
This function is available only for H.323 sites where the endpoints in V100R001C10 are used. This function cannot be performed by the following sites at the same time:
Chair site
Site where the built-in MCU is used (in a conference hosted by a built-in MCU and not chaired by any site) For details, see Table 4-10. NOTE This function is available only for H.323 sites where the endpoints in V100R001C10 are used. To ensure rights of sites, read the instructions and suggestions for using recoridng products in the latest HUAWEI RSE6500 Security Maintenance before using the products. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Conferenc e Control Function Applicabl e Role Description 4 Conference Experience conference
) Chair site endpoint to which the built-in MCU belongs Chair site For details, see Table 4-10. Chair site For details, see Table 4-10. End Conference Release Chair Delete Site Add Site On the conference control page, you can also perform the following operations:
If the sites in a conference have been classified into groups in a site template, you can select a group from the selected group are displayed in the preset mode. For details about how to set site groups, see 6.4 Customizing a Site Template. drop-down list box. Then, the sites in the 4.11 Recording a Conference Your endpoint can record local and multipoint conferences. Prerequisites To ensure rights of participants, read the instructions and suggestions for using recoridng products in the latest HUAWEI RSE6500 Security Maintenance before using the products. Table 4-12 Recording prerequisites Conference Type Local conference Multipoint conference hosted by a Huawei standalone MCU (such as the HUAWEI VP9660 MCU) Recording Prerequisites The recording server IP address or URL is set on the endpoint.
The recording server is online. NOTE Check the recording server's online status from the Service Management Center (SMC).
The endpoint and the recording server have registered with a GK server.
Support recording is selected. For details, Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Conference Experience Conference Type Recording Prerequisites see 4.2.2 Initiating a Conference from the Predefined Conference Page. Multipoint conference hosted by a built-in MCU The recording server IP address or URL is set on the endpoint. Background
During recording of local conferences, the endpoint cannot place or answer calls.
During recording of local conferences, you can perform Start, Pause, Resume, and Stop operations. During recording of multipoint conferences, you can perform Start and Stop operations.
When a Huawei standalone MCU is used to host a conference, you can enable or disable live broadcast and recording for the conference.
When a built-in MCU is used to host a conference, you can enable or disable recording for the conference.
During a multipoint conference, the chair site and the site where the built-in MCU is used can perform recording operations.
To record a local conference, follow the following steps in this section. To record a multipoint conference, see 4.10 Controlling a Conference. Procedure Step 1 Choose Conference > Control Recording. Step 2 Click Start. The recording starts.
----End To stop recording, click Stop. 4.12 Sending and Receiving Instant Messages During a conference, you can send instant messages to remote sites and view or close the instant messages sent from remote sites. Prerequisites
Your endpoint is in a conference.
Your endpoint uses H.323. Only H.323 sites can send and receive instant messages.
T.140 captions have been enabled on your endpoint, because instant messages are a type of T.140 caption. To enable T.140 captions, choose System Settings > Display >
Caption and set Sharing mode to T.140. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Procedure 4 Conference Experience Step 1 Choose Conference > Instant Message. Step 2 In the displayed Instant Message dialog box, enter a message. Step 3 Select the desired remote sites and click Send. The message is sent to the remote sites. When receiving the message, the remote sites can view and close the message.
----End Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 5 Device Control 5 Device Control About This Chapter After a conference starts, you can control the video and audio devices on the endpoint web interface to obtain the expected conference effect. 5.1 Viewing the Video After the video monitoring function is enabled, you can view the video and presentation of local and remote sites on the endpoint web interface. 5.2 Controlling a Camera You can perform pan, tilt, and zoom (PTZ) control over a local or remote camera. 5.3 Setting a Camera Preset Camera presets are camera positions you set and save ahead of time. A camera preset stores the pan, tilt, and zoom settings of the camera. You can easily control the camera by switching between camera presets. You can configure remote camera presets before and during conferences. 5.4 Selecting Video Sources The endpoint provides multiple video input ports for connecting to video devices. When multiple video devices are connected, you can set one video device as the local video source and another one as the local presentation source. You can also select the video or presentation to be displayed through video output ports. 5.5 Controlling Audio On your endpoint, you can adjust the audio effects. For example, you can adjust the volume of the microphone and speaker. 5.6 Setting the Combined Picture With the combined picture function, you can view multiple videos (such as the local and remote videos and presentations) in Picture in Picture (PiP) or split-screen mode on one display. 5.7 Setting Camera Parameters On your endpoint, you can set the camera parameters, including video mode, noise reduction, and video resolution. You can view the video result of your settings on the display connected to your endpoint. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 5 Device Control 5.8 Setting Preferred Video Parameters If you find that the displayed video deviates from its normal position, adjust the picture offset. If a blurring or slight jitter issue occurs in the video, adjust the sampling phase. 5.9 Setting Up a PPPoE Dial-Up Connection Correct IP parameter settings on your endpoint enable you to set up a PPPoE dial-up connection with a broadband network to communicate with other network devices. 5.10 Using the Remote Control You can use a virtual remote control on the web interface to control your endpoint. 5.1 Viewing the Video After the video monitoring function is enabled, you can view the video and presentation of local and remote sites on the endpoint web interface. Prerequisites The video monitoring function has been enabled. This function can be enabled only on the remote controlled UI. To enable the video monitoring function, choose Advanced >
Settings > Secured > Web Login and select Monitor video. This function involves personal privacy. Ensure that its use complies with local laws and regulations. Procedure Log in to the web interface, choose Device Control > Device Control, and click the Video Control tab to view the video of local and remote sites, as shown in Figure 5-1. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Figure 5-1 Viewing the video 5 Device Control You can click the drop-down list box to select the video source to view, or click Capture to capture a picture of the video that is being played. 5.2 Controlling a Camera You can perform pan, tilt, and zoom (PTZ) control over a local or remote camera. Prerequisites You are familiar with the following buttons for camera control:
: Turns the camera upward, downward, leftward, and rightward.
: Turns the camera forward.
: Enlarges the image taken by a camera.
: Zooms in on a scene.
: Shrinks the image taken by a camera.
: Zooms out on a scene.
: Automatically adjusts the camera focus. Procedure Step 1 Choose Device Control > Device Control. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 5 Device Control Step 2 In the upper right corner of the Video Control page, select the camera you want to control, as shown in Figure 5-2. Figure 5-2 Camera control
When your endpoint is not in a conference, you can select only Local camera.
When your endpoint is in a conference, you can select Local camera or Remote camera. By default, Local camera is selected. When Monitor video is enabled, the video delivered from the camera under control is displayed in the upper left corner of the Video Control page. You can then view the camera output while you control the camera. Step 3 Click the controls shown in Figure 5-2 to control cameras.
----End When the desired video is displayed on the monitor, you can save the camera settings as a preset so you can easily switch to the preset in the future. For details about how to set a camera preset, see 5.3 Setting a Camera Preset. 5.3 Setting a Camera Preset Camera presets are camera positions you set and save ahead of time. A camera preset stores the pan, tilt, and zoom settings of the camera. You can easily control the camera by switching between camera presets. You can configure remote camera presets before and during conferences. Prerequisites You are familiar with how to control a camera. For details, see 5.2 Controlling a Camera. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Background Table 5-1 lists the camera preset details. Table 5-1 Camera preset details 5 Device Control Endpoint Number of Camera Presets Data Is Lost After Restart Local Remote 30 No Dynamically adjustable Yes Saving a Camera Preset Step 1 Choose Device Control > Device Control and click the Video Control tab. On the displayed Video Control page, the camera control area is on the right side. Step 2 Adjust the camera pan, tilt, and zoom settings until the desired video is displayed on the monitor. Refer to 5.2 Controlling a Camera. Step 3 Click the Save Preset tab, as shown in Figure 5-3. Figure 5-3 Setting a Camera Presets Step 4 Select a number and click Confirm.
: indicates that the number has not been set for a preset. After you select this number and confirm the selection, the number is used for the current preset.
: indicates that the number has been set for a preset. After you select this number and confirm the selection, the current preset will overwrite the original preset. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide
----End 5 Device Control Switching Between Camera Presets Step 1 On the Video Control page, click Switch Preset. Step 2 Under Switch Preset, select a number corresponding to a preset, and click Confirm.
----End Removing a Camera Preset Step 1 On the Video Control page, click Save Preset tab. Step 2 Under Save Preset, select the number corresponding to the preset you want to remove, and click Clear.
----End 5.4 Selecting Video Sources The endpoint provides multiple video input ports for connecting to video devices. When multiple video devices are connected, you can set one video device as the local video source and another one as the local presentation source. You can also select the video or presentation to be displayed through video output ports. Prerequisites To set the computer desktop as a video input source, ensure that you have set the computer video to a video resolution and refresh rate that your endpoint supports. For details, see 7.3.5 Configuring Video Output. Background
Selecting video input sources A video device can be a document camera, computer, record and playback device, or DVD player. If you have connected multiple video devices to the input ports on your endpoint, select local video and presentation sources from these connected devices. The endpoint adopts difference policies to deliver the video and presentation based on on-site situations:
In single-screen display mode, if no presentation is shared during a conference, remote sites view the conference video of the local site; if a presentation is shared, both the local and remote sites view the presentation. In dual-screen mode, the display device connected to the main output port delivers the video while the display device connected to the auxiliary output port delivers the presentation. During the layout switch in combined picture or continuous presence mode, remote sites can always view the conference video of the local site. For details about how to set video input ports, see 7.3.2 Configuring Video Input.
Selecting video output sources Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 5 Device Control During a conference, you can manually switch between the local video, local presentation, remote video, and remote presentation to be displayed through a video output port. For details about how to set video output ports, see 7.3.5 Configuring Video Output. Selecting the Video Source and Presentation Source Step 1 Choose Device Control > Device Control and click the Video Control tab. Step 2 In the lower left corner of the Video Control page, click the Video Input Source tab. Step 3 Set Video Source and Presentation Source. You can set the local video source to multi-view mode. For details about multi-view mode settings, see 7.3.3 Setting the Multi-View Mode.
----End Selecting the Video Output Source Step 1 Choose Device Control > Device Control and click the Video Control tab. Step 2 In the lower right corner of the Video Control page, click the Video Output Source tab. Step 3 Select the video or presentation to be displayed through video output ports.
----End 5.5 Controlling Audio On your endpoint, you can adjust the audio effects. For example, you can adjust the volume of the microphone and speaker. Procedure Step 1 Choose Device Control > Device Control and click the Audio Control tab. Step 2 Set the audio control parameters listed in Table 5-2. Table 5-2 Audio control parameters Parameter Description Setting Audio Input Audio Input Turns on or off all audio input sources. The default value is Unmute. MIC 1 MIC 2 (only TE60) Adjusts the microphone volume at your site. When you adjust this microphone volume, the volume heard at remote sites is adjusted accordingly. The default value is +0dB. Value range: -12 dB to +12 dB RCA L RCA R Adjusts the input volume of the RCA port at your site. When you adjust this input volume, the volume heard at The default value is +0dB. Value range: -12 dB to +12 dB Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 5 Device Control Parameter Description Setting remote sites is adjusted accordingly. HDMI L HDMI R Adjusts the input volume of the HDML port at your site. When you adjust this input volume, the volume heard at remote sites is adjusted accordingly. The default value is +0dB. Value range: -12 dB to +12 dB NOTE This parameter is available only when the HDMI port of the endpoint is connected to an input source. DP L (only TE60) DP R (only TE60) Adjusts the input volume of the DP port at your site. When you adjust this input volume, the volume heard at remote sites is adjusted accordingly. The default value is +0dB. Value range: -12 dB to +12 dB NOTE This parameter is available only when the DP port of the endpoint is connected to an input source. LINE IN L
(only TE50) LINE IN R
(only TE50) Adjusts the input volume of the LINE IN port at your site. When you adjust this input volume, the volume heard at remote sites is adjusted accordingly. The default value is +0dB. Value range: -12 dB to +12 dB Microphone array 1 Displays the microphone array volumes and battery levels in real time.
-
MIC array 1 battery level Microphone array 2 MIC array 2 battery level Microphone array 3(only TE60) MIC array 3 battery level(only TE60) Audio Output Speaker Volume Mutes or unmutes the speaker at your site. To hear other sites, unmute the speaker. Adjusts the output volume heard at your site. If both left and right audio channels are available, the volume of both channels is adjusted at the same time. The default value is Unmute. The default value is 15. Value range: 0-21 Alert tone Increases or decreases the alert tone The default value is 3. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Parameter Description volume volume. Sound Effect Locally output sound from AUDIO IN Specifies whether to allow the audio input from the LINE IN port, the HDMI port, or the RCA port to be heard at your site. AUDIOIN remote output SPDIF Specifies whether to allow the audio input from the LINE IN port, the HDMI port, or the RCA port to be heard at remote sites. Specifies whether you can hear the sound from the local SPDIF digital audio port at your site. To hear the sound, set this parameter to Unmute. AUDIO IN echo cancellation If echo cancellation is enabled, the endpoint removes echo in the audio input from the MIC 1 and MIC 2 (only TE60) interfaces. Music Mode Specifies whether to enable the MIC 1 and MIC 2 (only TE60) to pick up the music that is playing at the local site to provide a better listening experience. 5 Device Control Setting Value range: 0-3 The default value is Mute. The default value is Unmute. The default value is Mute. The default value is Mute. The default value is Mute. Bass Middle Treble PSTN PSTN Adjusts the gain of bass, middle, and treble tones. The default value is +0dB. Value range: -6 dB to +6 dB Adjusts the volume of a PSTN call at your site. When you adjust this volume, the volume heard at remote sites is adjusted accordingly. The default value is +0dB. Value range: -12 dB to +12 dB Mix PSTN audio Specifies whether all sites (including PSTN sites such as mobile phones) in a conference can hear each other. The default value is Enable. If you retain the default value, all sites in a conference can hear each other. Retain the default value when your endpoint joins a multipoint conference as a PSTN site.
----End Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 5.6 Setting the Combined Picture 5 Device Control With the combined picture function, you can view multiple videos (such as the local and remote videos and presentations) in Picture in Picture (PiP) or split-screen mode on one display. Prerequisites Background Procedure Two or more of the following video sources are available: local video, local presentation, remote video, and remote presentation. You can view multiple videos on one display at the same time. The positions, sizes, and combination of these images are configurable. Step 1 Choose Device Control > Device Control and click the Combined Picture tab. Step 2 Click Switch Video. Videos are displayed in the mode you select.
----End 5.7 Setting Camera Parameters On your endpoint, you can set the camera parameters, including video mode, noise reduction, and video resolution. You can view the video result of your settings on the display connected to your endpoint. Procedure Step 1 Choose Device Control > Device Control and click the Camera parameters adjustment tab. Step 2 Set the camera parameters listed in Table 5-3. Table 5-3 Camera parameters Parameter Description Setting Camera input interface Exposure mode Specifies the endpoint's video input port to which the camera is to be connected. The default value is 1 MAIN IN. The default value is Auto. Specifies the mode for using natural light. You can select either of the following modes:
Auto: The camera automatically selects the optimum configuration based on the surrounding Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 5 Device Control Parameter Description Setting White balance Picture mode The default value is Auto. environment.
Manual: You need to manually adjust Brightness gain, Shutter speed, and Iris.
Iris priority: When you manually adjust the aperture, the camera selects the corresponding shutter rate.
Shutter priority: When you manually adjust the shutter rate, the camera selects the corresponding aperture. This mode is mainly used to shoot moving objects. Specifies the white balance to enable the camera to accurately recognize the color white and deliver more vivid videos.
Auto: The camera automatically calculates and outputs the value using color information from the entire screen.
One-push: This is a fixed white balance mode. Once you select this mode, the value is automatically adjusted. This mode assumes that the camera shoots a white subject occupying more than 1/2 of the image, under correct light conditions. The mode is lost when the endpoint is powered off. You have to reset this mode after the endpoint is powered on.
Manual: This is a manual white balance mode. You automatically control the red gain and blue gain that range from -128 to 127. Specifies the output video display effect. The default value is Standard.
Standard: reproduces video more faithfully.
Vivid: delivers brighter video with cooler colors.
Natural: delivers video with warmer colors.
User defined: delivers video with custom settings. After you select this option, you can set the following parameters. Aperture: sharpens video edges and contours to preserve the impression of clarity and fine Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 5 Device Control Parameter Description Setting details. Over-sharpening will make video less realistic. Brightness: specifies the video output level that changes the brightness of the video displayed on the monitor. Hue: adjusts the video color. Saturation: adjusts the grayscale of each color. The higher the saturation, the brighter a color. Noise reduction Removes noise artifacts from video. A larger value causes the video to have less noise but detail may also be lost. The default value is Low. Specifies whether the camera automatically sets the video output resolution. The default value is Disable. Specifies the video output resolution for the camera. This parameter is available only when Set output resolution automatically is set to Disable. Specifies whether the video input from the camera is rotated by 180 degrees. When the camera is hung, set this parameter to Enable. The default value is 1080p 60Hz. The default value is Disable. Set output resolution automaticall y Video resolution Image inversion
----End 5.8 Setting Preferred Video Parameters If you find that the displayed video deviates from its normal position, adjust the picture offset. If a blurring or slight jitter issue occurs in the video, adjust the sampling phase. Background Procedure VGA or YPbPr image offset may occur in video input or output, such as when the computer desktop is displayed on the display device. A blurring or slight jitter issue may occur in the video displayed on the display device. In this case, you can set the sampling phase to adjust the color. Step 1 Choose Device Control > Device Control and click the PreferenceVideo tab. Step 2 Adjust the video parameters described in Table 5-4. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Table 5-4 Video parameters Parameter Image Offset Sampling Phase Small window position offset Output Adjustment Adjust presentation resolution
----End 5 Device Control Setting Select Horizontal offset or Vertical offset and drag the slider to adjust the image offset on the video input and output ports. Drag the slider to adjust the sampling phase for the video input port. Drag the slider to adjust the offset for the Picture in Picture (PiP) window. Drag the slider to adjust the size of the output video. If your monitor specifications are low, and the video output from the endpoint does not display properly, set this parameter to fix the display issue. Before setting this parameter, make sure:
The endpoint is connected to the monitor using a standard cable.
The Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) from the monitor can be correctly read by the endpoint. Drag the slider to adjust the resolution of the presentation. Dragging the slider left blurs the presentation, and dragging the slider right sharpens it. 5.9 Setting Up a PPPoE Dial-Up Connection Correct IP parameter settings on your endpoint enable you to set up a PPPoE dial-up connection with a broadband network to communicate with other network devices. Prerequisites
You have set PPPoE to Enable.
You have entered the user name and password that are provided by your broadband access service provider in User name and Password respectively.
You have set Dialing mode to Manual. If Dialing mode is set to Disable, the endpoint automatically sets up a PPPoE dial-up connection. Procedure Step 1 Choose Device Control > PPPoE Dialing. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide The PPPoE Dialing page is displayed. Step 2 Click Dial. To cancel a PPPoE dial-up connection, set PPPoE to Disable.
----End Follow-up Procedure 5 Device Control When a PPPoE dial-up connection is set up, your endpoint has a new IP address. Use this IP address the next time you want to log in to the endpoint web interface. To obtain your endpoint IP address, access the home screen of the user interface controlled by the remote control and choose Advanced > Settings > Network > IP > Local IP address. 5.10 Using the Remote Control You can use a virtual remote control on the web interface to control your endpoint. Choose Device Control > Use Remote Control and click the desired button on the virtual remote control. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6 Managing the Local Address Book 6 Managing the Local Address Book About This Chapter The address book stores site information. You can add, edit, and delete site entries. The address book saves time because you do not need to enter site information to initiate a conference and prevents entry of incorrect IP addresses. 6.1 Editing the Local Address Book From the address book page, you can add a site or group, search for and sort the sites. 6.2 Using Virtual Conference Rooms From a standalone MCU, the administrator can reserve conference resources, schedule a conference without predefined sites, and assign the conference a number (the virtual conference room number). 6.3 Importing and Exporting Address Book From the endpoint web interface, you can export the local address book to the local computer or a server. You can also import the modified address book to the endpoint, after which the records in the address book are displayed on the address book page. 6.4 Customizing a Site Template A site template is used to group sites for easy site management. In this template, the sites are identified by their site names. 6.1 Editing the Local Address Book From the address book page, you can add a site or group, search for and sort the sites. Adding a Site Step 1 Choose Address Book > Address Book. Step 2 Click Add Site and set the site parameters listed in Table 6-1. Table 6-1 Site parameters Parameter Description Setting Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6 Managing the Local Address Book Parameter Description Setting Name Specifies the name of the site. This site name is superimposed on the site video. The value can contain a maximum of 64 characters, including digits, letters, and special characters. Category Specifies the conferencing scenario of the site. The default value is Ordinary site.
Ordinary site: Select this option for a traditional videoconferencing site.
Telepresence site: Select this option for a Huawei three-screen telepresence site.
CT site: Select this option for a Cisco TelePresence site. Type Specifies the type of the line the site uses to access the videoconferencing network. The default value is H.323.
If you select IP, your endpoint will use the protocol set for Preferred IP protocol to call the site. If you set Category to CT site, the available value for Type is SIP. Rate Specifies the data transmission rate of the line selected for the remote endpoint. Select the highest available data transmission rate. The supported data transmission rates vary depending on the type of the site you want to call. Country/Reg ion code Specifies the country or area where the site is located. No default value is set for this parameter. This parameter is available only for integrated services digital network
(ISDN) and public switched telephone network (PSTN) sites. Area code Specifies the area code for the site. This parameter is available only for ISDN and PSTN sites. No default value is set for this parameter. Number Specifies the site number used to place calls between sites. No default value is set for this parameter.
IP, E1, 4E1, ISDN, and H.323 phone site numbers are allocated by the videoconferencing service provider.
PSTN site numbers are telephone numbers. IP address Specifies the IP address of the site. NOTE This parameter is unavailable if you set No default value is set for this parameter. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6 Managing the Local Address Book Parameter Description Setting Category to CT site. URI Specifies the uniform resource identifier
(URI) of the site, for example, abcd@huawei.com. No default value is set for this parameter. No default value is set for this parameter. Line 1 #1 Line 1 #2 Line 2 #1 Line 2 #2 Line 3 #1 Line 3 #2 NOTE This parameter is available only when Type is set to IP, H.323, or SIP. Specify the numbers your endpoint uses to call the site. These parameters are available only for ISDN sites.
If the ISDN site rate is set to a value ranging from 64 kbit/s to 2048 kbit/s, set Line 1 #1 only, because you only need to dial that number to call the site. If the ISDN site rate is set to 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 x 64 kbit/s, set the other required parameters as well, because you need to dial the BRI line numbers one by one to call the site. For example, when the ISDN site rate is set to 2 x 64 kbit/s, set the first two parameters Line 1 #1 and Line 1 #2;
when the ISDN site rate is set to 3 x 64 kbit/s, set the first three parameters Line 1 #1, Line 1 #2, and Line 2 #1, and so forth. Line 1 #2 specifies the second number of the first BRI line. Sort ID Specifies the sequence number of the site in the address book. The default value is 0. Step 3 Click Save. The settings take effect immediately. The new site is listed in the address book.
----End Adding a Group Step 1 Choose Address Book > Address Book. Step 2 Click Add Group. In Name, enter the group name. Step 3 Select one or more sites and click
. The selected sites are displayed under Group Members. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6 Managing the Local Address Book To delete a site listed in Group Members, select the site and click To delete all sites, click
. Step 4 Click Save. The new group is listed in the address book.
----End Managing Address Records
Searching for Records In the search box, enter key words for an address and click
.
Modifying Records Click the name of a site or group in the address book. On the displayed editing page, modify the settings for the site or group.
Deleting Records Select the site or group you want to delete and click Delete.
Sorting Records If there are multiple sites on the address book page, conference-related pages, or other pages, you can sort the sites based on their properties, such as by name, number, line type, online status, and type. From the site lists on some of these pages, you can click one of five letter ranges,
, to display the sites whose names start with letters within that range. 6.2 Using Virtual Conference Rooms From a standalone MCU, the administrator can reserve conference resources, schedule a conference without predefined sites, and assign the conference a number (the virtual conference room number). Background Procedure The virtual conference room function simplifies the process of initiating multipoint conferences from the endpoint in the following aspects:
A virtual conference room can be configured with an easy-to-remember access number for sites to dial to join the conference.
From the Virtual Conference Room page, users can search for virtual conference room entries and call a virtual conference room found or save the record to the endpoint. Step 1 Choose Address Book > Address Book and click the Virtual Conference Room tab. Step 2 Perform any of the following operations:
Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6 Managing the Local Address Book
Select the virtual conference you want to delete and click Delete. Select the virtual conference you want to call and click Call. In the search box, enter key words for virtual conferences and click conferences that meet the search criteria in the local address book are displayed. The virtual
Click Search for LDAP Address Book in the lower right corner to search the LDAP address book for virtual conferences.
----End 6.3 Importing and Exporting Address Book From the endpoint web interface, you can export the local address book to the local computer or a server. You can also import the modified address book to the endpoint, after which the records in the address book are displayed on the address book page. Background The exported address book is saved to a file in vCard format. The file name extension is .vcf. When exporting the address book, you can specify the character encoding format to either of the following:
China: The character set is GB2312.
Other countries: The character set is UTF-8. Procedure Step 1 Choose Address Book > Address Book. Step 2 Perform either of the following:
To import new entries to the local address book, click Import to Local Address Book. To export the local address book, click Export from Local Address Book.
----End 6.4 Customizing a Site Template A site template is used to group sites for easy site management. In this template, the sites are identified by their site names. Creating a Site Template Step 1 Choose Address Book > Site Template. Step 2 Click Create. Step 3 In Template Name, enter a template name, for example, test. Step 4 Add a group to the template, as the test template in the following example:
1. Click Create Group. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6 Managing the Local Address Book The Add group group is displayed under Group Name. 2. Double-click the Add group group and change the group name to, for example, group1. Step 5 Add sites to the new group, as the group1 group in the following example:
Select group1 under Group Name. Click Add from Address Book to add sites from the address book, or click Add Temporary Site to add temporary sites. Step 6 Repeat Step 4 to add another group to the template. Step 7 Repeat Step 5 to add sites to the new groups. Step 8 Click Save. After being saved, a site template is displayed under Template Name. When one of the sites in the site template is in a conference, the site template name is listed in the drop-down list box on the Conference Control page.
----End Editing a Site Template Step 1 Choose Address Book > Site Template. Step 2 From the Template Name drop-down list box, select the site template you want to edit. Click Edit. Step 3 Modify the settings of the site template. Step 4 Click Save.
----End Deleting a Site Template Step 1 Choose Address Book > Site Template. Step 2 Select the site template you want to delete. Step 3 Click Delete.
----End Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings 7 System Settings About This Chapter After the configuration wizard is complete, you can use the endpoint to initiate simple conferences. You can also set advanced parameters for the endpoint on the endpoint web interface based on your video and audio conference requirements. The System Settings page is available only to the web interface administrator of the endpoint. 7.1 Setting Basic Parameters Set basic parameters for the endpoint on the endpoint web interface, such as the system time and functions of number keys on the remote control. 7.2 Specifying Caption Settings Caption settings include the banner or caption type, position, size, background, and color. 7.3 Setting Video Parameters You can set video input and output parameters on the endpoint web interface and set the multi-view mode to achieve the desired video effect. 7.4 Configuring Audio After connecting audio cables, set the audio parameters. 7.5 Specifying Conference Settings Your endpoint is ready for videoconferencing with its default conference settings, but you can customize the conference settings based on the site requirements. 7.6 Specifying Network Settings The endpoint can communicate with other devices properly only after network settings are specified on the endpoint web interface based on the network deployment of the endpoint. 7.7 Security To improve communication security, you can encrypt conferences, set or change conference passwords, and disable remote access to the endpoint. 7.8 Importing Security Certificates Import certificates on the endpoint web interface to improve the communication security. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7.9 Managing System Files 7 System Settings Manage system files on the endpoint interface to improve the operation and maintenance
(O%amp;M) efficiency of the endpoint. 7.1 Setting Basic Parameters Set basic parameters for the endpoint on the endpoint web interface, such as the system time and functions of number keys on the remote control. 7.1.1 Setting the System time You must correctly set the system time of the endpoint for services to run properly. Step 1 Choose System Settings > General. Step 2 Click the Time and Time Zone tab and set the parameters listed in Table 7-1. Table 7-1 Time and time zone parameters Parameter Description Setting Location Specifies the country or area where your endpoint is located. The default value is China. When you set this parameter, your endpoint automatically adjusts the value of the Time zone parameter. Time zone Specifies the time difference between the local time and the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). The default value is
(UTC+08:00) Beijing, Chongqing, Hong Kong, Urumqi. Your endpoint automatically sets this parameter based on the value set for Location. Time format Specifies the format in which time is The default value is 24-hour. displayed. The default value is Disable. Adjust time automaticall y based on DST Specifies whether to automatically adjust the endpoint clock time to daylight saving time (DST). When the DST is enabled, the endpoint clock is adjusted 1 hour forward. NOTE The presence of this parameter is controlled by your settings of Time zone. This parameter is available for countries and regions that support DST. Date format Specifies the format in which the date is displayed. The default value is YYYY/MM/DD. Enable NTP Specifies whether to automatically synchronizes system time with a The default value is Disable. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting Network Time Protocol (NTP) server at an interval of 300 seconds. NOTE If you set this parameter to Enable NTP, you must also set NTP server address. NTP address type Specifies the mode for your endpoint to obtain the NTP server IP address. The default value is Manual.
Auto: Your endpoint automatically obtains the NTP server IP address.
Manual: You must manually set the NTP server IP address. This parameter is available only when Connection type is set to Dynamic IP. NOTE For details about how to set Connection type, see 7.6.1 Setting IP Parameters. Specifies the NTP server IP address. NTP server address System time Specifies the time set on the system. No default value is set for this parameter. Set the system time to your local time to ensure appropriate use of system functions, such as joining conferences on time and recording accurate event occurrence time in logs. Step 3 Click Save. The settings take effect immediately.
----End 7.1.2 Setting the Ringtone for Incoming Calls When an incoming call arrives, the endpoint rings. You can set the desired ringtone. Choose System Settings > General > Ringtone and select the desired ringtone. 7.1.3 Managing Power The endpoint supports the sleep function to reduce power consumption. You can set the sleep time so that the endpoint automatically enters sleep mode when it is idle for the specified period of time. You can also set the scheduled power-on and power-off time. Step 1 Choose System Settings > General. Step 2 Click the Power management tab and set the parameters listed in Table 7-2. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Table 7-2 Basic parameters 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting Power management Shut Down Specifies whether the endpoint can be powered off. The default value is Enable. If you set this parameter to Disable, you can only restart the endpoint or place it in sleep mode from Device Control >
Shut Down. Enter sleep mode Specifies the period after which the endpoint enters sleep mode if you do not perform any operations. If you set this parameter to Never, the endpoint will never automatically enter sleep mode. The default value is After 10 min. The default value is Disable. The default value is 0:0, which corresponds to the 24-hour value for Time format. The default value is Disable. The default value is 0:0, which corresponds to the 24-hour value for Time format. The default value is Disable. Scheduled power-on Specifies whether the endpoint automatically powers on at the specified time. Scheduled power-on time
(hh:mm) Scheduled power-off Scheduled power-off time
(hh:mm) Wake-on-L AN NOTE If you enable this function, you must also set Scheduled power-on time (hh:mm). Specifies the time when the endpoint automatically powers on. The value format depends on the value set for Time format. Specifies whether the endpoint automatically powers off at the specified time. NOTE If you enable this function, you must also set Scheduled power-off time (hh:mm). Specifies the time when the endpoint automatically powers off. The value format depends on the value set for Time format. Specifies whether you can remotely wake up a standby or sleeping endpoint by sending Wake on LAN (WOL) messages. NOTE A standby endpoint indicates that the power switch on the endpoint's rear panel is in the ON position and that the endpoint can be turned off by pressing the power key on the remote control. Control TV sleep mode Specifies whether you can turn on or off the display connected to the endpoint. If The default value is Disable. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting you enable this function and choose Device Control > Shut Down, the display will be turned off. This parameter is available only when Shut Down is set to Disable. NOTE If you enable this function, you must also set Serial port 1-connected TV model and Serial port 2-connected TV model. Specify the types of displays connected to the COM1 and COM2 ports at the back of the endpoint. The default value is TCL. Set the parameters according to the displays connected to the COM1 and COM2 ports at the back of the endpoint. Serial port 1-connected TV model Serial port 2-connected TV model Step 3 Click Save. The settings take effect immediately.
----End 7.1.4 Setting Number Key Functions You can set the number keys on the remote control to facilitate your daily use of the endpoint. To set the number keys choose System Settings > General > Select number key function.
When the endpoint is not in a conference and the display is showing the menus or camera control screen, you can only control camera presets by pressing number keys on the remote control.
When the endpoint is in a conference, you can select either of the following options:
Second Dial: Follow the instructions to press number keys to perform two-stage dialing. Control camera preset: On the menus or camera control screen, press a number key to move the camera to the preset bound to that key. To toggle between these two options, press on the remote control for 3 seconds or more. 7.2 Specifying Caption Settings Caption settings include the banner or caption type, position, size, background, and color. Background Your endpoint supports T.140 and non-T.140 captions. Table 7-3 describes the differences between these caption types. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Table 7-3 Comparison between non-T.140 and T.140 captions Non-T.140 Caption T.140 Caption Superimposed on the video of your site and sent with the video to remote sites Can be sent and received by Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) and H.323 endpoints Not superimposed on the video of your site, sent to remote sites, and displayed on remote displays Can be sent and received by H.323 endpoints only Can be sent and received by all endpoints Can be sent and received only by endpoints that support T.140 captions Can be sent only from endpoints in a conference Can be sent from any of the following in a conference:
Endpoint used at the chair site
SMC2.0
Endpoint used by either party during a point-to-point call Procedure Step 1 Choose System Settings > Display and click the Caption tab. Step 2 Set the caption parameters listed in Table 7-4. Table 7-4 Caption parameters Parameter Description Setting Sharing mode Specifies the type of the caption. The default value is T.140. For details about caption types, see Table 7-3. Font size Specifies the font size for the banners and middle and bottom captions. For middle and bottom captions, the default value is Medium. For banners, the default value is Largest. Bold Specifies whether the banners and middle and bottom captions is displayed in bold. For middle and bottom captions, the default value is No. For banners, the default value is Yes. Font Type Specifies the font type of captions. The default value is Boldface. Settings of this parameter take effect only when the language of the remote controlled UI is set to simplified Chinese. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting NOTE To set the language of the remote controlled UI, choose System Settings > Display >
GUI. Height Specifies the percentage of the banner or bottom caption height to the entire display. The default value is 10%. Transparenc y Specifies the banners and middle and bottom captions transparency. The default value is Half transparent. Line spacing Specifies the vertical spacing between The default value is Small. lines of a middle caption. Effect Specifies the display effect for the banners and middle and bottom captions. For middle captions, the default value is Scroll upward. Scrolling speed Specifies the scroll rate for middle and bottom captions. Background color Specifies the background color of the banners and middle and bottom captions. For bottom captions, the default value is Scroll leftward. For banners, the default value is Center. The default value is Fast. For middle and bottom captions, the default color is gray. For banners, the default color is red. Up to 64 colors are supported. Font color Specifies the foreground color of the banners and middle and bottom captions. The default color is white. Up to 64 colors are supported. Step 3 Click Save. The settings take effect immediately.
----End 7.3 Setting Video Parameters You can set video input and output parameters on the endpoint web interface and set the multi-view mode to achieve the desired video effect. 7.3.1 Understanding Video Input Capabilities You must under the video input capabilities of the endpoint to correctly set video input parameters. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings The endpoint supports various camera models, including the HUAWEI VPC600 HD camera
(VPC600), HUAWEI VPC620 HD camera (VPC620), ViewPoint C500 HD camera (C500), HUAWEI VPC500 HD camera (VPC500), HUAWEI VPC520 HD camera (VPC520), HUAWEI VPC500S camera (VPC500S), HUAWEI VPC500E camera (VPC500E), SONY EVI-HD1, SONY EVI-D100, SONY EVI-D70, SONY D30/D31, SONY BRC-300P, SONY BRC-H700, SONY BRC-Z330, CANON V50, CANON VCC1, CANON VCC4, 3CCD, C200, GTP CAM, KX, PELCO, PTC100, SYYT, TAC, VCC-SW80P, and VCC-HD90P. Table 7-5, Table 7-6, and Table 7-7 list the capabilities of the video input ports. Table 7-5 Capabilities of the TE40's video input ports Port Name on the UI Port Number on the Rear Panel Type Receivable Input Format Control Description 1 MAIN IN 1 HD-VI DVI(HW), HDMI(HW), and YPbPr(HW) Camera PTZ None 2 PC IN 2 VGA VGA and YPbPr Camera PTZ HDMI DVI and HDMI Camera PTZ The VGA and HDMI Port ports are mutually exclusive and cannot be used at the same time. Table 7-6 Capabilities of the TE50's video input ports Port Name on the UI Port Numbe r on the Rear Panel Type Receivable Input Format Control Description 1 MAIN IN 1 RCA CVBS HD-VI 2 PC IN 2 VGA HDMI DVI(HW), HDMI(HW), and YPbPr(HW) VGA and YPbPr DVI and HDMI Camera PTZ Camera PTZ The RCA and HD-VI ports are mutually exclusive and cannot be used at the same time. Camera PTZ Camera PTZ The VGA and HDMI Port ports are mutually exclusive and cannot be used at the same time. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Port Name on the UI Port Numbe r on the Rear Panel Type Receivable Input Format Control Description 7 System Settings 3 3G-SDI IN 3 BNC SDI Camera PTZ None Table 7-7 Capabilities of the TE60's video input ports Port Name on the UI Port Numbe r on the Rear Panel Type Receivable Input Format Control Description 1 MAIN IN 1 DVI-I HD-VI 2 PC IN 2 DVI-I Display Port VGA, YPbPr, DVI, HDMI, CVBS, and S-VIDEO DVI(HW), HDMI(HW), and YPbPr(HW) VGA, YPbPr, DVI, and HDMI Camera PTZ Camera PTZ Camera PTZ DP and HDMI Camera PTZ Camera PTZ The DVI-I and HD-VI ports are mutually exclusive and cannot be used at the same time. The DVI-I and Display Port ports are mutually exclusive and cannot be used at the same time. The HDMI and HD-VI ports are mutually exclusive and cannot be used at the same time. 3 AUX IN 3 HDMI DVI and HDMI HD-VI DVI(HW) and HDMI(HW) Camera PTZ 4 3G-SDI IN 4 BNC SDI Camera PTZ None
PTZ is an acronym for Pan, Tilt, and Zoom. A PTZ camera supports panning, tilting, and zooming control.
The HD-VI port can only be connected to the HUAWEI VPC600 or VPC620. After connecting this port to the HUAWEI VPC600 or VPC620, you can perform PTZ controls on and supply power to the HUAWEI VPC600 or VPC620 without additional cables.
If you connect a port other than the HD-VI port to the camera, you must connect the cable used for transmitting VISCA control signals to the COM port on your endpoint to perform PTZ controls on the camera. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Each input port to be used for transmitting a video or a presentation can be specified on the user interface. For details, see section 5.4 Selecting Video Sources. 7.3.2 Configuring Video Input Correct video input settings enable your endpoint to properly display video input from the video input ports. Step 1 Choose System Settings > Input/Output and click the Video Input tab. Step 2 Set the video input parameters listed in Table 7-8. Table 7-8 Video input parameters Parameter Description Setting Remote control Specifies whether a remote site can control the local camera during a call. The default value is Allow. Video Source Manageme nt Specifies whether you can select the video source and presentation source on the remote controlled UI. key on the remote Press the control to select the video source and presentation source only after you enable this parameter. Face tracking Specifies whether the camera automatically adjusts directions and image sizes based on face recognition. Name Specifies the video input port name to help you identify ports during a conference. Camera type Specifies the type of the camera connected. The endpoint supports cameras of multiple manufacturers and models. The default value is Do not allow. Selecting an incorrect video source may result in black screens. To avoid mistakenly selecting an incorrect video source, the default value is recommended here. If you need to change the video source, set this parameter to Allow. After changing the video source, reset this parameter to Do not allow. The default value is Allow. Retain the default value so the camera can automatically adjust directions and image sizes based on faces. Do not leave this parameter blank. Enter a string of 1 to 64 characters. The default value is VPC600/VPC620. The control commands vary with different cameras. Therefore, select the camera type correctly to ensure that the camera can be controlled properly. Serial port Specifies the serial port that is connected to the camera control interface. You can select either COM1 or COM2. Select the serial port that is being used. Otherwise, the camera cannot be controlled. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting Moving speed Specifies the movement and zoom speed for the camera at your site. The default value is Medium.
Select Slow for accurate positioning.
Select Fast for quick positioning.
Select Medium for medium paced positioning. Initial position Specifies the position of the camera after startup. The default value is Auto. Mirroring Input source Stretch mode
Auto: The camera moves to its initial position after startup.
Preset 1: The camera moves to the preset after startup. NOTE Each camera preset stores the pan, tilt, and zoom settings of the camera. For how to set presets, see 5.3 Setting a Camera Preset. Specifies whether the endpoint displays a reflection of an input video, wherein the right and left sides of the original are reversed.
Normal: The input video will not be reversed.
Horizontal mirroring: The endpoint displays a reflection of the input video, wherein the right and left sides of the original are reversed like the reflection of something seen in a mirror. The default value is Normal. Specifies the input source format. The default value is Auto. Specifies how your endpoint adjusts the input video based on the video encoding format. The default value is No stretch. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Stretch.
Stretch: Stretch the video to full screen with an unfixed aspect ratio.
No stretch: Stretch the video to full screen with a fixed aspect ratio. Black borders may appear at the upper and lower part of the display.
Intelligent stretch: Crop the video to an appropriate size and stretch the video to full screen with the original aspect ratio. For example, to change a wide-screen video to a narrow-screen video, your endpoint crops the left and right edges of the wide-screen video and stretches the video to till Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting the screen. 1080p PsF conversion When the camera connected to the endpoint uses the Progressive segmented Frame (PsF) mode for transmitting signals, enable this function. The default value is Disable. Step 3 Click Save. The settings take effect immediately.
----End 7.3.3 Setting the Multi-View Mode With the multi-view function, you can view multiple local videos in Picture in Picture (PiP) or split-screen mode on one display. Your endpoint is able to combine two or more local inputs and share them over one channel with remote participants. The inputs can be videos captured by the camera or computer desktops. You can set the inputs before or during a conference, and the settings take effect immediately. The multi-view layout can be Picture in Picture (PiP), 2-pane, or 3-pane modes. In PiP mode, the PiP window can be in the upper left, upper right, lower left, or lower right corner. One input can be configured to show in one or more panes, but the input cannot be a remote video source. Background Procedure Step 1 Choose Device Control > Device Control and click the Multi-View tab. Step 2 Set Multi-view mode for any of the following:
PiP 2 panes
3 panes
3 panes Step 3 Specify input sources for the multi-view mode you selected. Step 4 Choose Device Control > Device Control and click the Video Control tab. Step 5 In the Video Input Source area, set Video Source to Multi-View. The multi-view is displayed as the conference video at the local site. If you are in a conference, the multi-view will be shared to remote sites.
----End Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7.3.4 Understanding Video Output Capabilities 7 System Settings You must under the video output capabilities of the endpoint to correctly set video output parameters. The video output formats vary according to port types. The capabilities of video output ports and recommended configurations are described in Table 7-9, Table 7-10, and Table 7-11. Table 7-9 Specifications of video output ports on the TE40 Port Name on the UI Port Numbe r on the Rear Panel Type Output Format Default Settings After the Startup 1 MAIN OUT 1 HDMI DVI and HDMI 2 HDMI OUT 2 HDMI DVI and HDMI By default, this port functions as the main output port, GUI port, and caption output port, and is used to display the remote controlled UI, captions, and local video. This port can also be used to switch to the combined picture. By default, this port functions as the auxiliary output port and is used to display the local video. When the Dual-screen function is enabled, this port displays the local or remote presentation if a presentation source is connected to this port and displays Huawei logo or local video if no presentation source is connected to this port. 3 VGA OUT 3 VGA VGA and YPbPr By default, this port displays the local video. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Table 7-10 Specifications of video output ports on the TE50 7 System Settings Port Name on the UI Port Numb er on the Rear Panel Type Output Format Default Settings After the Startup 1 MAIN OUT 1 HDMI DVI and HDMI 2 HDMI OUT 2 HDMI DVI and HDMI By default, this port functions as the main output port, GUI port, and caption output port, and is used to display the remote controlled UI, captions, and local video. This port can also be used to switch to the combined picture. By default, this port functions as the auxiliary output port and is used to display the local video. When the Dual-screen function is enabled, this port displays the local or remote presentation if a presentation source is connected to this port and displays Huawei logo or local video if no presentation source is connected to this port. 3 VGA OUT 4 3G-SDI OUT 5 SD OUT 3 4 5 VGA VGA and YPbPr By default, this port displays the local video. BNC SDI RCA CVBS By default, this port displays the local video. By default, this port displays the local video. Table 7-11 Specifications of video output ports on the TE60 Type Output Format Default Settings After the Startup Port Name on the UI Port Numb er on the Rear Panel Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Port Name on the UI Port Numb er on the Rear Panel 7 System Settings Type Output Format Default Settings After the Startup 1 MAIN OUT 1 DVI-I 2 PC OUT 2 DVI-I HDMI DVI, VGA, YPbPr, and HDMI DVI, VGA, YPbPr, and HDMI DVI and HDMI By default, this port functions as the main output port, GUI port, and caption output port, and is used to display the remote controlled UI, captions, and local video. This port can also be used to switch to the combined picture. By default, this port functions as the auxiliary output port and is used to display the local video. When the Dual-screen function is enabled, this port displays the local or remote presentation if a presentation source is connected to this port and displays Huawei logo or local video if no presentation source is connected to this port. NOTE If you select HDMI and DVI as the output signal source, these two ports deliver the same video. If you select another type of signal source, only the DVI-I port delivers videos. 2 SD OUT 2
(DVI-I port) DVI-I S-VIDEO and CVBS By default, this port displays the local video. Connect a display to this port using a DVI-S-Video/VGA/CV BS cable. 3 DVR OUT 4 3G-SDI OUT 3 4 HDMI DVI and HDMI By default, this port displays the local video. BNC SDI By default, this port displays the local video. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7.3.5 Configuring Video Output 7 System Settings After connecting video cables, set the video output parameters, such as output mode, resolution, refresh rate, and stretch mode. This will enable your endpoint to deliver a superior video experience. Background Video is clearer at a higher resolution. Select a video resolution that is supported by the display connected to your endpoint. Table 7-12, Table 7-13, and Table 7-14 lists the resolutions supported by the video output ports in each output mode. Table 7-12 Available video resolutions in each output mode of TE40 Output Mode Video Resolution 1 MAIN OUT DVI 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p HDMI 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 2 HDMI OUT DVI 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p HDMI 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 3 VGA OUT VGA 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, and 1080p YPbPr 720p, 1080i, and 1080p Table 7-13 Available video resolutions in each output mode of TE50 Output Mode Video Resolution 1 MAIN OUT DVI 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p HDMI 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 2 HDMI OUT DVI 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Output Mode Video Resolution HDMI 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 3 VGA OUT VGA 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, and 1080p YPbPr 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 4 3G-SDI OUT SDI 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 5 SD OUT CVBS NTSC and PAL Table 7-14 Available video resolutions in each output mode of TE60 Output Mode Video Resolution 1 MAIN OUT VGA YPbPr DVI 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, and 1080p 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p HDMI 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 2 PC OUT VGA YPbPr DVI 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, and 1080p 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p HDMI 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 2 SD OUT CVBS NTSC and PAL S-VIDEO NTSC and PAL 3 DVR OUT DVI 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p HDMI 720p, 1080i, and 1080p Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Output Mode Video Resolution 4 3G-SDI OUT SDI 720p, 1080i, and 1080p Video is smoother at a higher refresh rate. Select a video resolution that is supported by the display connected to your endpoint. Table 7-15 lists the refresh rates available for each video resolution. Table 7-15 Available refresh rates for each resolution Video Resolution Refresh Rate (Hz) NTSC PAL 60 50 800 x 600 pixels 56, 60, 72, 75, or 85 1024 x 768 pixels 60, 70, 75, or 85 1280 x 1024 pixels 60, 75, or 85 UXGA (1600 x 1200) 60 1920 x 1200 pixels 60 720p
60, if the output mode is VGA
50 or 60, if the output mode is DVI, YPbPr, or HDMI 1080i 1080p Procedure 50 or 60
60, if the output mode is VGA
24, 25, 30, 50, or 60, if the output mode is DVI, YPbPr, or HDMI Step 1 Choose System Settings > Input/Output and click the Video Output tab. Step 2 Set the video output parameters listed in Table 7-16. Table 7-16 Video output parameters Parameter Description Setting GUI Specifies the video output port for the remote controlled UI. The default value is 1 MAIN OUT. During a conference, you can configure your endpoint to display video on one display and the remote controlled UI on another display by setting this parameter Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting to a value different from the value of Main output interface. Caption output Specifies the video output port for captions. The default value is 1 MAIN OUT. Main output interface NOTE This parameter takes effect only when the caption type is set to T.140. Specifies the main output port.
When Dual-screen is set to Enable, this port is used to display the local or remote video.
When Dual-screen is set to Disable, this port is used to display the local or remote video, or local or remote presentation. The default value is 1 MAIN OUT. Auxiliary output port Specifies the auxiliary output port for preferentially displaying presentation. The default value of TE60 is 2 PC OUT.
When Dual-screen is set to Enable, this port is used to display the local or remote presentation if a presentation source is plugged in and is used to display the local video or Huawei logo if no presentation source is plugged in.
When Dual-screen is set to Disable, this port is used to display the local video or presentation when the endpoint is not used in a conference, and is used to display the remote video or presentation when the endpoint is used in a conference. Specifies whether the endpoint displays the video and presentation on separate displays. If you set this parameter to Enable, you can set Show Huawei logo. Specifies whether to show the Huawei logo on the display connected to an auxiliary port when the endpoint is not used in a conference and does not have any presentation source plugged in. Dual-screen Show Huawei logo Name Specifies the output port name to help you identify ports during a conference. The default value of TE40 or TE50 is 2 HDMI OUT. Do not set Main output interface and Auxiliary output port to the same output port. The default value is Disable. You can enable this function only when your endpoint is connected to two displays. The default value is Enable.
The default value for the 1 MAIN OUT port is 1 MAIN OUT.
The default value for the 2 PC OUT port (only TE60) is Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Parameter Description 7 System Settings Setting 2 PC OUT.
The default value for the 2 HDMI OUT port (only TE40 and TE50) is 2 HDMI OUT.
The default value for the 3 VGA OUT port (only TE40 and TE50) is 3 VGA OUT.
The default value for the 3 DVR OUT port (only TE60) is 3 DVR OUT.
The default value for the 4 3G-SDI OUT port (only TE50 and TE60) is 4 3G-SDI OUT.
The default value for the 5 SD OUT port (only TE50) is 5 SD OUT.
The default value for the 2 SD OUT port (only TE60) is 2 SD OUT. Output mode Specifies the format for the video
The default value for the 1 received by the display. MAIN OUT port is:
Output modes vary according to video output ports. For details, refer to Table 7-12, Table 7-13 and Table 7-14. DVI if the TE60 is used. HDMI if the TE40 or TE50 is used.
The default value for the 2 PC OUT port (only TE60) is DVI.
The default value for the 2 HDMI OUT port (only TE40 and TE50) is DVI.
The default value for the 2 SD OUT port (only TE60) is CVBS.
The default value for the 3 VGA OUT port (only TE40 and TE50) is VGA.
The default value for the 3 DVR OUT port (only TE60) is DVI.
The default value for the 4 3G-SDI OUT port (only TE50 and TE60) is SDI.
The default value for the 5 SD OUT port (only TE50) is CVBS. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting Video resolution Specifies the resolution for each video output port. The available options vary depending on your settings of Output mode. Table 7-12, Table 7-13 and Table 7-14 lists the resolutions supported by the video output ports in each output mode. Refresh rate Specifies the video refresh rate. The available options vary depending on your settings of Video resolution. Table 7-15 lists the refresh rates available for each video resolution.
The default value for the 2 SD OUT port (only TE60) is CVBS.
The default value for the 5 SD OUT port (only TE50) is NTSC.
The default value for the 2 SD OUT port (only TE60) is NTSC. The default value for other ports is 1080p. The default value is 60Hz. NOTE After setting Video resolution and Refresh rate, adjust the sampling phase if the image is blurry or has a little jitter. For details, see 5.8 Setting Preferred Video Parameters. Stretch mode Specifies how to adjust the aspect ratio to fit the video into the screen. The default value is Stretch.
Stretch: The aspect ratio is changeable.
No stretch: The aspect ratio is not changeable.
Intelligent stretch: Your endpoint crops the video to an appropriate size and stretches the video to full screen with the original aspect ratio. For example, to change a wide-screen video to a narrow-screen video, your endpoint crops the left and right edges of the wide-screen video and stretches the video to till the screen. Automatic layout mode Specifies how the main output port of your endpoint displays the video and presentation during a conference. The default value is Full screen.
Full screen: When a presentation is not being shared, your endpoint displays the remote video in full screen. When a presentation is being shared, your endpoint displays the presentation in full screen.
PiP: When a presentation is not being shared, your endpoint displays the local video and remote video in Picture in Picture (PiP) mode. When a presentation is being shared, your Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting endpoint displays the presentation and video in PiP mode.
PoP: When a presentation is not being shared, your endpoint displays the local video and remote video in Picture out Picture (PoP) mode. When a presentation is being shared, your endpoint displays the presentation, remote video, and local video in PoP mode.
User defined: Users define the content to be displayed by the main output port based on the imported layout policy file. Small window position Specifies the position of the PiP window on the screen. The default value is Lower right corner. This parameter is available only when Automatic layout mode is set to PiP. Select or deselect these three parameters based on your needs. The default value is Default. Display local video Specifies the content to be display through a port. Display remote video Display presentation Automatic layout mode You can select these three parameters for all video output ports, except Main output interface and Auxiliary output port. Specifies how the auxiliary output port displays the video and presentation after the endpoint joins a conference. This parameter is available only when you have imported the layout policy file through the web interface and selected Dual-screen.
Default: The content displayed by the auxiliary output port depends on the setting of Dual-screen. When Dual-screen is set to Enable, this port is used to display the local or remote presentation if a presentation source is plugged in and is used to display the local video or Huawei logo if no presentation source is plugged in. When Dual-screen is set to Disable, this port is used to display the local video or presentation when the endpoint is not used in a conference, and is used to display the remote video Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting or presentation when the endpoint is used in a conference. In this case, Automatic layout mode is unavailable on the web interface.
User defined: Users define the content to be displayed by the auxiliary output port based on the imported layout policy file. Step 3 Click Save. The settings take effect immediately.
----End 7.4 Configuring Audio After connecting audio cables, set the audio parameters. Procedure Step 1 Choose System Settings > Input/Output and click the Audio tab. Step 2 Set the audio parameters listed in Table 7-17. Table 7-17 Audio parameters Parameter Description Setting The default value is All audio inputs. Switch controls Controls whether audio signals collected by audio input devices, excluding the microphone array, are transmitted to your endpoint when you turn off the microphone array.
MIC array only: Your endpoint can receive audio signals collected by audio input devices, excluding the microphone array, when you turn off the microphone array.
All audio inputs: Your endpoint cannot receive audio signals collected by any audio input devices when you turn off the microphone array. To enable your endpoint to receive audio signals again, do any of the following:
Press the button on the microphone array to turn it on.
Press the microphone button on the remote control to turn on the Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting microphone array only or all audio input devices, depending on your settings of Switch controls.
On the endpoint web interface, choose Device Control > Audio Control and select the audio input ports you want to enable.
On the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced Settings > Settings >
Audio > Audio Input and select the audio input ports you want to enable. If you select this parameter, when the endpoint sleeps, the wireless microphone VPM220W also sleeps to save power. The VPM220W cannot be woken up when the endpoint is woken up. To wake up the VPM220W, press the mute button on it. If you do not select this parameter, when the endpoint sleeps, the VPM220W also sleeps to save power. In addition, the VPM220W can be woken up when the endpoint is woken up. Specifies the LINE OUT mode.
Main output interface: The LINE OUT port is used as the main audio output port and delivers the audio of remote sites.
Auxiliary output port: The LINE OUT port is used as the auxiliary audio output port and delivers the audio at your site as well as the audio at remote sites. Wireless MIC power saving mode LINE OUT mode The default value is Enable. The default value is Main output interface. Secondary dial tone Enables or disables tone prompts for secondary dials. The default value is Disable. Echo delay Adjusts the echo delay to eliminate echos caused by delay in audio output during conferences. The default value is 0. Step 3 Click Save. The settings take effect immediately.
----End Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7.5 Specifying Conference Settings 7 System Settings Your endpoint is ready for videoconferencing with its default conference settings, but you can customize the conference settings based on the site requirements. 7.5.1 Setting Audio and Video Protocols Your endpoint supports multiple audio and video protocols. Select the protocols required for call purposes. Background Procedure Using the audio or video protocol that you select, your endpoint negotiates the audio or video capability with a remote endpoint to set up a call. If you do not select any audio or video protocols on the Audio and video protocols tab, you cannot set audio or video protocols while you are 7.5.3 Setting Advanced Conference Parameters. Step 1 Choose System Settings > Conference and click the Audio and video protocols tab. Step 2 Select audio and video protocols.
Select at least one audio protocol and one video protocol so that you can use your endpoint to place audio calls or video calls.
Select RTV and H.264 UC when your endpoint interoperates with a Lync device. Step 3 Click Save. The settings take effect immediately.
----End 7.5.2 Setting General Conference Parameters You can set the modes in which the endpoint places and answers calls. For example, you can set the endpoint to automatically answer calls, enable the do not disturb function, or set the multipoint call mode. Background Procedure General conference parameters apply to the following conferences:
Point-to-point conferences initiated by your site
Multipoint conferences initiated by your site
Conferences that your site joins by answering the call from a remote site Step 1 Choose System Settings > Conference and click the Normal tab. Step 2 Set the general conference parameters listed in Table 7-18. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Table 7-18 General conference parameters Parameter Description Setting Answer Mode Specifies how your endpoint handles incoming calls. The default value is Manual.
Manual: Your endpoint prompts you to handle a call when the call comes in.
Answer call automatically: Your endpoint automatically answers incoming calls when not being used in a conference. Specifies whether the endpoint turns off all sounds generated at your site when your endpoint joins a conference. If you enable this parameter, no remote site can hear your site. This parameter is available only when Answer Mode is set to Answer call automatically. Mute local audio for answered calls The default value is Disable. Open do not disturb right Specifies whether the do-not-disturb function is configurable on the remote controlled UI. The default value is Yes. Site called during startup Call times The do-not-disturb function blocks all incoming calls. Specifies the site that your endpoint automatically calls when it starts. You can proceed to set Call times only after you set this parameter. Specifies the maximum number of attempts your endpoint calls a specified site after startup. If you set this parameter to 0, your endpoint does not call the specified site after startup. The default value is None. The available options are entries in the contacts list. The default value is 1. The maximum value is 10. Default call bandwidth Specifies the default data transmission rate for your endpoint. The default value is 1920 kbps. NOTE If this parameter is set incorrectly, the video quality will be affected or the call might even fail to be set up. Maximum incoming call bandwidth Specifies the maximum bandwidth allowed for receiving calls. The bandwidths used for placing and receiving calls cannot exceed this bandwidth. The default value is 8 Mbps. The settings cannot exceed the bandwidth supported by the endpoint license. The settings of this bandwidth and the settings of Default call bandwidth are Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting independent of each other. HELPDESK number Specifies the help desk number, which is used during emergencies. PSTN call Specifies whether to support calls from PSTN sites. Obtain this number from the videoconferencing system administrator. The default value is Enable. After you enable this parameter and the endpoint connects to a PSTN network, the endpoint can receive calls from PSTN sites. Specifies whether you can set the call type and data transmission rate before initiating point-to-point calls. Call parameter configuratio n The default value is Disable. Wi-Fi network preferred Specifies whether to prioritize a Wi-Fi network when both wireless and wired networks are available. The default value is Disable. Multipoint call mode Specifies how your endpoint initiates a multipoint conference. The default value is AUTO.
AUTO: The endpoint auto-selects the initiation mode based on its system settings and capabilities. The built-in MCU is prioritized.
Multipoint converge: The endpoint initiates a multipoint conference using SiteCall with a standalone MCU.
Built-in MCU: The endpoint initiates a multipoint conference using its built-in MCU. This function requires the endpoint to have a built-in MCU. In addition, you need to set Default remote layout, Add presentation to continuous presence, and Add local video to continuous presence.
OFF: The endpoint allows for two concurrent calls, which can be one audio call and one video call, or two audio-only calls. Selecting this option does not affect the use of the SiteCall function. Specifies the default view displayed to remote sites in a multipoint conference initiated by the endpoint's built-in MCU. If the view is in continuous presence, the number of panes is determined by the built-in MCU's capabilities and the Default remote layout The default value is Voice activated, in panes. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting number of participant sites. The video feeds for the continuous presence panes are determined by the joining sequence of participant sites and your settings of this parameter.
Voice activated, full screen: The remote sites view, in full screen, the video of the site that generates the loudest volume.
Voice activated, in panes: The remote sites view continuous presence, with the main pane displaying the video of the site that generates the loudest volume.
Bisect: The remote sites view, in bisect mode, the videos of the other participant sites. The site that generates the louder volume is highlighted. A presentation will not be displayed in this layout.
Fixed site, full screen: The remote sites view, in full screen, the video of a specified site. To view a site in full screen, click it in the site list.
Fixed sites, in panes: The remote sites view continuous presence, with the main pane displaying the video of a specified site. To add a participant site to the main pane, click it in the site list. NOTE After you set this parameter, the local site views other sites in full screen or continuous presence mode, but cannot view itself. Specifies whether the shared presentation is displayed in continuous presence during a multipoint conference initiated by the endpoint's built-in MCU. If the continuous presence layout is Bisect, the presentation will not be displayed in continuous presence. NOTE The settings of this parameter do not take effect at H.323 sites where the endpoints in V100R001C10 are used. Add presentation to continuous presence The default value is Disable. Add local video to continuous presence Specifies whether a site's local video is displayed in the site's continuous presence view during a multipoint conference initiated by the endpoint's The default value is Disable. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting built-in MCU. NOTE The settings of this parameter do not take effect at H.323 sites where the endpoints in V100R001C10 are used. Specifies the display mode for the panes in continuous presence.
Stretch: The video in a pane has its aspect ratio automatically adjusted so it can fill the entire pane.
Tile: The video in a pane is repeated until it can fill the entire pane. Continuous presence pane display mode The default value is Stretch. Voice Switching Sensitivity Specifies the sensitivity for the voice activation function used in multipoint conferences. The default value is High.
High: Voice activation is performed when the voice volume is low.
Medium: Voice activation is performed when the voice volume is moderate.
Low: Voice activation is performed when the voice volume is high. Recording server address Specifies the IP address or URL of the Recording & Streaming Engine (RSE). No default value is set for this parameter. If the endpoint has been registered with an H.323 gatekeeper (GK), you can enter the H.323 number or unified recording number that the endpoint uses to register with the GK. Step 3 Click Save. The settings take effect immediately.
----End 7.5.3 Setting Advanced Conference Parameters Your endpoint allows you to configure advanced conference parameters before you initiate single-stream or dual-stream conferences. Procedure Step 1 Choose System Settings > Conference and click the Advanced Settings tab. Step 2 Set the advanced conference parameters listed in Table 7-19. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Table 7-19 Advanced conference parameters Parameter Description Setting Audio protocol Specifies the audio protocol the endpoint uses to encode audio. The default value is Auto. Audio channels Specifies the audio channels. The default value is Two. The default value is Auto. To initiate an HD video conference, select an H.264 HP-related video protocol. The default value is Sharp. Video protocol Video resolution This parameter is available only when you select AAC_LD or HWA-LD. Specifies the video protocol the endpoint uses to encode video. During a non-multi-stream conference, the video protocol is the video protocol the endpoint uses at your site. Specifies the video format. The available options vary depending on your settings of Video protocol. When Video protocol is set to Auto, set this parameter to either of the following:
Sharp: Your endpoint uses a high video resolution to ensure clear video.
Smooth: Your endpoint uses a high frame rate to ensure smooth video. Video frame rate Specifies the frame rate used during video encoding. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Auto. When Video protocol is set to Auto, this parameter is not available. Video at a higher frame rate is smoother. Video at a lower frame rate is clearer. Prevent little packet loss Specifies whether to prevent sporadic packet loss to avoid artifacts. Presentation Specifies whether you can share presentations during conferences. NOTE You can set Presentation protocol, Presentation resolution, Presentation mode, Presentation bandwidth setting, Presentation bandwidth (%), The default value is Disable. Select this parameter if all endpoints are on the same private network and sporadic packet loss occurs. The default value is Enable. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting The default value is Auto. The default value is Sharp. Presentation protocol Presentation resolution Presentation sharing mode, and Presentation plug-and-share only after you set this parameter to Enable. Specifies the video protocol your endpoint uses to encode presentations. Specifies the presentation format. The available options vary depending on your settings of Presentation protocol. When Presentation protocol is set to Auto, set this parameter to either of the following:
Smooth: Your endpoint uses a high frame rate to ensure smooth video.
Sharp: Your endpoint uses a high video resolution to ensure clear video. Presentation mode Specifies the mode of the presentation you want to share. The default value is Presentation.
Presentation: When the video is switched, the presentation remains unchanged. Only one site in the conference can share a presentation one time.
Live: The presentation viewed by each site is switched along with the video. All sites in a conference can share presentations simultaneously. NOTE When connected to an IMS network, the endpoint cannot share a presentation in Live mode. Presentation bandwidth setting Specifies the mode for setting the presentation video bandwidth. The default value is Auto.
Auto: Your endpoint automatically sets the presentation video bandwidth based on the bandwidth available.
Manual: You must manually set Presentation bandwidth (%). Presentation bandwidth Specifies the percentage of the call bandwidth presentations can occupy. The default value is 50. NOTE Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting This parameter is available only when Presentation is set to Enable and Presentation bandwidth setting is set to Manual. Presentation sharing mode Specifies the mode for sharing presentations. The default value is Manual.
Auto: The endpoint automatically shares presentations along with videos. This parameter can be set to Auto only when Presentation mode is set to Live.
Manual: You must manually share presentations by using the remote control button or through the web interface. For details about how to share presentations through the web interface, see 4.7 Sharing a Presentation. Presentation plug-and-share Specifies whether your site automatically shares presentations with remote sites once presentation input is detected. The default value is Disable. Dynamic bandwidth Specifies whether the endpoint implements the following if the packet loss rate increases due to insufficient network bandwidth:
automatically decreases the conference bandwidth until packet loss does not occur constantly or the conference bandwidth is decreased to 64 kbit/s. If constant packet loss is detected, the endpoint can dynamically adjust bandwidth to recover stable conference quality within 1 minute. The default value is Disable.
When the network is running within normal parameters, select Disable.
When the network is not running within normal parameters, select Enable. Conference bandwidth Specifies the transmission bandwidth for a conference. The default value is Normal. If your endpoint accesses an E1 network through an IP line, set this parameter to Limited for better video conference quality. Conference line type Specifies the type of line used during a conference. The default value is Auto. If you select Auto and your endpoint has registered with a network gatekeeper (GK), your endpoint Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting preferentially uses H.323 to initiate a conference. Preferred IP protocol Specifies the protocol that IP sites preferentially use. The default value is H.323. reserved presentation bandwidth Face detection When Line type is set to Auto for IP sites, your endpoint uses this protocol to call the IP sites. Disable this parameter if your site is not going to send or receive presentations during a conference and the Received value for Presentation bandwidth [frame rate] is not -. If this parameter is disabled, the Received value for Presentation bandwidth [frame rate] restores to
- when you rejoin the conference. NOTE To view the Presentation bandwidth
[frame rate] value, choose Maintenance > System Status >
Conference. Specifies whether to perform HD encoding and decoding to improve face recognition video quality. You can increase the video sharpness by enabling this parameter in low bandwidths. The default value is Enable. The default value is Disable. Step 3 Click Save. The settings take effect immediately.
----End 7.6 Specifying Network Settings The endpoint can communicate with other devices properly only after network settings are specified on the endpoint web interface based on the network deployment of the endpoint. 7.6.1 Setting IP Parameters To use the endpoint on an IP network to implement video communication, correctly set IP parameters, which include DNS server address, network interface mode, and gateway address. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Procedure Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the IP tab. Step 2 Set the IP parameters listed in Table 7-20. 7 System Settings Table 7-20 IP parameters Parameter Description Setting Common Settings Network interface mode Specifies the working mode for the network ports on the endpoint. The default value is Auto detection.
Auto detection: When accessing the network, the endpoint automatically negotiates with a remote network device to determine the optimal work mode. It is recommended that the parameter value be set to the same as the network port working mode of the remote network device.
10 Mbps and half duplex: The data NOTE transmission rate is 10 Mbit/s, and data cannot be sent and received at the same time.
10 Mbps and full duplex: The data transmission rate is 10 Mbit/s, and data can be sent and received at the same time.
100 Mbps and half duplex: The data transmission rate is 100 Mbit/s, and data cannot be sent and received at the same time.
100 Mbps and full duplex: The data transmission rate is 100 Mbit/s, and data can be sent and received at the same time.
1000Mbps and full duplex: The data transmission rate is 1000 Mbit/s, and data can be sent and received at the same time. Specifies whether the endpoint can function as a hub in this mode, enabling the devices connected to its two network ports to communicate with each other. When the endpoint is connected to the Internet, devices connected to the network ports on the endpoint can also access the Internet. Specifies the maximum transmission unit
(MTU) in bytes. If the MTU is too large, the network transmission rate may be slowed, resulting in packet transmission failures. If the MTU is too small, the Hub network port mode MTU When you do not know the network port working mode of a remote network device, set this parameter to Auto detection. Otherwise, the endpoint may fail to access the network. The default value is Disable. The default value is 1500. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting network transmission efficiency may suffer. Local IP address PPPoE Specifies whether the endpoint accesses broadband networks using dial-up connections. The default value is Disable. The default value of Dialing mode is Auto. Dialing mode User name Password NOTE If you set this parameter to Enable, you must also set Dialing mode, User name, and Password. Specifies the dial-up connection mode. The dial-up process complies with the Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
(PPPoE) protocol. To use a dial-up connection, in User name and Password, enter the user name and password that are provided by your broadband access service provider.
Auto: When the endpoint starts, it automatically sets up a dial-up connection over the IP network. If the dial-up service is not free of charge, charging starts when the dial-up connection is established.
Manual: The endpoint uses the dial-up program to access the network. For details about how to use PPPoE for dial-up connections, see 5.9 Setting Up a PPPoE Dial-Up Connection. Connection type Specifies the mode in which the endpoint obtains an IP address. The default value is Static IP.
Static IP: The network administrator assigns an IP address to the endpoint. If you select this option, you must also set Local IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway address.
Dynamic IP: When a DHCP server is available on the network, the endpoint automatically obtains an IP address using the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Specifies the endpoint IP address. Local IP address The default value is 192.168.1.1 Examples:
IPv4: 192.168.1.10 IPv6:
Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting fc00:0:0:0:200:55:26:1 The default value is 255.255.255.0 Examples:
IPv4: 192.168.1.1 IPv6: fc00:0:0:0:200:55:0:1 The default value is Disable. The default value is 0. You need to set this parameter only when the IPv6 is enabled. No default value is set for this parameter. Subnet mask Specifies the subnet mask for the endpoint IP address. A subnet mask divides the IP address into a network address and a host address. Gateway address Specifies the gateway address that corresponds to the endpoint IP address. IPv6 Specifies whether IPv6 is used. If you use IPv6, you must also set Connection type, Local IP address, Subnet prefix length, and Gateway address. Subnet prefix length Specifies the prefix length for the IPv6 address of the endpoint. Alternate IP address Alternate IP address Subnet mask Specifies the alternate IP address of the endpoint. This IP address cannot be in the same network segment as Local IP address (described in the Local IP address section in this table) or the IP address of the gatekeeper (GK) server. DNS DNS address type Specifies the mode for setting the DNS server address. The default value is Auto.
Auto: The endpoint automatically obtains the DNS server address. If you select this option, a DNS server must be available on the network.
Manual: You must set DNS server address 1, DNS server address 2, or DNS server address 3. Specifies the IP address of the active Domain Name System (DNS) server. After you set this parameter, domain names can be used as the addresses of network gatekeeper (GK) and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) servers. The DNS server will translate the domain names into the IP addresses of the GK and SIP servers. No default value is set for this parameter. Specifies whether to enable 802.1x authentication. If the network where your The default value is Disable. DNS server address 1 DNS server address 2 DNS server address 3 802.1x 802.1x Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting endpoint is deployed requires authentication, set this parameter to Enable. NOTE If you set this parameter to Enable, you must also set Authentication mode. Authenticati on mode Specifies the authentication mode, which can be certificate authentication or password authentication.
Certificate: Use an imported certificate and the set Certificate account to initiate authentication to the authentication server.
Password: Use the set user name and password to initiate authentication to the authentication server. Certificate account Specifies the ID that matches the certificate imported for certificate authentication. The default value is Password. NOTE If you select Certificate, obtain the certificate from the certificate server administrator first. For details about how to import a certificate, see 7.8.1 Importing a Certificate. The default value is administrator. Obtain the values from the authentication server administrator. User name Password Specify the user name and password for network authentication. The default value of User name is admin. Obtain the values from the authentication server administrator. 802.1p/q 802.1p/q Specifies whether to enable 802.1p/q. If the switch has a virtual LAN (VLAN) set, enable 802.1p/q and set related parameters so the endpoint can access the switch and network interconnection can be implemented. The default value is Disable. NOTE The settings must be consistent with those on the switch. Otherwise, network interconnection may fail. NOTE If you set this parameter to Enable, you must also set VLAN ID and Priority. VLAN ID Specifies the ID of the VLAN to which the endpoint needs to connect. The default value is 1. Value range: 1-4094 Obtain the ID from the network administrator. Priority Specifies the priority of packets forwarded by the switch. The default value is 0. Value range: 0-7 The priority increases with the value. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Step 3 Click Save. Log in to the endpoint web interface using the new IP address.
----End 7 System Settings 7.6.2 Setting H.323 Parameters To prepare your endpoint for video communication using the H.323, set H.323 parameters such as whether to use the network gatekeeper (GK). Procedure Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the H.323/SIP Settings tab. Step 2 Set the H.323 parameters listed in Table 7-21. Table 7-21 H.323 parameters Parameter Description Setting Enable GK Specifies whether your endpoint uses a GK.
Enable: When your endpoint starts, it registers with the specified GK. An endpoint that registers with a GK can place calls to remote sites using their site numbers if the remote sites also register with GKs.
Disable: Your endpoint does not register with the GK. To call another endpoint through H.323, your endpoint can only use the called endpoint's IP address. NOTE If you select Enable, you must also set GK registration mode, Site number, H.323 ID, and Password. Specifies the mode for registering your endpoint with a GK.
Auto: Your endpoint automatically registers with an available GK on the network and obtains the GK address.
Manual: You must set GK address, which specifies the GK with which you want your endpoint to register. Specifies the IP address or domain name of the server where the desired GK is installed. If you set this parameter to the domain name, you must enable the DNS server and set correct mapping information on GK registration mode GK address The default value is Disable. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enable. The default value is Auto. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Manual. No default value is set for this parameter. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting the server. E.164 Specifies the site number for your endpoint. Enter a string of 1 to 32 digits. If your endpoint registers with a GK, endpoints that also register with GKs can dial this site number to call your endpoint. H.323 ID Specifies the name by which a GK identifies your endpoint after your endpoint registers with the GK. Authenticati on user name Password Specifies the user name used for H.323 authentication. This parameter is available only when encryption is enabled. To enable encryption, choose System Settings >
Security > Encryption, and set Encryption to Enable. Specifies the password your endpoint uses to register with a GK. The GK uses this password to authenticate your endpoint. For successful GK authentication, the password defined on your endpoint must be consistent with the password predefined on the GK. Use VoIP gateway VoIP gateway address Specifies whether your endpoint can place calls to the endpoints connected to the specified voice over IP (VoIP) gateway. If you set this parameter to Enable, you must also set VoIP gateway address. Huawei GK Specifies whether your endpoint uses a Huawei GK. HTTPS mode If the Huawei GK is disabled, some functions, such as Conference Control, are unavailable on your endpoint. Specifies whether to upload SiteCall conference information using HTTPS encryption. If this parameter is set to disabled, your endpoint will use the Transfer Control The name can consist of digits, letters, and special characters, such as @ # %. For successful GK authentication, the name defined on your endpoint must be consistent with the name predefined on the GK. The name can consist of digits, letters, and special characters, such as @ # %. This user name must be the same as the value of H.323 ID. No default value is set for this parameter. The default value is Disable. The default value is Enable. Disable this parameter if your endpoint needs to interwork with other manufacturers'
devices. The default value is Enable. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting Protocol (TCP) to upload SiteCall conference information, which may be insecure. Specifies whether to authenticate the server during SiteCall. The default value is Disable. Multipoint conference authenticatio n Step 3 Click Save.
----End 7.6.3 Setting SIP Parameters To prepare your endpoint for video communication using Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), set and SIP parameters, such as whether to register the endpoint with a SIP server. Procedure Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the H.323/SIP Settings tab. Step 2 Set the SIP parameters listed in Table 7-22. Table 7-22 SIP parameters Parameter Description Setting Register with server Specifies whether your endpoint registers with a SIP server. The default value is Disable.
Enable: An endpoint that registers with a SIP server can place calls to remote sites using their IP addresses or site numbers if the remote sites also register with SIP servers.
Disable: Your endpoint does not register with the SIP server. To call another endpoint through SIP, your endpoint can only use the called endpoint's IP address. NOTE If you set this parameter to Enable, you must also set Server address, Conference service number, Site number, User name, and Password. Specifies the IP address or domain name of the SIP server with which you want your endpoint to register. If you set this parameter to the SIP server domain name, enable the domain name Server address No default value is set for this parameter. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting server (DNS). If the DNS is not enabled, enable Proxy server. Conference service number Specifies the conference service number for your endpoint to initiate conferences over an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) network. No default value is set for this parameter. Set this parameter to the conference service number obtained from the administrator of the IMS network. Proxy server Select this parameter when the network The default value is Disable. environment requires the proxy server or when Server address is set to the SIP server domain name but the configured DNS server fails to resolve this domain name or the DNS server is not configured. NOTE If you set this parameter to Enable, you must also set Proxy server address, Site number, User name, and Password. Specifies the address of the proxy server. If you set Server address to the SIP server domain name, set this parameter to the IP address bound to that domain name. Proxy server address Set this parameter based on the actual SIP network environment. No default value is set for this parameter. Site number Specifies the site number for your endpoint. No default value is set for this parameter. If your endpoint registers with a SIP server, endpoints that also register with the SIP server can dial this site number to call your endpoint. Enter a value containing any of the following: letters, digits, special characters such as @
# %. User name Specifies the user name for authentication registration. Password Specifies the password that your endpoint uses to register with a SIP server. For successful authentication on a SIP server, this password set on your endpoint must be the same as that set on the SIP server. No default value is set for this parameter. Obtain the value of this parameter from the SIP server administrator. No default value is set for this parameter. Obtain the value of this parameter from the SIP server administrator. Server type Specifies the SIP server type. The default value is Standard.
OCS: Select this option if your endpoint registers with the Microsoft Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting Office Communications Server
(OCS) or Microsoft Lync Server.
CISCO VCS: Select this option if your endpoint registers with the Cisco TelePresence Video Communication Server (VCS).
Standard: Select this option if your endpoint registers with other SIP servers. Transmissio n type Specifies the protocol used for SIP signaling transmission.
TCP: Use the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) to implement transmission reliability.
UDP: Use the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) to implement transmission with reduced latency.
TLS: Use Transport Layer Security
(TLS) to implement transmission security. If you select this option, you can import a root certificate when your endpoint registers with a SIP server. For details, see 7.8.1 Importing a Certificate. Note that selecting this option may affect the call rate. If you select this parameter, you can set SSL version. The default value is TLS. To improve communication security, select TLS. SSL version Specifies the encryption protocol used for SIP calls, including TLS 1.0 and SSL 3.0. The default value is TLS 1.0. The default value is Manual. Video request handling Specifies how your endpoint handles video requests from a remote endpoint during a point-to-point SIP audio call or multipoint conference.
Accept automatically: Your endpoint automatically accepts video requests from the remote endpoint.
Reject automatically: Your endpoint automatically rejects video requests from the remote endpoint.
Manual: Your endpoint prompts you to accept video requests from the remote endpoint. Step 3 Click Save.
----End Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7.6.4 Setting Wi-Fi Parameters 7 System Settings To use your endpoint to implement video communication over a Wi-Fi network, configure the Wi-Fi settings. Setting Wi-Fi Client Parameters The endpoint can join a Wi-Fi network and hold video and audio conferences over the Wi-Fi network only after Wi-Fi Client is enabled. Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the Wi-Fi Settings tab. Step 2 Set Wi-Fi Client to Enable. Your endpoint automatically scans for available wireless routers and lists them in the Select WLAN list box. If you need to set a static IP address for your endpoint, go to Step 3. Otherwise, go to Step 5. Step 3 Set Connection type, network mode parameters listed in Table 7-23. Table 7-23 Network mode parameters Parameter Description Setting Connection type IP address Specifies the mode in which the endpoint obtains an IP address.
Static IP: The network administrator assigns an IP address to the endpoint. If you select this option, you must also set IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway address.
Dynamic IP: The endpoint automatically obtains an IP address over the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP). If you select this option, a DHCP server must be available on the network. Specifies the IP address for the endpoint to connect to a WLAN access point to implement communication. The default value is Dynamic IP. Select Dynamic IP unless special network requirements are imposed. No default value is set for this parameter. This IP address and the IP address of the WLAN access point must be on the same network segment. For example: if the IP address of the WLAN access point is 192.168.1.100 and its subnet mask is 255.255.255.0, you Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting Subnet mask Gateway address Specifies the subnet mask for the endpoint IP address. A subnet mask divides the IP address into a network address and a host address. Specifies the gateway address that corresponds to the endpoint IP address. must set Local IP address to 192.168.1.X. X can be any integer ranging from 0 to 255 except 100. No default value is set for this parameter. No default value is set for this parameter. Step 4 Click Save. Step 5 Under Select WLAN, select the wireless router to connect to and click Connect. If the wireless router you want to connect to is not listed, select Others, click Connect, and manually add the router. Step 6 When prompted, set the authentication parameters listed in Table 7-24. Table 7-24 Authentication parameters Parameter Setting Common authentication mode Security Key or Password Set this parameter if the authentication mode of the connected wireless router is set to WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, or WEP. Obtain the value from the wireless router administrator. 802.1x authentication mode EAP method Consult the wireless router administrator about the detailed settings. The authentication mode can be certificate authentication or password authentication. If certificate authentication is used, import a wireless certificate (with the prefix of 802.1x) that matches the settings of Identity. For details about how to import a certificate, see 7.8.1 Importing a Certificate. If password authentication is used, set Identity and Password. Phase 2 authentication CA certificate User certificate Identity Password Step 7 Click OK. When your endpoint is connected to the wireless router, the status of the router is connected. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide
----End Setting Wi-Fi Hotspot Parameters 7 System Settings When the Wi-Fi hotspot function is enabled on the endpoint, other devices, such as VPM220Ws, tablets, and PCs, can access a Wi-Fi network by connecting to the endpoint. Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the Wi-Fi Settings tab. Step 2 Set Wi-Fi Hotspot to Enable. Step 3 Set Settings, network hotspot parameters listed in Table 7-25. Table 7-25 Wi-Fi hotspot parameters Parameter Description Setting SSID Number Specifies the name of the Wi-Fi network to which your endpoint connects. The default values for the TE40, TE50, and TE60 are TE40_wifi_ap, TE50_wifi_ap, and TE60_wifi_ap respectively. The value is a string of 1 to 32 characters, containing digits, letters, and special characters, such as @ # %. Channel Specifies the channel to transmit data through Wi-Fi signals. The default value is Auto. Retain the default value. If you select Auto, your endpoint automatically selects the optimal channel. Identity authenticatio n mode Specifies the identity authentication mode used on the Wi-Fi network. The default value is WPA2-PSK. Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) provides greater security than Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). To ensure security, set this parameter to WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK. NOTE When the endpoint is connected to a VPM220W, you must set Identity authentication mode to WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK.
OPEN: When you select this option, the values available for Encryption mode are NONE and WEP.
SHARE: When you select this option, the value available for Encryption mode is WEP.
WPA-PSK: When you select this option, the value available for Encryption mode are TKIP and AES.
WPA2-PSK: When you select this option, the value available for Encryption mode are TKIP and AES. Encryption Specifies the encryption method used on The default value is AES. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Parameter Description mode the Wi-Fi network. The required key types vary depending on your settings for this parameter. If you set Encryption mode to NONE, the Wi-Fi network provided by your endpoint is open to everyone. Password Specifies the password required when other devices connect to your endpoint. 7 System Settings Setting NOTE When the endpoint is connected to a VPM220W, you must set Encryption mode to AES. Specifies the encryption method used on the Wi-Fi network. The required key types vary depending on your settings for this parameter. If you set Encryption mode to NONE, the Wi-Fi network provided by your endpoint is open to everyone. IP address Subnet mask Specify the IP address and subnet mask of your endpoint. Examples:
IP address: 192.168.2.1 Enable DHCP server. Start IP address End IP address
Subnet mask:
255.255.255.0 Specifies whether your endpoint assigns IP addresses to devices connected to it. This parameter is selected by default. NOTE If you select this parameter, you must also set Start IP address and End IP address. Specify the IP address segment for devices connected to your endpoint. Examples:
Start IP address:
192.168.2.10
End IP address:
192.168.2.100 This parameter is selected by default. Enable VPM220W Specifies whether the endpoint can connect to the the VPM220W. Enable this option when the endpoint connects to the VPM220W. Step 4 Click Save. The settings take effect immediately. You can then check the MAC address, and IP address of the device connected to your endpoint.
----End 7.6.5 Setting SNMP Parameters To enable the videoconferencing network management system to manage your endpoint, configure the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) settings. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Background 7 System Settings Your endpoint communicates with and is remotely managed by the videoconferencing network management system using SNMP. The videoconferencing network management system implements the following:
Configures endpoint settings, including the H.323 and SIP.
Queries endpoint status.
Checks endpoint alarms.
Backs up and restores endpoint settings.
Upgrades the endpoint online. Procedure Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the SNMP Settings tab. Step 2 Set the SNMP parameters listed in Table 7-26. Table 7-26 SNMP parameters Parameter Description Setting Enable SNMP Specifies whether the videoconferencing network management system uses SNMP to manage your endpoint. The default value is Enable. NOTE If you set this parameter to Enable, you must set other SNMP parameters. SNMPv2 Specifies whether to use SNMPv2. If you set this parameter to Enable, you must set Get community name, Set community name, and Trap community name. The default value is Disable. Using SNMPv2 may impose security risks. Please set this parameter with caution. Get community name Specifies the credential that the videoconferencing network management server uses to obtain endpoint settings. Set community name Specifies the credential that the videoconferencing network management server uses to specify endpoint settings. The default value is Change_Public. This parameter contains 6 to 32 characters. In addition, it must include at least two of the following: uppercase letter, lowercase letter, digit, or special character. The default value is Change_Private. This parameter contains 6 to 32 characters. In addition, it must include at least two of the following: uppercase letter, lowercase letter, digit, or special character. Trap community Specifies the credential that the endpoint uses to report alarms to the The default value is Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Parameter Description name videoconferencing network management server. 7 System Settings Setting Change_Me. This parameter contains 6 to 32 characters. In addition, it must include at least two of the following: uppercase letter, lowercase letter, digit, or special character. Trap server address 1 Trap server address 2 Trap server address 3 Specify the IP address to which your endpoint sends traps, namely, the IP address of the computer where the videoconferencing network management system server is installed. No default value is set for this parameter. You can leave this parameter blank. NOTE A trap is an unrequested message that a managed device (for example, an endpoint) sends to a trap server (for example, the SMC) to report urgent and important events. Trap version Version of the traps that the endpoint The default value is v3 trap. sends to the videoconferencing network management system through SNMP. Trap timeout time Specifies the timeout interval for traps, in seconds. The default value is 1. This parameter is available only when Trap version is set to v2 inform or v3 inform. Trap retry times Specifies the number of retry attempts for sending a trap. The default value is 5. This parameter is available only when Trap version is set to v2 inform or v3 inform. User name Specifies the user name for sending traps. The default value is trapinit. This parameter is available only when Trap version is set to v3 trap or v3 inform. Authenticati on protocol Authenticati on password Specify the authentication mode and password that your endpoint uses to send traps to the videoconferencing network management system through SNMP. This parameter is available only when Trap version is set to v3 trap or v3 inform. The default value of Authentication protocol is SHA. Set Authentication password to the password defined on the videoconferencing network management system. If the two passwords are not the same, authentication fails. Encryption protocol Specify the encryption protocol and password that your endpoint uses to send The default value of Encryption protocol is AES. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting Encryption password traps to the videoconferencing network management system through SNMP. If you select No encryption for Encryption protocol, traps are transmitted using plaintext. This parameter is available only when Trap version is set to v3 trap or v3 inform. SNMPv3 Authentication Information User name User rights Specifies the user name for connecting your endpoint to the videoconferencing network management system through SNMPv3. Specifies the user permissions of your endpoint when it connects to the videoconferencing network management system.
Read and write:read and write
Read only: read-only Authenticati on protocol Authenticati on password Specify the authentication mode and password for connecting the videoconferencing network management system to your endpoint. Encryption protocol Encryption password Specify the encryption protocol and password for connecting the videoconferencing network management system to your endpoint. Step 3 Click Save. The settings take effect immediately.
----End Set Encryption password to a string of 1 to 32 characters, which contains letters, digits, and special characters. The default value is v3user. The default value is Read and write. The default value of Authentication protocol is SHA. When the videoconferencing network management system attempts to connect to your endpoint, Authentication protocol and New password set on your endpoint are required. The default value of Encryption protocol is AES. Set Encryption password to a string of 48 characters or less, consisting of letters, digits, and special characters. 7.6.6 Setting Network Address Book Parameters With correct network address book settings on your endpoint, you can download site information from the network address book to your endpoint. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Background 7 System Settings The network address book stores address information of the sites in a videoconferencing system. You can use any of the following methods to find the site you want to call:
Download the network address book from a File Transfer Protocol over SSL (FTPS) server to the local address book. Then search the local address book for the site.
Search for the site on the directory server. The directory server stores site information. The endpoint can access the directory server using the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP). Procedure Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the Network Address Book tab. Step 2 Set the network address book parameters listed in Table 7-27. Table 7-27 Network address book parameters Parameter Description Setting Network Address Book Enable network address book Specifies whether to enable the network address book. If you set this parameter to Enable, you must also set the rest of the parameters described in this table. The default value is Disable. Mode Specifies the mode for network address book download. The default value is Passive. Synchronize automaticall y Specifies whether your endpoint automatically downloads records from the network address book to the local address book. FTPS Local records prevail if duplicates exist Prompt users during update Specifies whether to use File Transfer Protocol over SSL (FTPS) to encrypt data through the Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL) and ensure data integrity. Specifies whether records that already exist in the local address book remain unchanged during an address update from the network address book. Specifies whether a message is displayed to prompt you to update the local address book if the versions of the network and local address books are different. When you confirm the update, site information in the network address book is downloaded to the local address book. The default value is Disable. The default value is Enable. The default value is Disable. The default value is Enable. Clear local Specifies whether your endpoint The default value is Disable. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting records during update Server address File path automatically clears the local address book when the local address book is updated. Specifies the IP address of the server that stores the network address book. No default value is set for this parameter. Specifies the save path of the network address book on the server. No default value is set for this parameter. User name Password Specify the user name and password your endpoint uses to get access to the network address book. No default value is set for this parameter. LDAP Server Server address Port Base DN Specifies the IP address of the LDAP directory server. No default value is set for this parameter. Specifies the port for connecting to the LDAP server. The default value is 389. Specifies the distinguished name (DN) of the entry at which a specified search starts. No default value is set for this parameter. Example: dc=zdtest,dc=com Authenticati on type Specifies the LDAP server authentication mode. The default value is General.
General: Use the user name and password for authentication.
Secured: Perform authentication, including authentication on digital certificates, based on the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol. If you select this option, you must also set Domain name.
Anonymous: The LDAP server is accessible to all users. Specifies whether the SSL protocol is used to encrypt data streams sent to and received from the LDAP server. The default value is Enable. Specifies the user name and password used for LDAP server authentication. The default value of User name is admin. The value can consist of digits, letters, and special characters, such as @ # %. SSL encryption User name Password Domain name Specifies the domain name used for LDAP server authentication. No default value is set for this parameter. This parameter is mandatory when Authentication type is set to Secured. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting Synchronize automaticall y Specifies whether your endpoint regularly updates the LDAP Address Book entries in the local address book. The default value is Enable. NOTE If you set this parameter to Enable, you must also set Automatic update interval and Local records prevail if duplicates exist. Specifies the interval for updating the LDAP Address Book entries in the local address book. Specifies whether records that already exist in the local address book remain unchanged during an address update from the address book on the LDAP server. Automatic update interval Local records prevail if duplicates exist The default value is 24 h. The default value is Disable. Step 3 Click Save.
----End 7.6.7 Setting Firewall Parameters Correct firewall settings ensure the security of the video conferences held using your endpoint. Background Procedure With Network Address Translation (NAT) technology, a device on a local area network (LAN) is allocated a dedicated internal IP address and uses an external IP address to communicate with external devices. If your LAN uses NAT technology, set the IP address of the NAT wide area network (WAN) on your endpoint. Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the Firewall tab. Step 2 Set the firewall parameters listed in Table 7-28. Table 7-28 Firewall parameters Parameter Description Setting H.460 Specifies whether H.460 is enabled for traversal between public and private networks. If you set this parameter and Use NAT to Enable, your endpoint will use Huawei's proprietary Super Network Passport (SNP). If you set this parameter to Enable and your endpoint is The default value is Enable. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting recognized as a private network endpoint, H.460 will be used for traversal between public and private networks. Specifies whether NAT is enabled for traversal between public and private networks. An endpoint installed on a private network is considered as a public network endpoint after NAT is enabled on the endpoint. Even if you then enable H.460 on the endpoint, it is still considered as a public network endpoint, and H.460 is not used. The default value is Disable. Specifies the public IP address for your endpoint. This parameter is required after you set Use NAT to Enable. No default value is set for this parameter. Specifies whether the endpoint supports traversal between public and private networks when deployed on a Simple Internet Protocol (SIP) network. The default value is Enable. Specifies the port a remote site uses to receive and send call signaling during communication with your site. The default value is 1720. Value range: 1-65534. Use NAT NAT address SIP across public and private networks H.323 call port RAS source port Specifies the port your site uses to receive and send Registration, Admission and Status (RAS) signaling during communication with remote sites. The default value is 1719. Value range: 1-65534. RAS destination port Specifies the port a remote site uses to receive and send RAS signaling during communication with your site. The default value is 1719. Value range: 1-65534. SIP call port Specifies the port your site uses to send The default value is 5060. Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) signaling during communication with remote sites. Value range: 1-65534. Specifies the local SIP listening port. The default value is 5060. Local listen port Server listen port SIP TLS call port Specifies the listening port on the SIP server with which your endpoint registers. Specifies the port your site uses to send SIP signaling during communication with remote sites when Transmission type is set to TLS. Local SIP TLS listen Specifies the local SIP listening port when Transmission type is set to TLS. Value range: 1-65534. The default value is 5060. Value range: 1-65534. The default value is 5061. Value range: 1-65534. NOTE For details about how to set Transmission type, see 7.6.3 Setting SIP Parameters. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting port SIP server TLS listen port Specifies the listening port on the SIP server with which your endpoint registers when Transmission type is set to TLS. Port settings Specifies the port use.
Normal: The number of the port currently in use cannot be changed.
Port convergence: The port numbers used in H.323 converge. Specifically, signals of different formats use the same port number. This saves port resources.
Same port send/receive: Your endpoint sends and receives data streams through the same port. The default value is Same port send/receive. Audio port Specifies the port your site uses to receive audio packets during communication with remote sites. Video port Specifies the port your site uses to receive video packets during communication with remote sites. The default value is 10002. Enter an even number ranging from 1 to 65534. The default value is 10004. Enter an even number ranging from 1 to 65534. Step 3 Click Save. The settings take effect immediately.
----End 7.6.8 Setting Network Diagnostics Parameters Correct settings on the ports used for diagnostics enable you to use a network diagnostics tool to diagnose your endpoint using the ports. Background Procedure You can use a network diagnostics tool to diagnose your endpoint only when the endpoint is not used in any conferences. Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the Network diagnostics tab. Step 2 Set the network diagnostics parameters listed in Table 7-29. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Table 7-29 Network diagnostics parameters Parameter Description Setting Network diagnostics Specifies whether to enable the Registration, Admission and Status
(RAS) ports, H.323 call port, and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) port to be used for network diagnostics. H.323 call port Specifies the port the network diagnostics tool uses to receive and send call signaling during communication with your endpoint. RAS source port Specifies the port your endpoint uses to receive and send RAS signaling during communication with the network diagnostics tool. RAS destination port Specifies the port the network diagnostics tool uses to receive and send RAS signaling during communication with your endpoint. The default value is Disable. The default value is 1820. The default value is 1819. The default value is 1819. SIP call port Specifies the port your endpoint uses to The default value is 5160. send SIP signaling during communication with the network diagnostics tool. Diagnostics tool user name Diagnostics tool password Test network after exiting conference Specify the user name and password the network diagnostics tool uses for authentication when attempting to communicate with your endpoint. The default value of Diagnostics tool user name is admin. Specifies whether to perform the ping operation after your endpoint exits a conference. Ping results are recorded in a log. The default value is Enable. Step 3 Click Save. The settings take effect immediately.
----End 7.6.9 Setting QoS Parameters Quality of service (QoS) settings determine the mode for processing IP data packets during a conference. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Procedure Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the QoS tab. Step 2 Set the QoS parameters listed in Table 7-30. 7 System Settings Table 7-30 QoS parameters Parameter Description Setting QoS type The default value is Priority. Specifies the type of the Quality of Service
(QoS) network security measure used to deal with the network latency, congestion, and other issues.
Priority: If you select this option, you must also set IP priority and Service type.
DiffServ: If you select this option, you must also set DSCP. IP priority Specifies the priority that a network device gives to forwarding the data packets sent by your endpoint. The default value is 5. Value range: 0-7 The default value is Minimum delay. Service type A larger value indicates a higher priority. Specifies how the data packets sent and received by your endpoint are processed on the network.
Normal: Network devices transmit the data packets without special processing.
Minimum delay: Data packets are transmitted at the highest rate with the minimum delay.
Maximum throughput: A large amount of data packets can be transmitted on the network.
Highest reliability: Data packets can be transmitted to remote sites completely and correctly.
Minimum cost: Network devices transmit data packets of the same traffic at lower costs. DSCP audio DSCP video DSCP data DSCP signaling Specify the service level of data packets sent by your endpoint during transmission. The default value is 32. Value range: 0-63 A larger value indicates a higher service level. Network jitter Adjusts network jitter settings to address:
Labial synchronization problems during conferences
Choppy audio problems, by increasing The default value is 0ms. Value range: 0 ms to 1000 ms Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting the network jitter value. Lip sync. Fine-tunes network jitter settings if a slight labial synchronization problem persists after the network jitter settings are adjusted. The default value is 0ms. Value range: 0 ms to 300 ms Step 3 Click Save. The settings take effect immediately.
----End 7.6.10 Connecting to a 4E1 Network Only the endpoint supports 4E1 functions. To implement video communication over a 4E1-line dedicated network, you must connect the endpoint to the network.
Do not connect outdoor cables directly to the endpoint. If outdoor E1 lines (unbalanced) are led indoors, surge protectors are required. Any questions, contact technical support personnel.
The connection of E1 lines must comply with grounding specifications. For details, see A E1 and T1 Grounding Criteria. A 4E1 interface card provides four balanced-output ports. If the TE60 has a 4E1 interface card installed, connect the endpoint to a 4E1-line dedicated network. The ports of a 4E1 interface card can be used for any of the four E1 lines. There is no mapping between the ports and the four E1 lines on the local and the remote ends, so the lines can be connected to any of the ports at the local and remote ends, as long as all the four lines are connected. Inserting a 4E1 Interface Card To hold conferences over a 4E1 network, you must insert a 4E1 interface card into the corresponding interface slot at the back of the TE60. For safety reasons, insert the interface card only when the TE60 is powered off. Figure 7-1 shows the appearance of a 4E1 interface card, for your reference only. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Figure 7-1 4E1 interface card 7 System Settings 1 Captive screw 2 4E1 port (RJ45) 3 Edge connector To avoid damage to the interface card, implement antistatic measures before touching the card, such as wearing an ESD wrist strap, as shown in Figure 7-2. Figure 7-2 Wearing an ESD wrist strap Insert the interface card, as shown in Figure 7-3. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Figure 7-3 Inserting an interface card 7 System Settings Procedure 1. Loosen the two screws and remove the cover panel of the interface card slot. 2. Take out the interface card from its package. Slide the interface card into the card slot while keeping the side with components facing upwards. 3. Fasten the screws on the interface card. Checking Status Indicators on the 4E1 Ports The status indicators on the 4E1 ports can quickly provide information about the current network connection. There are two indicators on the 4E1 port to indicate the network connection, as shown in Table 7-31. Table 7-31 Status indicator on the 4E1 port Indicator Status Connection Status The orange indicator is on. The lines are connected and the clocks on the lines are synchronous. The green indicator is on. A call can be placed. Setting 4E1 Parameters Only the TE60 supports 4E1 functions. If 4E1 lines are used for video communication, 4E1 parameters, such as the account, password, clock mode, signaling mode, and sensitivity, must be set. You are allowed to set 4E1 parameters only after a 4E1 interface card is inserted into the rear port on the TE60. Procedure Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the 4E1/E1 tab. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Step 2 Set the 4E1 parameters listed in Table 7-32. Table 7-32 4E1 parameters 7 System Settings Paramet er Account Passwor d Description Setting These are the account and password used by the endpoint when the endpoint initiates an H.323 conference. For detailed information of the conference account and password, contact the administrator of the videoconferencing system.
If the endpoint is connected to an MCU, set the MCU clock as the master clock and the endpoint clock as the slave clock. If the endpoint is connected to another endpoint, set the clock mode of one endpoint to the master clock and the clock mode of the other endpoint to the slave clock. Clock mode The following clock modes are available:
Preferred clock: If this option is selected, the endpoint uses the internal clock and provides the clock to the remote device that is connected to the E1 interface of the endpoint. In a point-to-point call, Clock mode for either endpoint must be set to Preferred clock.
Alternate clock 1, Alternate clock 2, Alternate clock 3 and Alternate clock 4: If one of these options is selected, the endpoint obtains the clock from a line. Signalin g mode Specifies the transmission mode for 4E1 signaling.
To use channel associated signaling, you can select CAS. Cyclic redundancy checking (CRC) is used to test the network condition. The CRC result indicates the frame error rate. When an option that contains CRC4 is selected, the endpoint tests the network for bit errors. Sensitivi ty Set this parameter based on the length of the 4E1 line used between the endpoint and the nearest network node, such as a switch.
To use common channel signaling, you can select CCS.
If the distance between the endpoint and the nearest network node is longer than 100 m, select Long line. If the distance between the endpoint and the nearest network node is shorter than 100 m, select either Long line or Short line. Long line is recommended. Step 3 Click Save.
----End Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7.6.11 Connecting to a PSTN Network 7 System Settings To implement voice communication over a public switched telephone network (PSTN), you must connect the endpoint to the PSTN. After being connected to the PSTN, the endpoint can place calls to PSTN phones. To connect the endpoint to the PSTN, connect the PSTN port on the endpoint to the PSTN port installed by the carrier through a phone cable. After that, the endpoint can be used as a fixed-line phone while providing video conference functions. The PSTN number of the endpoint is the fixed-line phone number assigned to the PSTN port installed by the carrier. The application scenarios of connecting the endpoint to the PSTN are as follows:
Use the endpoint as a fixed-line phone to place calls to mobile phones or other fixed-line phones.
Invite a mobile phone or fixed-line phone user to a multipoint conference when the endpoint is in the conference. PSTN phones can place calls to the endpoint connected to the PSTN directly by dialing the PSTN number of the endpoint. By default, the endpoint allows for incoming PSTN calls. To view the related parameter settings, log in to the endpoint web interface, and choose System Settings > Conference >
Normal. By default, the endpoint has the PSTN audio input enabled. To view the setting of the PSTN parameter, log in to the endpoint web interface, and choose Device Control > Device Control > Audio Control > PSTN.
Gain adjustment: You can move the slider to adjust the volume of PSTN calls.
Sound mixing for PSTN sites: specifies whether all the sites (including PSTN sites, such as mobile phones) in a multipoint conference can hear each other. Enable this option when the endpoint joins a multipoint conference as a PSTN site. The endpoint comes with a PSTN port, which can be used in China only. 7.7 Security To improve communication security, you can encrypt conferences, set or change conference passwords, and disable remote access to the endpoint. 7.7.1 Enabling Encryption On an IP network, which is neither quality-guaranteed nor secure, encryption can be used to increase video communication security. Background Encryption can be H.235 or SRTP encryption. Both parties involved in communication must support encryption; otherwise, encryption fails. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Procedure 7 System Settings Step 1 Choose Advanced > Set > Security > Encryption and select an encryption policy. Step 2 Set Encryption parameters.
Disable: No stream is encrypted.
Enable: Stream encryption is mandatory. If you select this option, the endpoint can only attend encrypted conferences. If a remote site is also encryption capable, an encrypted conference is initiated upon successful call connection with the remote site. If the remote site is encryption incapable, the call to the remote site fails.
Maximum interconnectivity: Media streams are encrypted only when a call is set up. If you select this option for the local site, the conferences between the local and remote sites are not encrypted only when Disable is selected for the remote sites. Step 3 Choose Save.
----End 7.7.2 Supporting Remote Logins You can specify whether remote users can log in to the endpoint to manage it using the endpoint web interface, SSH, or Telnet. Web-based Login This operation can be performed only on the remote controlled UI. Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Secured. Step 2 Click the Web Login tab and select Web Login. After Web Login is selected, remote users can log in to the endpoint web interface to set parameters, start conferences, and view the endpoint status. Step 3 Select Save.
----End SSH and Telnet Login Telnet is an insecure protocol. You are advised to use SSH login. Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Secured > SSH/Telnet. Set the SSH and Telnet login parameters described in Table 7-33. Table 7-33 SSH and Telnet login parameters Parameter Description Setting Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Parameter Description Setting Telnet Login Specifies whether remote users can log in to the endpoint in Telnet mode for maintenance and configuration purposes, such as querying system logs and status information. This parameter is deselected by default. The default user name and password for telnetting to the endpoint are debug and Change_Me respectively. NOTICE If the computer you use to telnet to your endpoint runs Linux, specify the Telnet port on the endpoint by running telnet endpoint IP address port number. For example, run telnet 10.11.12.123 23 where 23 is the port number. Specifies whether to enable SSH, which improves transmission security and prevents information disclosure. To protect against unauthorized access, change the password at your first login and regularly change the password afterward. This parameter is deselected by default. The default user name and password for logging in to the endpoint in SSH mode are debug and Change_Me respectively. To protect against unauthorized access, change the password at your first login and regularly change the password afterward. SSH
A maximum of three users is allowed to simultaneously log in to the endpoint in SSH mode.
A maximum of seven users is allowed to simultaneously log in to the endpoint in SSH and Telnet modes. Step 2 Select Save.
----End 7.7.3 Setting the Password of the Remote Control Administrator To prevent endpoint parameter settings from being modified by unauthorized users, anyone who wants to access the Settings screen and use the customized tool bar on the menu screen must provide the password if the password is not set to blank. Procedure By default, the password of the remote control administrator is 12345678. To improve device security, set a password at your first login and regularly change the password afterward. Step 1 Choose System Settings > Secured. Step 2 Click GUI tab. Set the password parameters described in Table 7-34. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Table 7-34 Setting the password of the remote control administrator Parameter Description Setting Encryption advanced settings Specifies whether to encrypt the Advanced Settings screen of the remote controlled UI. This parameter is not selected by default. If this parameter is enabled, you must enter the administrator password to access the Advanced screen. If this parameter is not selected, the administrator password is required only when you select Settings on the Advanced screen. Current password Specifies the current password of the
-
remote control administrator. Specifies the new password of the remote control administrator. The password contains a maximum of 32 characters. If you set this password to blank, no password is required when you access the Settings screen and use the customized tool bar on the menu screen. NOTE You are advised to set a complex password. A simple or empty password results in high security risks. New password Confirm password Step 3 Select Save.
----End 7.7.4 Setting the Upgrade Password You can set the password required to upgrade the endpoint software using the upgrade tool. The default upgrade password is Change_Me. To improve device security, set a password at your first login and regularly change the password afterward. To change the password, choose System Settings > Secured > Upgrade password and set Upgrade password. The password contains 6 to 32 characters. In addition, it must include at least two of the following: uppercase letter, lowercase letter, digit, or special character. 7.7.5 Setting the Air Content Sharing Password When connecting to the endpoint, an air content sharing client must provide the predefined password. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Background Procedure For details about how to download and use an air content sharing client, see 4.7 Sharing a Presentation. The default air content sharing password is Change_Me. To improve device security, set a password at your first login and regularly change the password afterward. To change the password, choose System Settings > Secured > Air Content Sharing and set Password. The password contains 6 to 32 characters. In addition, it must include at least two of the following: uppercase letter, lowercase letter, digit, or special character. 7.7.6 Setting Web Account Security Properly keep the web interface administrator account to ensure the security of web-based login. Setting the Web Administrator Account The default account name of the web interface administrator is admin, which can be modified only on the remote controlled UI. To change the account name, choose Advanced Settings >
Settings > Secured > Web Login on the remote controlled UI of the endpoint and set Administrator name. The default password of the web interface administrator is Change_Me. To improve device security, set a password at your first login and regularly change the password afterward. On the web page of the endpoint, choose System Settings > General > Personal and set the administrator password, as shown in Figure 7-4. Figure 7-4 Setting the administrator password Setting Web Login Security Step 1 Choose System Settings > Secured. Step 2 Click Web Login tab, set the Web login parameters listed in Table 7-35. Table 7-35 Web login parameters Parameter Description Setting Maximum login Specifies the maximum number of attempts The value can be 3, 5, or Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Parameter Description attempts that you can enter incorrect passwords for any endpoint account or incorrect authentication passwords for connecting to the endpoint. When this number is reached, the endpoint automatically locks the account. 7 System Settings Setting 10. The default value is 5. Lock time Specifies the duration an endpoint account will be locked. You can attempt to log in again only when this duration ends. The duration can be 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 60 minutes. To ensure data transmission security, the endpoint uses HTTPS to access its web pages by default. If a third-party interface uses HTTP to access the endpoint, set this parameter to Enable; otherwise, the interface cannot access the endpoint. Specifies whether an endpoint can be waked up on its web interface. If you select this parameter, you can access the web interface of an endpoint to wake up the endpoint when it is in sleep mode. The default value is 5 min. The default value is Disable. The default value is Enable. HTTP Wake Up the Endpoint Step 3 Click the Overtime tab and set Enable overtime. Specifies the allowed idle time, exceeding which the current user will be automatically logged out. The default value is 1 h. If you set this parameter to Disable, the endpoint will not log out users automatically. Step 4 Click Save. The settings take effect immediately.
----End 7.7.7 Setting Whitelist After you configure a whitelist, only devices with the IP addresses specified in the whitelist can connect to the endpoint. If the whitelist is empty, all IP addresses are allowed to connect to the endpoint. The whitelist helps enhance videoconferencing security. Background Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings Set the whitelist under the guidance of technical support engineers. The endpoint whitelist is empty by default. That is, all IP addresses are allowed to connect to the endpoint. If an endpoint is deployed in a public network, it is recommended that you add commonly used IP addresses and IP address segments to the whitelist to decrease network attack risks. You must add the IP addresses of the following devices to the whitelist:
PC that is used to access the endpoint web interface
Videoconferencing MCU
SMC
Recording server Procedure Step 1 Choose System Settings > Whitelist. Step 2 Select Enable. If Enable is deselected, the whitelist is invalid. That is, all IP addresses are allowed to connect to the endpoint. You can modify the whitelist only after selecting Enable here. Step 3 Click Add and set IP address and Mask length. Step 4 Click OK. The settings take effect immediately. To delete a record from the whitelist, select the record and click Delete.
----End 7.8 Importing Security Certificates Import certificates on the endpoint web interface to improve the communication security. 7.8.1 Importing a Certificate You can import client, server, and SiteCall and 802.1x authentication certificates into your endpoint. These certificates can be used to identify users, certificate authorities, and servers to improve communication security. For example, a client certificate is required when your endpoint registers with the SIP server using the Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocol. Prerequisites Before importing a certificate, make sure it is issued by a security authority to prevent security risks. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 System Settings
Client certificate: You have obtained the required certificate from the SIP server administrator or downloaded it from a certificate authority.
Server certificate: You have downloaded the required certificate from a certificate authority.
Multipoint conference certificate: You have obtained the required certificate from the GK server administrator.
802.1x authentication certificate: You have obtained the required certificates from the network administrator. Procedure Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation. The Installation page is displayed. Step 2 Click Import Certificate. The Import Certificate dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click Select File to select the certificate you want to import. Step 4 Select the desired certificate type.
To import a certificate for authentication calls and when the endpointfunctions as the server, select Server certificate.
To import a certificate for authentication registration or calls and when the endpoint functions as a client (for example, TLS-based registration), select Client certificate.
To import a certificate used for SiteCall security, select Multipoint conference certificate.
To import certificates used for 802.1x wired or wireless network authentication, select the desired certificates. When selecting the certificate type, choose the network type, which is Wireless and wired by default. Step 5 Click Import. Step 6 Click Return when OK is displayed.
----End 7.8.2 Importing Web Certificates To help ensure communication security, import web certificates, including the trusted Certificate Authority (CA) file, local certificate file, local private key file, and local private key password file, to the endpoint through the endpoint web interface. Background Professional guidance is required for importing certificates. Make sure the certificate to be imported matches the certificate type selected; otherwise, the endpoint may malfunction. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Procedure Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation. The Installation page is displayed. Step 2 Click Import Web Certificate. The Import Web Certificate dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click and select a certificate type. 7 System Settings Step 4 Click
, select the certificate you want to import, and click Import. Step 5 Click Return when OK is displayed.
----End 7.8.3 Updating Web Certificates After you import web certificates to the endpoint, update them to enable them to take effect. Procedure Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation. The Installation page is displayed. Step 2 Click Update Web Certificates. Step 3 Click OK. The endpoint restarts.
----End 7.9 Managing System Files Manage system files on the endpoint interface to improve the operation and maintenance
(O%amp;M) efficiency of the endpoint. 7.9.1 Importing and Exporting Settings You can import or export settings on the endpoint web interface. After your endpoint is restored to its default settings, you can import previously exported settings. Background After your endpoint is restored to its default settings upon a fault, you can import previously exported settings. For example, when your endpoint is faulty and needs to be restored to its default settings, export the existing settings before the restoration. After you restore your endpoint, directly import the exported settings instead of manually setting the parameters. This saves your time. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Procedure 7 System Settings Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation. The Installation page is displayed. Step 2 Click Import/Export Settings. The Import/Export Settings page is displayed. Step 3 Perform either of the following:
To import system settings, click Import Settings. To export system settings, click Export Settings. The web administrator password is required when you import the configuration file. After the configuration file is imported successfully, the endpoint automatically restarts for the configuration file to take effect.
----End 7.9.2 Backing Up Settings The administrator can use the One-Click Backup function to create a configuration backup file for your endpoint. If some parameter settings under System Settings are inadvertently deleted or changed, you can use this backup file to restore all settings under System Settings to the pre-backup settings. If a configuration backup file is already stored on your endpoint, a new configuration backup file will replace the original one. Background Procedure Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation. The Installation page is displayed. Step 2 Click One-Click Backup. Step 3 On the One-Click Backup page, click Back Up Settings. Your endpoint then starts to create a configuration backup file. When the backup is complete, a notification message is displayed.
----End Follow-up Procedure To restore all settings under System Settings to the pre-backup settings, click Restore Backup Settings. Your endpoint will then restart and restore the settings. 7.9.3 Importing License Files Some functions on your endpoint, such as Wi-Fi and built-in MCU, require license files. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Prerequisites You have obtained the latest license files. 7 System Settings From http://enterprise.huawei.com, you can use your contract number and device serial number to download license files. Background Procedure Your endpoint can start properly even when no license file is loaded on it or the existing license file has expired. After startup, you can load a valid license file, set parameters, and upgrade software. When a license file is updated, the original license file expires. For example, after you purchase an official license, the trial license will expire. Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation. The Installation page is displayed. Step 2 Click Import License. The Import License dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click Select File, select the license file you want to import and click Import. Step 4 Click Return when OK is displayed.
----End 7.9.4 Importing a Layout Policy File After a layout policy file is imported to the endpoint, you can set the layout configured in that file during a multipoint conference hosted by the endpoint's built-in MCU or chaired by your site. A layout policy file has been exported using the layout customization tool. You can obtain the layout customization tool from the software package for the endpoint. Prerequisites Procedure Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation. The Installation page is displayed. Step 2 Click Import Layout Policy File. The Import Layout Policy File dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click
, select the layout policy file you want to import, and click Import. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Step 4 Click Return when OK is displayed.
----End 7 System Settings 7.9.5 Creating and Downloading a CSR File You can create and export a CSR file from the endpoint web interface. Prerequisites Background Procedure The local private key password file has been imported. You can send the CSR file to a certification organization to generate an authentication certificate for your endpoint. Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation. The Installation page is displayed. Step 2 Click Export CSR File. Step 3 Enter the CSR file information and click OK. The created CSR file will be stored on the endpoint. Step 4 Click Download the CSR file to save the CSR file to the local computer.
----End Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 8 Upgrading 8 Upgrading About This Chapter Your endpoint supports the following software upgrade methods: automatic, using upgrade tools, using the mini system, and from the endpoint web interface. During the upgrade, do not power off the endpoint to prevent irreversible faults. The differences between the four upgrade methods as follows:
Automatic upgrade With the automatic upgrade function enabled and automatic upgrade parameters set, your endpoint obtains upgrade files from the specified server and installs the upgrade files when the preset upgrade interval arrives. For details, see 8.1 Automatic Upgrade.
Tool upgrade Download the upgrade software to a computer, connect the computer to the endpoint directly or over the LAN, and upgrade the endpoint. For details, see 8.2 Tool Upgrade.
Upgrade using the mini system If upgrading the endpoint using its normal system fails due to a power failure or other causes, you can use the mini system to complete the upgrade. For details, see 8.3 Upgrading the Endpoint Using the Mini System.
Upgrade from the endpoint web interface On the endpoint web interface, manually upgrade the endpoint or set it to upgrade automatically. For details, see 8.4 Upgrading the Endpoint on Its Web Interface. Before the upgrade, complete the following:
Read the Release Notes to understand the contents to be upgraded and precautions required to be taken during the upgrade.
Obtain the current software version.
Back up the settings on the endpoint, such as the communication settings and address book. 8.1 Automatic Upgrade Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 8 Upgrading You can update your endpoint's software from the web interface. With the automatic upgrade function enabled and automatic upgrade parameters set, your endpoint obtains upgrade files from the specified server and installs the upgrade files when the preset upgrade interval arrives. 8.2 Tool Upgrade You can use a computer to locally upgrade the endpoint. 8.3 Upgrading the Endpoint Using the Mini System If upgrading the endpoint using its normal system fails, you can use the mini system to complete the upgrade. 8.4 Upgrading the Endpoint on Its Web Interface You can update the endpoint software from the web interface. 8.1 Automatic Upgrade You can update your endpoint's software from the web interface. With the automatic upgrade function enabled and automatic upgrade parameters set, your endpoint obtains upgrade files from the specified server and installs the upgrade files when the preset upgrade interval arrives. Procedure Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation. The Installation page is displayed. Step 2 Click Auto Upgrade Settings. The Auto Upgrade Settings page is displayed. Step 3 Set the upgrade parameters listed in Table 8-1. Table 8-1 Upgrade parameters Parameter Description Setting This parameter is deselected by default. Auto upgrade Specifies whether the automatic upgrade function is enabled. If you set this parameter to Enable, you must also set Upgrade interval, Server address, User name, and Password. Your endpoint will obtain upgrade files from the specified server and install the files when the specified upgrade interval is reached. Enable wireless MIC auto update Specifies whether to automatically update an upgradable wireless microphone VPM220W after it is connected to the endpoint. This parameter is selected by default. Upgrade Specifies the upgrade interval. This The default value is 0.5 h. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 8 Upgrading Parameter Description Setting parameter is available only when Auto upgrade is selected. Value range: 0.5 h to 24 h Specifies the IP address of the server that stores the upgrade files for your endpoint. This parameter cannot be left blank. Specify the user name and password your endpoint uses to access the server. No default value is set for these parameters. interval Server address User name Password Step 4 Perform either of the following:
If you selected Auto upgrade, click Save.
Click Manual upgrade.
----End 8.2 Tool Upgrade You can use a computer to locally upgrade the endpoint. Prerequisites Before the upgrade, ensure that:
The target software is saved to the computer. The computer is connected to the endpoint using a straight-through cable, crossover cable, or switch.
You have obtained the upgrade password. The default upgrade password is Change_Me. For details, see 7.7.4 Setting the Upgrade Password. Upgrading a Single endpoint Step 1 Power on the computer and endpoint. Step 2 Extract the compressed software upgrade package on the computer. Step 3 Run UpgMaster.exe to display the window shown in Figure 8-1. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Figure 8-1 Upgrading a single endpoint 8 Upgrading Step 4 (Optional) Click Browser and select the te.dat file. By default, the path of the te.dat file is displayed in Upgrade File. Step 5 In Remote Terminal IP Address, enter the endpoint IP address, such as 10.10.10.10. If Reboot is selected, the endpoint automatically restarts after the upgrade. Step 6 Click Upgrade. Step 7 In the displayed dialog box, enter the upgrade password and click OK.
----End Upgrading Multiple Endpoints in Batches Step 1 Power on the computer and endpoint. Step 2 Extract the compressed software upgrade package on the computer. Step 3 Run UpgMaster.exe to display the window shown in Figure 8-1. Step 4 (Optional) Click Browser and select the te.dat file. By default, the path of the te.dat file is displayed in Upgrade File. Step 5 Click shown in Figure 8-1 to display the window as shown in Figure 8-2. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Figure 8-2 Upgrading multiple endpoints in batches 8 Upgrading Step 6 In area 1 shown in Figure 8-2, enter the number of the endpoints you want to upgrade, for example, 4. Step 7 In area 3 shown in Figure 8-2, enter the IP addresses of the endpoints you want to upgrade. Step 8 In area 4 shown in Figure 8-2, enter the upgrade passwords of the endpoints you want to upgrade. Step 9 In area 2 shown in Figure 8-2, select the endpoints you want to upgrade and click Upgrade. To improve upgrade efficiency when the network bandwidth is insufficient, you can press Ctrl+ALT+C in the window shown in Figure 8-1, and then set the upgrade policy in the displayed window.
----End Upgrading Specified Software Modules Step 1 Power on the computer and endpoint. Step 2 Extract the compressed software upgrade package on the computer. Step 3 Run UpgMaster.exe to display the window shown in Figure 8-1. Step 4 (Optional) Click Browser and select the te.dat file. By default, the path of the te.dat file is displayed in Upgrade File. Step 5 Press Ctrl+ALT+P to display the Pack Upgrade File window. Step 6 In the upgrade file list area, select the software modules you want to upgrade. Step 7 Click Pack File to pack the selected software modules into a .dat file. Save the file to the computer, for example, save the file as tepart.dat to the computer. Step 8 In the displayed dialog box, click OK. Step 9 (Optional) In the window shown in Figure 8-1, click Browser and select the tepart.dat file you saved in Step 7. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 8 Upgrading The path displayed in Upgrade File automatically changes to the path of the tepart.dat file. Step 10 In Remote Terminal IP Address, enter the endpoint IP address, such as 10.10.10.10. Step 11 Click Upgrade. Step 12 In the displayed dialog box, enter the upgrade password and click OK.
----End 8.3 Upgrading the Endpoint Using the Mini System If upgrading the endpoint using its normal system fails, you can use the mini system to complete the upgrade. Prerequisites Background Procedure
A copy of the target software is available on the computer.
The computer is connected to the endpoint directly or over a LAN.
You have obtained the upgrade password. The default upgrade password is Change_Me. For details, see 7.7.4 Setting the Upgrade Password. The mini system is used for upgrades when the endpoint software malfunctions. This method can be repeatedly used and ensures successful software upgrades provided that there are no hardware failures. Step 1 While the endpoint is restarting or powering on, press and hold the RESET button for 10 seconds. The endpoint enters the mini system. At this time, the endpoint has two IP addresses available: the static IP address of the normal system and the default IP address (192.168.1.1). If the normal system IP address cannot be used for connection setup or the endpoint fails to obtain any IP address because of the dynamic IP address or other causes, you can use the default IP address for upgrades. Step 2 Use Telnet to log in to the endpoint. Run the mnt upgswitch on command to enable the mini system upgrade function.
The mini system upgrade function is disabled by default.
The default administrator user name and password for telnetting to the endpoint are debug and Change_Me respectively. Step 3 Extract the compressed software upgrade package on the computer. Step 4 Run the upgrade program UpgradeTool.exe. The upgrade dialog box is displayed. Step 5 (Optional) Click Browser and select the te.dat file. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 8 Upgrading By default, the path of the te.dat file is displayed in Upgrade File. Step 6 In Remote Terminal IP Address, enter your endpoint IP address, for example, 192.168.1.1. Then click Upgrade. Step 7 In the displayed dialog box, click OK to start the upgrade. Step 8 Restart the endpoint.
----End 8.4 Upgrading the Endpoint on Its Web Interface You can update the endpoint software from the web interface. Prerequisites The upgrade file has been copied to your computer. Do not close the endpoint web interface during the upgrade as doing so causes an upgrade failure. Procedure Step 1 Log in to the endpoint web interface. Choose Maintenance > Upgrade. The Upgrade dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Click Select File and select the te.dat file on your computer. Step 3 Click Import. The endpoint starts the upgrade.
----End The endpoint automatically restarts when the upgrade is complete. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 9 Maintenance 9 Maintenance About This Chapter You must periodically check the working environment, cable connection, communication network connection, and audio-visual input and output of your endpoint. This ensures that the endpoint and its peripheral equipment work properly. 9.1 Checking the Working Environment Periodically To ensure that your endpoint can function properly, check the working environment periodically. 9.2 Managing Common Users and Passwords Properly keep the accounts of common web interface users. After logging in to the web interface, a common user can configure only personal settings. 9.3 Customizing the Web Interface On the endpoint, you can customize the shortcut bar and desktop icons to be displayed on the web interface. 9.4 Customizing the Remote Controlled UI You can customize the menu option bar, conference control functions, and status icons. 9.5 Checking the Endpoint Periodically For preventive maintenance purposes, you need to check the audio, video, and communication cables periodically. 9.6 Viewing System Status System status information helps you maintain your endpoint. 9.7 Querying System Information System information helps you maintain your endpoint. 9.8 Querying Logs Logs record, in real time, all important events that occur when your endpoint runs. These records assist you in maintaining your endpoint and locating system faults. 9.9 Restoring Your Endpoint to Default Settings Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 9 Maintenance You can use the Restore Default function to restore your endpoint to its default settings. 9.1 Checking the Working Environment Periodically To ensure that your endpoint can function properly, check the working environment periodically. Table 9-1 lists the items to be checked. If any of the items does meet the requirements, power off the endpoint and take measures to improve the environment. Ensure that the endpoint is used only when all the listed items meet the requirements. Table 9-1 Checking the working environment Item Requirement Operating temperature 0C to 40C Operating humidity 10% to 80% RH 9.2 Managing Common Users and Passwords Properly keep the accounts of common web interface users. After logging in to the web interface, a common user can configure only personal settings. Step 1 Choose System Settings > General on the endpoint web interface. The General page is displayed. Step 2 Click the Personal tab and set the parameters described in Table 9-2. Table 9-2 Setting the accounts of common web interface users Parameter Description Setting Name of user 1 Name of user 2 Password of user 1 Password of user 2 Confirm password Specify common users' user name and password. This type of user can configure personal but not system settings. The user name can contain a maximum of 64 characters, and the password can contain 6 to 32 characters. The password must include at least two of the following:
uppercase letter, lowercase letter, digit, or special character. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 9 Maintenance Parameter Description Setting Name of API user Password of API user Confirm password Specify the user name and password for authenticating the touch panel when it attempts to connect to your endpoint or authenticating the Service Management Center (SMC) when it attempts to add your endpoint as manageable participant.
The default value of User name is api.
The default value of User password is Change_Me. The user name can contain a maximum of 64 characters, and the password can contain 6 to 32 characters. The password must include at least two of the following:
uppercase letter, lowercase letter, digit, or special character. Step 3 Click Save. The settings take effect immediately.
----End 9.3 Customizing the Web Interface On the endpoint, you can customize the shortcut bar and desktop icons to be displayed on the web interface. Background Figure 9-1 shows the shortcut bar and desktop icons. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Figure 9-1 Shortcut bar and desktop icons 9 Maintenance
(1) Shortcut bar
(2) Desktop icons Procedure Step 1 On the endpoint web interface, choose System Settings > Display and click the User defined tab. Step 2 Perform any of the following operations:
To customize desktop icons, click Desktop Icons and select the icons you want to display on the desktop. To customize the shortcut bar, click Shortcut Bar Icons and select the icons you want to display in the shortcut bar. A maximum of 10 icons can be displayed on the shortcut bar.
To restore the web interface to its default style, click Restore Initial Style. Step 3 Follow the onscreen instructions to complete your settings. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide
----End 9 Maintenance 9.4 Customizing the Remote Controlled UI You can customize the menu option bar, conference control functions, and status icons. 9.4.1 Customizing Onscreen Status Icons You can customize which status icons are displayed on the home screen, helping you quickly understand the endpoint's status. For details about common status icons, see D Status Icons. Choose System Settings > Display, click the Icon tab, and customize status icons. Packet Loss Rate Icon By comparing the packet loss rate on the current network with threshold A and threshold B, the endpoint determines whether to display the packet loss rate icon on the remote controlled UI. The policy is as follows:
Threshold A must be less than threshold B. Their value ranges are 0.1% to 100%. The default values for threshold A and threshold B are 1% and 5%, respectively. If the packet loss rate is less than or equal to threshold A, no packet loss rate icon is displayed. If the packet loss rate is between threshold A and threshold B, is displayed. If the packet loss rate is greater than or equal to threshold B, is displayed.
When Serious packet loss notice is enabled, the remote controlled UI displays a text alert if the packet loss rate is greater than threshold B for 5 seconds or more. Other Icons A status icon is displayed on screens if the following conditions are met:
The status icon to be displayed on screens is selected. The function or the condition that corresponds to the status icon has been enabled. 9.4.2 Customizing the Home Screen You can customize the home screen, such as specifying whether the site name, IP address, system time, or date is displayed. The following operations are based on the remote controlled UI. Some parameters can also be set on the web interface. To set the parameters on the web interface, log in to the web interface and choose System Settings > Display > Site Name. Step 1 On the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced > Settings > Display > Personalize. Step 2 Set the custom parameters described in Table 9-3. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Table 9-3 Custom parameters 9 Maintenance Parameter Description Setting Transparenc y Transparency of the remote controlled UI against the background image. The default value is 15%. If you set this parameter to Opaque, the background image is not displayed on operation screens except the call and menu screens. If you set this parameter to other values, the background image is visible on the remote controlled UI. Display IP address Specifies whether to display the local IP address on the conferencing screen. This parameter is selected by default. Select conference controls Specifies the conference control functions you want to display on the Conference Control screen. None Site name Specifies the site name you want to be superimposed on the video of your site when it displays to other sites. When your site joins a multipoint conference, this site name is displayed in the site list. The default value is site. Display position Specifies the position where your site name is superimposed on the video of your site. The default value is Lower right corner. Display duration Specifies the duration for displaying a site name. The default value is Always display. Display time and zone Specifies whether the time zone and time are superimposed on the local video sent to remote sites. This parameter is not selected by default. The time zone and time are not displayed on the local video shown on the display device at your site. Font color Specifies the color in which a site name is displayed. The default color is white. Font size Specifies the font size for the site name display. The default value is Medium. Bold Specifies whether a site name is displayed in bold. This parameter is not selected by default. Background color Specifies the background color for the site name display. The default color is gray. Transparenc y Specifies the transparency for the site name display. The default value is Fully transparent. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 9 Maintenance Parameter Description Setting Fine-tunes the site name's position left or right on the local video. The default value is 48. Value range: 0-96. Fine-tunes the site name's position up or down on the local video. The default value is 48. Value range: 0-96. Set the horizontal offset Set the vertical offset Step 3 Select Save.
----End 9.4.3 Customizing Conference Control Functions to Be Displayed You can customize the conference control functions you want to display on the Conference control screen to quickly access these functions. Background Procedure The following conference control functions are displayed by default: Add Site, Disconnect Site, Mute/Unmute MIC, Extend Conference, End Conference, Enable Chair Control, Lock conference, and Restore Auto Continuous Presence. Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Display > Personalize > Select conference controls. Select the conference control functions you want to display on the Conference control screen. Step 2 Select Save.
----End 9.4.4 Customizing the Option Bar You can customize icons on the option bar to facilitate access to the corresponding screens. Background
To hide the option bar Press the left arrow key or on the remote control.
To show the option bar Press or on the remote control. Procedure Step 1 Press or on the remote control to access the menu screen. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 9 Maintenance Step 2 Select on the option bar to display the Customize Option Bar screen. If the administrator password is not set to blank, to access the Customize Option Bar screen, you must enter the administrator password whose default value is 12345678. Step 3 Select the icon you want to move and select Up or Down. To show or hide an icon on the option bar, press deselect the icon. on the remote control to select or Step 4 Select OK.
----End 9.5 Checking the Endpoint Periodically For preventive maintenance purposes, you need to check the audio, video, and communication cables periodically.
Periodically (once a week is recommended) check that the cables connecting peripheral equipment and the power supply to the endpoint are securely connected. Periodically (once a week is recommended) check whether the communication cables connected to the endpoint work properly. Power on the endpoint and call some other endpoints using different methods, such as calling over a broadband network. If a call cannot be set up, verify that the cables are connected correctly and securely and the communication parameters are set correctly. If the problem persists, contact the videoconferencing network administrator to check the network. 9.6 Viewing System Status System status information helps you maintain your endpoint. On the endpoint web interface, choose Maintenance > System Status. On the System Status page that is displayed, you can check:
Line status: includes the local IP address, alternate IP address, network interface mode, WLAN IP address, information about whether GK is enabled, H.323 site number, information about whether SIP is enabled, SIP site number, PSTN status, PSTN number of a remote site, running duration, and camera status.
Call status: includes the conference number (or the IP address, number, or name of the remote site), line rate, video resolution, video rate (frame rate), presentation resolution, presentation rate (frame rate), audio rate, video packet loss rate, presentation packet loss rate, audio packet loss rate, conference participating duration, and presentation token. The call status is displayed only when your endpoint is in a conference.
Conference parameters: includes the call bandwidth, video protocol, video bandwidth
(frame rate), audio protocol, audio bandwidth, presentation protocol, presentation bandwidth (frame rate), remote number, signaling encryption, media stream encryption, conference number for video access, conference number for audio access, and password for conference authentication. The conference parameters are displayed only when your endpoint is in a conference. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 9 Maintenance
Input port status: includes the video information, USB1 and USB2 ports and air content sharing information.
4E1 connection status (only for the TE60). 9.7 Querying System Information System information helps you maintain your endpoint. Choose Maintenance > System Information. On the displayed System Information page, you can check:
Audio and video protocols and video resolutions supported by your endpoint
Network ports provided by your endpoint and the maximum bandwidth supported by each port
Whether your endpoint supports the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
Support for and capabilities of the built-in MCU
Whether your endpoint supports dual stream, namely, the video and presentation
Whether your endpoint supports H.235 encryption
Whether your endpoint is interoperable with Lync
Whether your endpoint supports recording, Scalable Video Coding (SVC), Wi-Fi, and public switched telephone network (PSTN)
Maximum presentation resolution and codec capability of your endpoint
Connection status to the network diagnostics client
Valid term of the license
ESN
MAC address 9.8 Querying Logs Logs record, in real time, all important events that occur when your endpoint runs. These records assist you in maintaining your endpoint and locating system faults. Your endpoint can store a maximum of 10000 log records. When the memory for recording logs is full, new logs can still be recorded by replacing the oldest one. Background Procedure Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Logs. On the Logs page, specify one or more of the following criteria to query logs:
Time when the log is created Log level: Information, Warning, Error, or All levels Log type: 4E1(only TE60), Main control, WEB, UI, BSP, Audio, Video, Protocol, or All Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Step 2 Click Query.
----End 9 Maintenance 9.9 Restoring Your Endpoint to Default Settings You can use the Restore Default function to restore your endpoint to its default settings. Prerequisites Background Procedure You have obtained the serial number of your endpoint. To obtain the serial number of your endpoint, choose Help > Version. Restoring your endpoint to its default settings causes the loss of certain stored information, for example, site information in the address book, call records, and logs. Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation. The Installation page is displayed. Step 2 Click Restore Default. Step 3 Enter the serial number of your endpoint. Step 4 Click Restore Default and confirm your operation.
----End Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 10 Troubleshooting 10 Troubleshooting About This Chapter This chapter describes how to diagnose and troubleshoot endpoint faults. 10.1 Understanding Diagnosis Methods The endpoint supports the following diagnosis methods: sound and color bar tests, loopback tests, network tests, one-click diagnosis, signaling diagnostics, tracert, and remote control tests. 10.2 Common Faults This section describes the problems you might encounter when using your endpoint and provides solutions. 10.1 Understanding Diagnosis Methods The endpoint supports the following diagnosis methods: sound and color bar tests, loopback tests, network tests, one-click diagnosis, signaling diagnostics, tracert, and remote control tests. Figure 10-1 shows the diagnosis model for your endpoint. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Figure 10-1 Diagnosis model 10 Troubleshooting According to Figure 10-1, diagnosis functions diagnoses the audio module, video module, and network module. Audio signals are transmitted in the following paths:
Local microphone 1 5 Communications network 6 7 Remote speaker Local speaker 2 5 Communications network 6 8 Remote microphone Video signals are transmitted in the following paths:
Local camera 3 5 Communications network 6 9 Remote monitor Local display 4 5 Communications network 6 10 Remote camera Sound and Color Bar Tests Table 10-1 lists the sound and color bar tests. Table 10-1 Sound and color bar tests Test Sound Item to Be Tested Signal Stream 2 audio output Color bar 4 video output 2 Speaker 4 Monitor
Sound test: Choose Maintenance > Diagnostics. On the Diagnostics page, click Sound Test. While the test audio stored on your endpoint plays, check the sound quality.
Color bar test: Choose Maintenance > Diagnostics. On the Diagnostics page, click Color Bar Test. Seven color bars are shown on the display for you to check the color quality. Loopback Test Your endpoint can transmit audio or video data on a channel to simulate an actual application and test whether the output is satisfactory. You can perform a local loopback test to check the local network connection or a remote loopback test to check the remote network connection. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 10 Troubleshooting When you perform a remote loopback test, data is transmitted from your site to a remote site, and then back to your site. Table 10-2 lists the types of loopback tests available on your endpoint.
To enable your endpoint to communicate with other endpoints, stop the loopback test.
You cannot perform a loopback test on remote video if you are in a dual-stream conference. Table 10-2 Loopback tests Test Item to Be Tested Signal Stream Audio loopback Local audio module Microphone 1 2 Speaker Video loopback Local video module Camera 3 4 Monitor Digital loopback Local audio and video modules The endpoint performs local audio and video loopback tests simultaneously. Remote audio loopback
Remote audio module
Network transmission Microphone 1 5 6 7 8 6 5 2 Speaker Remote video loopback
Remote video module
Network transmission Camera 3 5 6 9 10 6 5 4 Monitor Remote digital loopback
Remote audiovisual modules The endpoint performs remote audio and video loopback tests simultaneously.
Network transmission Network Test Table 10-3 Network test Test Item to Be Tested Signal Stream Network IP access endpoint LAN or public network Before a test, verify that the LAN network port indicator is green, which indicates that your endpoint is correctly connected to an IP network.
In IP address, enter an IP address that is in a different network segment from your endpoint IP address. Then click Start. If the test succeeds, the gateway settings and IP address of your endpoint are correct. If your endpoint is on a private network, in IP address, enter a public IP address. Then click Start. If the test succeeds, the gateway settings, NAT address, and IP address of your endpoint are correct. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide One-Click Diagnosis 10 Troubleshooting Web administrators and API users can perform one-click diagnosis on the endpoint. The diagnosis file helps with fault identification. Step 1 Choose Maintenance > One-Click Diagnosis. The One-Click Diagnosis dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Click Start to start diagnosis. The diagnosis takes about 5 minutes. Step 3 Click Download to save the diagnosis file to the local computer.
----End Signaling Diagnostics Web administrators and API users can perform signaling diagnostics and export the diagnostics file from the endpoint web interface. The diagnostics file helps with fault identification.
Only one user can perform signaling diagnostics.
If not manually stopped, signaling diagnostics automatically stops after 10 minutes or when the diagnostics file size reaches 10 MB. Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Signaling Diagnostics. The Signaling Diagnostics dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Click Start to start signaling diagnostics. When prompted, click OK. Signaling diagnostics does not monitor media stream data, but will obtain site information, such as site numbers. Perform this operation with caution. Step 3 Click Stop to stop signaling diagnostics. Step 4 Click Download to save the diagnostics file to the local computer.
----End Route Test A route test helps determine the path that a data packet at the network layer uses to access a destination address. Before you perform route test, choose System Settings > Network > Network diagnostics and set Network diagnostics to Enable. Table 10-4 lists the parameters that you need to set before performing a route test. Table 10-4 Route parameters Parameter Description Setting Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 10 Troubleshooting Parameter IP address Maximum hops Timeout time(s) Description Setting Specifies the IP address of the destination device. Example: 10.10.10.1 Specifies the maximum allowed hops. Specifies the timeout duration for the call waiting time, in seconds. Example: 5 Example: 1 Remote Control Test Test the keys on the remote control to check whether they are functioning properly. If only some of the keys are tested, you can exit the Remote Control Test screen by pressing and holding on the remote control. When all the keys are tested, the Remote Control Test screen automatically exits. The normal operating distance of the remote control is 6 meters. Its performance may be affected under strong light. If the remote control does not work, verify that:
The endpoint is powered on. The positive and negative charges of the battery are connected correctly. The battery has sufficient power left. There are no special fluorescent or neon signs nearby. When using the remote control to operate the endpoint, you can use the camera to forward infrared signals to the endpoint. To enable the camera to forward infrared signals, choose Advanced > Settings > Video > Common Settings > Video Input and set Infrared camera is used to control the endpoint to Yes. 10.2 Common Faults This section describes the problems you might encounter when using your endpoint and provides solutions. Web Interface Table 10-5 lists the troubleshooting methods for problems that may arise on the endpoint web interface. Table 10-5 methods for troubleshooting endpoint web interface problems Problem Possible Cause Solution A message is displayed to The latest patches for the operating system or Internet Install the latest patches for the operating system and Internet Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 10 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Solution indicate that your endpoint failed to connect to the Internet or download images. Explorer are not installed. Explorer. The security level of Internet Explorer is too high, or your endpoint IP address has not been added to the list of trusted sites. 1. From the Internet Explorer menu bar, choose Tools >
Internet Options. 2. Click the Security tab, Trusted sites, and then Sites. 3. In Add this Web site to the zone, enter your endpoint IP address. Then click Add. 4. Click OK. Button text is not fully displayed. Internet Explorer is set to ignore the font styles specified on web pages. In this case, the font specified by your endpoint cannot be recognized. 1. From the Internet Explorer menu bar, choose Tools >
Internet Options. 2. Under Appearance on the General tab, click Accessibility. If Internet Explorer 6 is used, the endpoint web interface responds to operations slowly. The records of the local address book cannot be exported. 3. In the Accessibility dialog box, deselect all options. 4. Click OK.
Install Microsoft Windows Script 5.7 (recommended).
Install the patches. The JavaScript engine of Internet Explorer 6 is not upgraded, or the required patches are not installed. The pop-up blocker is enabled on your browser.
If Internet Explorer is used: On the Internet Explorer menu bar, choose Tools > Pop-up Blocker > Turn Off Pop-up Blocker. If the Firefox is used: Choose Tools > Options. On the General tab, select Show the Downloads window when downloading a file. On the Privacy tab, select Accept cookies from sites. Then click OK to save the settings. Network Table 10-6 lists the troubleshooting methods for problems that may arise on the network. Table 10-6 Methods for troubleshooting common network problems Problem Possible Cause Solution Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Problem Possible Cause Solution 10 Troubleshooting When you attempt to use Telnet to access the endpoint, a message is displayed to indicate that the number of connections to the endpoint has reached the limit. Video Disconnect some Telnet connections. The number of connections to the endpoint has reached the maximum value. NOTE
A maximum of seven Telnet the and SSH connections endpoint is allowed. to
A maximum of three SSH connections to the endpoint is allowed. Table 10-7 lists the troubleshooting methods for video problems. Table 10-7 Methods for troubleshooting video problems Problem Possible Cause Solution While the endpoint is powered on and not in a conference, the display device does not display the remote controlled UI or the video of your site. While the endpoint is powered on and not in use during a conference, the display device displays the video of your site but cannot display the remote controlled UI. The display device is powered off. Power on the display device. The video channel of the display device is incorrect. Use the remote control to select the correct video channel. The video settings of the endpoint or display device are incorrect. For example, the brightness is set to 0. Retain the default values for the video parameters on the endpoint and display device. The video cable connection is not secure. Secure the video cable between the endpoint and display device. No display device is connected to the output port for the remote controlled UI or the connected display device is faulty. The output port for the remote controlled UI is not set or the output port you set for the remote control UI is not the port connected to the display device. The endpoint does not respond to remote control operations. Connect a display device to the output port for the remote controlled UI and verify the video settings on the display device. Choose Advanced > Settings >
Video > Common Settings >
Video Output. Set GUI to the output port connected to the display device. Telnet to the endpoint. If you fail to operate the endpoint, it is malfunctioning. In this case, restart the endpoint. If the problem persists, contact the local Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 10 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Solution While the endpoint is in use during a conference, the display device displays the video of your site but cannot display the video of any remote site. distributor for maintenance. A local or remote loopback test is being performed. Stop all local and remote loopback tests. Check the call statistics. If the value of Video bandwidth[frame rate] is 0, no video is sent from remote sites. If the remote video is displayed as a blue screen, the remote site is blocking its video by sending a blue screen. Contact the remote site administrator to resolve this problem. Contact the remote site administrator to resolve this problem. The video output port is set to display the video of your site. Set the video output port to display the video of a remote site.
Ensure that the mode adopted by the video output port and the cable in use match each other.
Verify that the cable is connected correctly. Replace the cable if necessary. Perform a local video loopback test. If the video quality is poor, faults occur in the local video module. In this case, send the endpoint to the local distributor for maintenance. Set the remote camera to automatic focus. If the conference rate is lower than 256 kbit/s, set the audio protocol to G.728 to reduce the bandwidth used for audio transmission. The video of your site is in black and white or flickers in black and white. The mode adopted by the video output port is set incorrectly. While the endpoint is in use during a conference, the video of a remote site is not clear. For example, there are artifacts, frozen images, or discontinuity in the video output. Faults occur in the local video module. The remote camera is set to focus on a close or distant scene. When the remote camera is not set to automatic focus and the scene captured by a remote camera changes, the captured video becomes unclear. Incorrect audio protocols are specified for conferences whose data transmission rates are lower than or equal to 256 kbit/s. To view the data transmission rate of a conference, access the Status screen. For example, if the conference rate is 256 kbit/s and the audio bandwidth is 64 kbit/s, the video bandwidth is Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 10 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Solution only 196 kbit/s. In this case, the video quality is poor. Only low video bandwidth is available for your site because the network is busy. The quality of a network connection device, such as an optical fiber transceiver, is poor. As a result, certain data is lost during transmission. Ask the remote site administrator to perform a local video loopback test. If the video quality is good, the video frame rate set at the remote site is too high. Do not initiate conferences during network busy hours. Replace the related network connection device. Ask the administrator of the remote site to disconnect from the conference, set the video frame rate to a smaller value, and join the conference again. The video settings of the endpoint are inappropriate. Retain the default values for the video parameters on the endpoint and display device. The video settings of the display device are inappropriate. Retain the default values for the video parameters on the endpoint and display device. The camera is faulty. The resolution of the remote computer exceeds the maximum resolution supported by the endpoint. Send the endpoint to the local distributor for maintenance. Ask the remote site administrator to change the resolution and refresh rate of the remote computer to those the endpoint supports. The local VGA display is not supported. Replace the local VGA display with a supported display. The presentation sharing function is not enabled at your site. Choose Advanced > Settings >
Conference > Advanced and select Presentation. While the endpoint is in use during a conference, the video of a remote site can be displayed continuously but the video quality is not satisfactory. While the endpoint is not in use during a conference, the video displayed on the display device is too bright or too dark. While the endpoint is in use during a conference and a remote site is sharing its computer desktop, the local VGA display cannot display the shared computer desktop. A computer is connected to the endpoint, but the local VGA display does not show the computer desktop. The capability of the VGA display is limited. The resolution or refresh rate of the local SXGA output is too high to be supported by the VGA display. Set the resolution and refresh rate of the local SXGA output to those the VGA display supports. The endpoint supports only certain combinations of Set the resolution and refresh rate of the computer used for the VGA Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 10 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Solution resolutions and refresh rates. The combination of the resolution and refresh rate set on the computer, however, is not supported by the endpoint. In this case, the local site cannot display or properly display the computer desktop. The presentation source is not set as the computer desktop. The dual screen function is not enabled. On the camera control screen, The camera you want to control is not selected. input to those the endpoint supports. Choose Advanced > Settings >
Video > Common Settings >
Video Input. Set Presentation Source to the input port connected to the computer desktop. Choose Advanced > Settings >
Video > Common Settings >
Video Output and set Presentation display to Enable. Access the camera control screen and select the camera you want to control. Camera settings are incorrect. Verify the camera settings. The remote control is disabled on the remote camera. Ask the remote site administrator to enable the remote camera control at the remote site. The camera settings are incorrect or the control cable of the camera is not securely connected. Ask the remote site administrator to verify the camera settings or securely connect the camera control cable.
,
, and navigation keys on the remote control cannot be used to control the camera. While the endpoint is in use during a conference and the display device displays the video of a remote site, after you press
,
, or navigation keys on the remote control, the video remains unchanged. That is, you cannot control the remote camera. Audio Table 10-8 lists the troubleshooting methods for audio problems. Table 10-8 Methods for troubleshooting audio problems Problem Possible Cause Solution Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 10 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Solution Current noise is generated when the endpoint's audio output ports are connected to audio devices, such as speakers, tuning consoles, and audio matrices. Disconnect the endpoint's audio output ports from the audio devices. Check whether the problem is rectified. If the problem persists, the current noise is caused by audio device or cable issues. If the problem is rectified, check the grounding status of the audio devices and endpoint. While the endpoint is in use during a conference, no audio is delivered from the local display device. Perform an audio test to check whether the problem occurs at your site or a remote site. If no audio is delivered from the display device during the audio test, the problem exists at your site. If audio is properly delivered from the display device during the audio test, the problem occurs at the remote site. Replace the cables or repair the audio devices.
If the audio devices' shells are grounded, the endpoint's shell must be grounded nearby. If the audio devices' shells are not grounded, the endpoint's shell does not need to be grounded either. Specifically, change the endpoint's AC three-core power supply to two-core power supply. If the chair site has muted the speaker of your site, contact the chair site to resolve this problem. If the display device volume is adjusted to the lowest, restore the volume to its default value. If the endpoint volume is adjusted to the lowest, restore the volume to its default value. If the audio cable is connected incorrectly or insecurely, reconnect the audio cable from the endpoint to the display device.
The microphone at the remote site has been muted or the chair site has muted this microphone. In this case, contact the chair site to resolve this problem.
No sound pickup device, such as a microphone, is connected to the audio input port. In this case, set the audio source again or connect a sound pickup device to the corresponding port.
The related sound pickup device is powered off. In this case, power on the device.
The audio cable is connected Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 10 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Solution insecurely. In this case, reconnect the audio cable to the endpoint. A loopback test is being performed at your site. Stop all local and remote loopback tests. While the endpoint is in use during a conference, only the sound from your site can be delivered from the display device and you cannot hear other sites. Conference Initiation Table 10-9 lists the troubleshooting methods for problems you may encounter during conference initiation. Table 10-9 Methods for troubleshooting common problems with conference initiation Problem Possible Cause Solution Your site and a remote site cannot call each other using site numbers. Your site or the remote site has not registered with a GK. A GK is responsible for translating site numbers into IP addresses. If either your site or the remote site does not register with a GK, the translation cannot be implemented, and your site cannot place a call to the remote site using the site number. If a remote site places a call to your site by site number, it will receive a message from the GK indicating that your site has not registered with the GK, and the call cannot be set up. The local or remote endpoint is not connected to an IP network. Verify GK registration settings and register your site and the remote site with a GK. 1. Verify that the endpoint is connected to an IP network. Specifically, the LAN indicator on the rear panel of the endpoint is steady green. 2. From the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced >
Diagnostics > Network Test. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 10 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Solution Enter the IP address of the remote site and start a Ping test. If the Ping test fails, a network error has occurred. In this case, contact the administrator. 3. From the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > IP. Verify IP network settings. 1. Verify that the endpoint is connected to an IP network. Specifically, the LAN indicator on the rear panel of the endpoint is steady green. 2. From the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced >
Diagnostics > Network Test. Enter the IP address of the remote site and start a Ping test. If the Ping test fails, a network error has occurred. In this case, contact the administrator. 3. From the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > IP. Verify IP network settings. Choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > Firewall and verify NAT settings. Choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > IP > H.323 at your site and the remote site, respectively. Then, disable GK functions. Your site cannot place a call to a remote site using the IP address of the remote site. The local or remote endpoint is not connected to an IP network. NAT settings are incorrect. Specifically, the local endpoint is on a private network while the remote endpoint is on a public or different private network. Check whether your endpoint can communicate with a public network. If the endpoint cannot, NAT settings are incorrect. The GK with which the local or remote endpoint registers does not support the function for placing calls using IP addresses. After the endpoint starts, it fails to register with the GK. The parameters (GK address, encryption password, and user name) used for GK registration are incorrect. On the endpoint web interface, choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > IP > H.323 and correct the settings. Another site with the same number as your site has Contact the videoconferencing system administrator to check Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 10 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Solution whether another site with the same number as your site has already registered with the GK. If such a site exists, change the user name of your site. 1. Verify that the endpoint is connected to an IP network. Specifically, the LAN indicator on the rear panel of the endpoint is steady green. 2. From the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced >
Diagnostics > Network Test. Enter the IP address of the remote site and start a Ping test. If the Ping test fails, a network error has occurred. In this case, contact the administrator. 3. From the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > IP. Verify IP network settings. Choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > Firewall and verify NAT settings. already registered with the GK. The endpoint is disconnected from an IP network. NAT settings are incorrect. Specifically, the local endpoint is on a private network while the GK is on a public network. Check whether your endpoint can communicate with a public network. If the endpoint cannot, NAT settings are incorrect. The GK listening port, such as port 1719, is restricted by the network firewall. Contact the videoconferencing system administrator to resolve this problem. A predefined conference fails to be initiated on the endpoint. The endpoint is disconnected from an IP network. 1. Verify that the endpoint is connected to an IP network. Specifically, the LAN indicator on the rear panel of the endpoint is steady green. 2. From the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced >
Diagnostics > Network Test. Enter the IP address of the remote site and start a Ping test. If the Ping test fails, a network error has occurred. In this case, contact the administrator. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 10 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Solution
Your site is set to pay for the conference but does not have sufficient account balance.
Another site is set to pay for the conference but does not have sufficient account balance, or account number or password entered is incorrect. Multiple conferences are currently being held while port resources on the videoconferencing system are insufficient. 3. From the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > IP. Verify IP network settings. Enter the correct account number and password and top up the related account. Wait until the resources are available. Alternatively, reduce the number of sites attending the conference and then add sites as required after the conference is held successfully. The SiteCall account for using the 4E1 lines is incorrect. Contact the videoconferencing system administrator to resolve this problem. Conference Control Table 10-10 lists the troubleshooting methods for common problems you may encounter during conference control. Table 10-10 Methods for troubleshooting conference control problems Problem Possible Cause Solution While the endpoint is in use during a conference, you cannot view the desired site. A site in the conference is being broadcast, and all the sites must view that site except the chair site and broadcast site. A site is having the floor, and non-chair sites cannot view other sites. The chair site has enabled the Voice Activation function. No video is sent from the site you want to view. Ask the chair site to stop site broadcast. Ask the chair site to enable the discussion function. Ask the chair site to disable the Voice Activation function. Ask the related site administrator to troubleshoot the site video. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 10 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Solution The View Site function is restricted on the RM or the SMC. Contact the videoconferencing system administrator to resolve this problem. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 11 Technical Specifications 11 Technical Specifications About This Chapter This chapter describes the product specifications, external ports, system performance and capacity, and standards compliance. 11.1 Physical Specifications 11.2 Performance and Capacity 11.3 Ports and Protocols 11.4 Standards Compliance 11.1 Physical Specifications Table 11-1 Physical specifications Item Specifications Electricity supply requirements Operating voltage and frequency Maximum power consumption 100 V AC240 V AC; 50 Hz60 Hz;
TE60: 150W
TE50: 60W
TE40: 60W Working state environment requirements Ambient temperature 0C to 40C (32F to 104F) Relative humidity 10% to 80%
Ambient noise
< 46 dBA SPL Minimum illuminance 7lux Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 11 Technical Specifications Item Specifications Recommended illuminance
> 300 lux Non-working state environment requirements Ambient temperature 40C to +85C Relative humidity 0% to 95%
Physical specifications Codec dimensions (H x W x D) 72.5 mm x 435 mm x 265.5 mm (2.85 in. x 17.13 in. x 10.45 in) Weight
TE60: 4.6 kg (net weight)
TE50: 4.1 kg (net weight)
TE40: 3.9 kg (net weight) 11.2 Performance and Capacity Table 11-2 lists the endpoint performance and capacity specifications. Table 11-2 Performance and capacity Item Specifications Call bandwidth
(IP) Call bandwidth
(4E1, only TE60) 64 kbit/s-8 Mbit/s 64 kbit/s-8 Mbit/s Video resolution
1080p60 with a minimum bandwidth of 1 Mbit/s (optional)
1080p30 with a minimum bandwidth of 512 kbit/s (only TE40 is optional)
720p60 with a minimum bandwidth of 512 kbit/s (only TE40 is optional)
720p30 with a minimum bandwidth of 384 kbit/s
4SIF/4CIF with a minimum bandwidth of 128 kbit/s
SIF/CIF with a minimum bandwidth of 64 kbit/s
SQSIF/SQCIF/QSIF/QCIF with a minimum bandwidth of 64 kbit/s Presentation resolution
Input: 1920 x 1200 60fps, 1080p 60fps, 1680 x 1050 60fps, 1600 x 1200 60fps, 1600 x 900 60fps, 1400 x 1050 60fps, 1440 x 900 60fps, 1366 x 768 60fps, 1360 x 768 60fps, 1280 x 1024 60/75/85fps, 1280 x 960 60/75/85fps, 1280 x 800 60/75/85fps, Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Item Specifications 11 Technical Specifications 1280 x 768 60/75/85fps, 1280 x 600 60fps, 1152 x 864 60/75/85fps, 720p 60/75/85fps, 1024 x 768 60/70/75/85fps, 800 x 600 56/60/72/75/85fps, 640 x 480 60/72/75/85fps
Output: 1600 x 1200, 1920 x 1200, 1920 x 1080, 1280 x 1024, 1280 x 720, 1024 x 768, 800 x 600
Coding/Decoding resolution: 1600 x 1200, 1920 x 1200, 1920 x 1080, 1280 x 1024, 1280 x 720, 1024 x 768, 800 x 600, 4CIF, CIF Other video features
dual 1080p60
Video Motion Enhancement
VideoIntensifier
ViewProcessing
Super Error Concealment Audio features AEC, ANS, AGC, VoiceClear, AudioEnhancer, and lip synchronization Built-in MCU capability
TE40: six 720p30 video sites and three audio-only sites
TE50: six 720p30 video sites and three audio-only sites
TE60: nine 720p30 video sites and three audio-only sites 11.3 Ports and Protocols Table 11-3 Ports on the TE60 Remarks HD-VI port for VPC600/VPC620 Port Video input Description and Quantity Standards and Protocols Compliance
1 x HDMI/DVI DVI1.0 VESA
(audio input supported)
2 x DVI-I (HDMI, VGA, and YPbPr supported with conversion cables)
2 x HD-VI/DVI
1 x CVBS/S-VIDEO
(converted from a DVI-I port)
1 x DisplayPort
1 x 3G-SDI Video
2 x HDMI/DVI DVI1.0 VESA
-
(audio output Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Port Description and Quantity output supported) Standards and Protocols Compliance
2 x DVI-I (HDMI, VGA, and YPbPr supported with conversion cables)
1 x CVBS/S-VIDEO
(converted from a DVI-I port)
1 x 3G-SDI
1 x XLR
2 x RCA
1 x HDMI
1 x HD-AI
1 x DisplayPort Audio input Audio output
4 x RCA
2 x HDMI
2 x DVI-I (with the use of a DVI-HDMI cable)
-
-
USB port 2 x USB 2.0 USB 2.0 Network port
2 x 10/100/1000M
-
LAN
1 x Wi-Fi (built-in)
1 x 4E1 (optional)
1 x PSTN 11 Technical Specifications Remarks
-
-
-
Currently, the PSTN port can be used in China only.
-
NEC
-
-
Serial port 2 x RS232 Infrared remote control port Infrared signal reception Table 11-4 Ports on the TE50 Port Video input Description and Quantity Standards and Protocols Compliance Remarks
1 x HD-VI/DVI
DVI1.0 VESA
1 x HDMI/DVI
HDMI 1.3 HD-VI port for VPC600/VPC620
(audio inpu t Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Port Description and Quantity Standards and Protocols Compliance supported)
1 x VGA/YPbPr
1 x 3G-SDI
1 x CVBS 11 Technical Specifications Remarks
2 x HDMI/DVI DVI1.0 VESA
-
Video output Audio input Audio output
(audio output supported)
1 x VGA/YPbPr
1 x 3G-SDI
1 x CVBS
1 x XLR
2 x RCA
1 x HDMI
1 x HD-AI
1 x 3.5mm
4 x RCA
2 x HDMI
-
-
USB port 2 x USB 2.0 USB 2.0 Network port
2 x 10/100/1000M
-
LAN
1 x Wi-Fi (built-in)
1 x PSTN
-
-
-
Currently, the PSTN port can be used in China only.
-
NEC
-
-
Serial port 2 x RS232 Infrared remote control port Infrared signal reception Table 11-5 Ports on the TE40 Port Video input Description and Quantity Standards and Protocols Compliance Remarks
1 x HD-VI/DVI
DVI1.0 VESA
1 x HDMI/DVI
HDMI 1.3 HD-VI port for VPC600/VPC620
(audio input supported)
1 x VGA/YPbPr Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Port Video output Audio input Audio output Description and Quantity Standards and Protocols Compliance
2 x HDMI/DVI DVI1.0 VESA
(audio output supported)
1 x VGA/YPbPr
1 x XLR
2 x RCA
1 x HDMI
1 x HD-AI
4 x RCA
2 x HDMI
-
-
USB port 2 x USB 2.0 USB 2.0 Network port
2 x 10/100/1000M
-
LAN
1 x Wi-Fi (built-in)
1 x PSTN Serial port 2 x RS232 COM
-
Infrared remote control port Infrared signal reception NEC 11 Technical Specifications Remarks
-
-
-
-
Currently, the PSTN port can be used in China only.
-
-
11.4 Standards Compliance Table 11-6 lists the standards that the endpoint complies with. Table 11-6 Standards compliance Item Specifications Video encoding and decoding protocols H.264 SVC, H.264 HP, H.264 BP, H.263, and H.263+
Video encoding and decoding protocols AAC-LD, G.711A, G.711U, G.719, G.722, G.728, G.729A, HWA-LD, G.722.1, and G.722.1C Multimedia frame protocols ITU-T H.323 and IETF SIP Dual-stream standard ITU-T H.239 and BFCP Network transmission TCP/IP, RTP, RTCPFTP, DHCP, SNMP, Telnet, HTTP, SSH, HTTPS, PPPoE, and SNTP Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 11 Technical Specifications Item protocols Other communications protocols Specifications H.225, H.235, H.241, H.245, H.281, H.350, H.460, T.140 IP protocol IPv4/IPv6 dual stack Protocol for signaling and media stream encryption H.323 remote camera control H.235; TLS, SRTP H.281 and H.224 Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide A E1 and T1 Grounding Criteria A E1 and T1 Grounding Criteria Read the following grounding criteria carefully and comply with the relevant requirements during the installation of the endpoint. The grounding design of the telecom office (station) follows the principle of equalized voltage. That is, the work grounding and the protection grounding (including the shielded grounding and the surge protection grounding of the distribution frame) share a set of grounding conductors. When the E1 cable of the cabinet is over 7.5 m and the T1 cable of the cabinet is over 10 m, a shielded cable and a shielded connector should be used and grounded. When the E1 interface is connected to other devices using coaxial cables, the external shield layers at the transmitting endpoint and receiving endpoint should be connected to the protection ground at the same time. The dual in-line package (DIP) switch offers the possible disconnection function at the receiving end. Copper-core materials instead of aluminum materials should be used for the ground cable. The plastic insulated copper wires with yellow and green insulation color should be used for the protective ground cable. The protective ground cable should not exceed 30 m, and the shorter the better. When the protective ground cable exceeds 30 m, the ground bar should be rearranged. In a balanced circuit, the joint of the E1 (T1) cable and the connector should be grounded using the external shield layer (the grounding conductor) or an additional wire to ensure normal reception and transmission in each E1 (T1) channel. In an unbalanced circuit, the metal braid shield layer of the cable should be seamlessly connected to the coaxial connector. When the E1 cable exceeds 30 m and the T1 cable exceeds 40 m, use the multi-point grounding mode. In addition, connect the E1 cable to the ground at every 15 m and the T1 cable to the ground at every 20 m. When the E1 or T1 cable is extended out of the office (station), the E1 or T1 cable should go through the main distribution frame (MDF) attached with the security unit. The shield layer of the E1 or T1 cable should be firmly connected to the protection ground of the MDF. The security unit on the MDF should have the overvoltage protection, overcurrent protection, and failure alarm functions. The maintenance personnel should check the equipment periodically and replace the ineffective protection unit in time. For questions about grounding the device, contact the device provider for technical support. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide B Menu Structure of the Remote Controlled UI B Menu Structure of the Remote Controlled UI This section describes the structure of the menus, which helps users to quickly identify each function item. The Advanced tab on the menu screen is the interface to all the function configuration items of the endpoint. Figure B-1 shows the menu structure. Figure B-1 Menu structure Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide B Menu Structure of the Remote Controlled UI Only the TE60 supports 4E1 functions. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide C Requirements on Room Layout and Lighting C Requirements on Room Layout and Lighting When using the endpoint, pay attention to your sitting posture to avoid problems associated with your back. Do not stare at the monitor screen for a long time. This may harm your eyes or blur your vision. Layout Precautions
Ensure that there are no large or moving objects behind you. Otherwise, the video cannot be viewed clearly.
Do not use striped patterns as the background.
Do not hold a conference in a room that generates a lot of echoing.
Do not place the endpoint near a sound source. Lighting Precautions To ensure high video quality, do not turn the lens towards bright lights. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide D Status Icons D Status Icons The icons provided on the user interface indicate the status and settings of the system. The icons help show the system status and perform operations as required. Table D-1 lists the icons that will appear on the lower-right corner of the call screen and indicate the current network status. Before initiating a conference, check the status of these icons. Table D-1 Network status icons Icon Name Indicates... SIP registration failure The endpoint fails to be registered with the SIP server. GK registration failure Network disconnection DNS resolution failure Wi-Fi connection status The endpoint fails to register with the gatekeeper after the gatekeeper is enabled. The endpoint is disconnected from an IP network. The network cable may be disconnected. After the DNS server is enabled and domain names are adopted as SIP server or GK server addresses, the DNS server fails to resolve the domain names. The first icon indicates that the Wi-Fi network has disconnected after the Wi-Fi client is enabled. The other icon indicates the signal status of a connected Wi-Fi network. When you view a video, the icons listed in Table D-2 are used to indicate the status of certain operations. During a conference, pay attention to the status of these icons to ensure that the relevant operations are performed correctly. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Table D-2 Operating status icons Icon Name Indicates... D Status Icons Microphone status Speaker status The status of the microphone of the local site when displayed on the lower right corner of the screen. In this case, the microphone is a physical device used at the local site. When one of these icons is displayed in other positions of the screen, it indicates the microphone status of a remote site in a conference. The status of the speaker of the local site when displayed on the lower right corner of the screen. When one of these icons is displayed in other positions of the screen, it indicates the speaker status of a remote site in a conference. Encrypted conference The current conference is an encrypted conference (with media streams encrypted). Chair The local site is the chair site. Remote site A remote site is currently being viewed. Local site The local site is currently being viewed. Presentation sharing A presentation is currently being shared. Local site broadcast The local site is being broadcast in the current conference. Do Not Disturb The Do Not Disturb function is enabled at the local site. Hide Video The local video is hidden during a conference. You can use this function to prevent the local video from being seen by remote sites. After this function is enabled, the local site is displayed as a blue screen at remote sites. Camera control (up and down) The camera lens is turned upward or downward. Camera control (left and right) The camera lens is turned leftward or rightward. Camera control
(zooming) The video input from the camera is shrank or enlarged. Poor network condition Network impairments or packet loss occurs in the network where the endpoint is located. see 9.4.1 Customizing Onscreen Status Icons. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Icon Name Indicates... D Status Icons Video monitoring A remote site is recording or taking photos of the conference from the endpoint web interface. Recording The current conference is being recorded. Connected to a VPM220W The endpoint is connected to a VPM220W. The first icon indicates that the VPM220W has insufficient battery while the other icon indicates a sufficient battery. Remote site muted The remote site is muted, and the local site cannot hear the remote site. Local site's speaker muted by the chair site Local site's microphone muted by the chair site The chair site mutes the local site's speaker so the local site cannot hear other sites. The chair site mutes the local site's microphone so other sites cannot hear the local site. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide E Default Settings E Default Settings To better use the endpoint, get to know the default values of common user names and passwords. Table E-1 lists the default user names and passwords for the endpoint. Table E-1 Default user names and passwords Item Administrator password for the remote controlled UI Administrator user name and password for the endpoint web interface Default Setting 12345678 The default user name and password are admin and Change_Me respectively. Upgrade password Change_Me Air content sharing password Change_Me User name and password for connecting the touch panel to the endpoint User name and password for logging in to the endpoint in Telnet mode The default user name and password are api and Change_Me respectively.
Debug user: The default user name and password are debug and Change_Me respectively.
Administrator: The default user name and password are admin and Change_Me respectively.
Common user: The default user name and password are user and Change_Me respectively.
Test user: The default user name and password are test and Change_Me respectively.
Touch panel user: The default user name and password are apiuser and Change_Me respectively. User name and password for logging The default user name and password are root and Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide E Default Settings Item in to the endpoint in serial port mode Default Setting Change_Me respectively. Default IP address after the endpoint is restored to its default settings 192.168.1.1 Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide F Glossary F Glossary Numerics 2 x Common Intermediate Format
(2CIF) 2 x Source Input Format (2SIF) A video format with a resolution of 352 x 576 pixels and using progressive scanning. A video format with a resolution of 352 480 pixels and using progressive scanning. 2CIF 2SIF 3G 3GPP See 2 x Common Intermediate Format. See 2 x Source Input Format. See 3rd Generation. 3rd Generation Partnership Project 3rd Generation (3G) The third generation of digital wireless technology, as defined by the International Telecommunications Union (ITU). Third generation technology is expected to deliver data transmission speeds between 144 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s, compared to the 9.6 kbit/s to 19.2 kbit/s offered by second generation technology. 4 x Common Intermediate Format
(4CIF) 4 x Source Input Format (4SIF) A video resolution of 704 x 576 pixels. A video format with a resolution of 704 480 pixels and using progressive scanning. 4CIF 4SIF A AAC AEC AES AGC See 4 x Common Intermediate Format. See 4 x Source Input Format. advanced audio coding See acoustic echo cancellation. See Advanced Encryption Standard. automatic gain control Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide API ASCII See application programming interface. American Standard Code for Information Interchange F Glossary Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) acoustic echo cancellation (AEC) application programming interface (API) B BSP balanced circuit built-in MCU C CAS CCS CIF A specification for the encryption of electronic data established by the U.S. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). It supersedes the Data Encryption Standard (DES). AES adopts a symmetric-key algorithm for both encrypting and decrypting the data, where the block size is 128 bits and the key size is 128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits. A type of signal processing commonly used in teleconferencing. The speech from the far-end caller is broadcast by the speakerphone or the hands-free cellular phone and then repeats itself by bouncing off the inside surfaces of a room or car. This repetition of sound is called an echo. Echoes are picked up by the near-end microphone, creating a feedback loop where the far-end caller hears an echo of his or her own voice. AEC is developed to solve this problem. An application programming interface is a particular set of rules and specifications that are used for communication between software programs. board support package A circuit using two lines carrying equal but opposite signals. A built-in unit of an endpoint, by using the built-in MCU, the endpoint can hold a multipoint conference that supports multiple functions, such as site access, video exchange, audio mixing, data processing, and signaling interaction. See channel associated signaling. See Common Channel Signaling. Common Intermediate Format Common Channel Signaling (CCS) A signaling system used in telephone networks that separates signaling information from user data. A specified channel is exclusively designated to carry signaling information for all other channels in the system. camera certificate A device for recording visual images in the form of photographs, movie film, or video signals. The certificate, also called the digital certificate, establishes the association between the user identity and user public key. The certificate is issued by the third-party authority, and provides identity authentication for the communications parties. chair site A site that has chair control rights. channel associated signaling (CAS) A signaling system in which signaling information is transmitted within a dedicated voice channel. China Signaling System No. 1 is a type of CAS signaling. conference An IP multimedia session that have two or more participants. Each conference has a Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide focus and can be identified uniquely. F Glossary conference service number The number defined in conference settings on an MCU. On a video terminal, users can dial this number to join an ongoing conference to which the terminal has been added as a participant. configuration file A file that contains machine-readable operating specifications for a piece of hardware or software or that contains information on another file or on a specific user, such as the user's login ID. congestion Extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreased network service efficiency. See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. distinguished name See domain name server. D DHCP DN DNS DNS server A device that can provide domain name resolution for the client on the network DSCP DVI DVI-I See differentiated services code point. digital visual interface digital visual interface-integrated Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) A client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting information the host requires to participate on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocating IP addresses to hosts. default settings Parameter settings of a device when the device is delivered from a factory. differentiated services code point (DSCP) According to the QoS classification standard of the Differentiated Service
(Diff-Serv), the type of services (ToS) field in the IP header consists of six most significant bits and two currently unused bits, which are used to form codes for priority marking. Differentiated services code point (DSCP) is the six most important bits in the ToS. It is the combination of IP precedence and types of service. The DSCP value is used to ensure that routers supporting only IP precedence can be used because the DSCP value is compatible with IP precedence. Each DSCP maps a per-hop behavior (PHB). Therefore, terminal devices can identify traffic using the DSCP value. digital network A telecommunication network where information is first converted into distinct electronic pulses and then transmitted to a digital bit stream. domain name server
(DNS) A functional entity in the TCP/IP network. With deployment of the DNS, subscribers can access related servers using corresponding domain names. In the TCP/IP network, a domain name maps an IP address. Domain names are easier to remember but servers in the network communicate with each other using IP addresses. Therefore the DNS is used to convert domain names to corresponding IP addresses. download dual stream To obtain data from an upper-layer device or the server. During a conference, two channels of video streams can be sent or received simultaneously. One channel is used for transmitting video (such as the video Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide F Glossary captured by a camera) and the other channel is used for transmitting presentation
(such as a computer desktop). These two channels of videos can be displayed on two monitors. E E1 ESN electronic serial number (ESN) encryption eye contact F FTP FTPS An European standard for high-speed data transmission at 2.048 Mbit/s. It provides thirty-two 64 kbit/s channels. A time division multiplexing frame is divided in to 32 timeslots numbered from 0 to 31. Timeslot 0 is reserved for frame synchronization, and timeslot 16 is reserved for signaling transmission. The rest 30 timeslots are use as speech channels. Each timeslot sends or receives an 8-bit data per second. Each frame sends or receives 256-bit data per second. 8000 frames will be sent or received per second. Therefore the line data rate is 2.048 Mbit/s. See electronic serial number. A 32-bit number assigned by the mobile station manufacturer, uniquely identifying the mobile station equipment. A function used to transform data so as to hide its information content to prevent it's unauthorized use. A meeting of the eyes between remote and local participants. File Transfer Protocol See File Transfer Protocol over SSL. File Transfer Protocol over SSL (FTPS) An extension to the commonly used File Transfer Protocol (FTP) that adds support for the Transport Layer Security (TLS) and the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) cryptographic protocols. firewall G G.711 G.722 G.728 GMT GUI A combination of a series of components set between different networks or network security domains. By monitoring, limiting, and changing the data traffic across the firewall, it masks the interior information, structure and running state of the network as much as possible to protect the network security. Audio codec standard (A-law or U-law) that uses pulse code modulation (PCM). Its data rate is 64 kbit/s. Audio codec standard that uses adaptive differential pulse-code modulation
(ADPCM). Its data rate is 48 kbit/s, 56 kbit/s, or 64 kbit/s. Audio codec standard that uses low-delay code excited linear prediction (LD-CELP). Its data rate is 16 kbit/s. Greenwich Mean Time graphical user interface Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide F Glossary gatekeeper An H.323 entity on the LAN that provides address translation and control access to the LAN for H.323 terminals and gateways. The gatekeeper can provide other services to the H.323 terminals and gateways, such as bandwidth management and locating gateways. gateway A device that connects two network segments using different protocols. It is used to translate the data in the two network segments. gateway IP address The IP address of a gateway. A gateway is a node that forwards packets between networks. Packets are sent to the gateway IP address when the destination network address resides in a different network to the sender. A standard recommended by ITU-T. It enables a video conference to have simultaneous transmission of both video and data content (for example, computer desktop). A video codec standard for video conferences at px64 kbit/s. Two formats are available, including CIF and QCIF. A video codec standard for video conferences at low rates. Five formats are available, SQCIF, QCIF, CIF, 4CIF, and 16CIF. Compared with H.263, H.264 can provide the same-quality video at half of the bit rate, with strong error resilience characteristics. high definition high definition multimedia interface Hypertext Markup Language See Hypertext Transfer Protocol. See Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure. H H.239 H.261 H.263 H.264 HD HDMI HTML HTTP HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) An application-layer protocol used for communications between web servers and browsers or other programs. HTTP adopts the request-response mode. A client sends a request to the server. The request consists of two parts: request header and MIME-like message. The request header contains request method, uniform resource locator (URL), and protocol version. The MIME-like message contains request modifiers, client information, and possible body content. Upon receiving the request, the server responds with a status line. The status line includes the message's protocol version, a success or error code, and a MIME-like message, which contains server information, entity meta-information, and possible entity-body content. For details about HTTP, see RFC2616. Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure
(HTTPS) An HTTP protocol that runs on top of transport layer security (TLS) and Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). It is used to establish a reliable channel for encrypted communication and secure identification of a network web server. For details, see RFC2818. I Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide F Glossary ID IETF IMS IP address IPv4 IPv6 ISDN ITU-T IVR Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) See identity. Internet Engineering Task Force IP multimedia subsystem A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host connected to the Internet. An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal values of its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of the IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identifies the host itself. See Internet Protocol version 4. See Internet Protocol version 6. integrated services digital network International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector See interactive voice response. The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to 255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers together are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host within the network or subnetwork. Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task Force
(IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of the Internet Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits. identity (ID) The collective aspect of the set of characteristics by which a thing is definitively recognizable or known. initiate a multipoint conference To initiate a multipoint conference by making calls from the video terminal or by using the Multipoint Control Unit (MCU) or the resource manager of the videoconferencing system. A multipoint conference contains at least two sites. interactive voice response (IVR) A telephone-based value-added voice service. Telephone users can dial a number specified by a carrier, and then follow the instructions to listen to, demand, and send voice information as required, or participate in interactive services, such as chats and making friends. See local area network. liquid crystal display See Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. light emitting diode L LAN LCD LDAP LED Lightweight Directory Access Protocol A network protocol based on TCP/IP, which allows access to a directory system agent (DSA). It involves some reduced functionality from X.500 Directory Access Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide F Glossary
(LDAP) license license file Protocol (DAP) specifications. A permission that the vendor provides for the user with a specific function, capacity, and duration of a product. A license can be a file or a serial number. Usually the license consists of encrypted codes. The operation authority granted varies with the level of the license. The license file is an authorization for the capacity, functions, and validity period of the installed software. The license file is a .dat file that is generated using the special encryption tool according to the contract, and is delivered electronically. The customer needs to load the license on the device or software before the functions supported by the license are applicable. local area network
(LAN) A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building, featuring high speed and low error rate. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and run at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s). local time Display time of a local computer, which varies according to the time zone. loopback test The terminal can transmit audio or video data on a channel to simulate the actual application and test whether the output is satisfactory. A user can perform a local loopback test to check the local network connection or a remote loopback test to check the remote network connection. If a remote loopback test is performed, data is transmitted from the local site to a remote site, and then back to the local site. M MAC address A link layer address or physical address. It is six bytes long. MCU MD5 MTU maximum transmission unit
(MTU) message digest algorithm 5 (MD5) See multipoint control unit. See message digest algorithm 5. See maximum transmission unit. The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies, depending on the network576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbit/s token ring. Responsibility for determining the size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks involved. A hash function that is used in a variety of security applications to check message integrity. MD5 processes a variable-length message into a fixed-length output of 128 bits. It breaks up an input message into 512-bit blocks (sixteen 32-bit little-endian integers). After a series of processing, the output consists of four 32-bit words, which are then cascaded into a 128-bit hash number. multipoint call A site makes calls to multiple sites, to hold a conference that has multiple participants. multipoint control unit (MCU) Data connection equipment used in a videoconferencing system. An MCU is used for terminal access, video exchange, audio mixing, data processing, and signaling exchange. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide See Network Address Translation. Network Time Protocol N NAT NTP F Glossary Network Address Translation (NAT) network layer O optical fiber P PIP PPPoE PSTN PiP An IETF standard that allows an organization to present itself to the Internet with far fewer IP addresses than there are nodes on its internal network. The NAT technology, which is implemented in a router, firewall or PC, converts private IP addresses (such as in the 192.168.0.0 range) of the machine on the internal private network to one or more public IP addresses for the Internet. It changes the packet headers to the new address and keeps track of them via internal tables that it builds. When packets come back from the Internet, NAT uses the tables to perform the reverse conversion to the IP address of the client machine. Layer 3 of the seven-layer OSI model of computer networking. The network layer provides routing and addressing so that two terminal systems are interconnected. In addition, the network layer provides congestion control and traffic control. In the TCP/IP protocol suite, the functions of the network layer are specified and implemented by IP protocols. Therefore, the network layer is also called IP layer. A thin filament of glass or other transparent material, through which a signal-encoded light beam may be transmitted using total internal reflection. See Picture in Picture. Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet See public switched telephone network. Picture in Picture Picture in Picture
(PIP) The Picture in Picture (PIP) service enables users to view an additional video in an overlay window. password ping A sequence of characters used to prove one's identity. It is used during a login process and should be highly protected. A method used to test whether a device in the IP network is reachable according to the sent ICMP Echo messages and received response messages. point-to-point call A site makes a call to another site, to hold a conference that has two participants. presentation During a conference, the local site shares the content input from a computer with remote sites, such as an excel file, a diagram, or slides. public switched telephone network
(PSTN) A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public subscribers. Sometimes it is called POTS. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide F Glossary Q QoS quality of service
(QoS) R RAS RS232 RS422 RSE RTCP RTP See quality of service. A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of users. See Registration Admission and Status. See Recommended Standard 232. The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and others are the same as RS232. Recording & Streaming Engine See Real-Time Transport Control Protocol. real-time performance Real-Time Transport Control Protocol
(RTCP) A protocol used to monitor data delivery. RTCP enables the receiver to detect if there is any packet loss and to compensate for any delay jitter. Recommended Standard 232 (RS232) A standard that defines the electrical characteristics, timing, and meaning of signals, and the physical size and pinout of connectors. Registration Admission and Status
(RAS) A signaling set used for the connection between an H.323 gatekeeper and endpoints, and endpoint management. route S SD SDI SHA SIF SIP SMC SNMP The path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. Routes can change dynamically. See standard definition. See serial digital interface. See secure hash algorithm. Source Input Format Session Initiation Protocol service management center See Simple Network Management Protocol. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide F Glossary SNTP SPL SRTP SSH SSID SSL SVGA Secure Real-time Transport Protocol
(SRTP) Secure Shell (SSH) See Simple Network Time Protocol. sound pressure level See Secure Real-time Transport Protocol. See Secure Shell. service set identifier See Secure Sockets Layer. Super Video Graphics Array A real time transport protocol with enhanced security and encryption mechanism-based RTP. A set of standards and an associated network protocol that allows establishing a secure channel between a local and a remote computer. A feature to protect information and provide powerful authentication function for a network when a user logs in to the network through an insecure network. It prevents IP addresses from being deceived and simple passwords from being captured. Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL) A security protocol that works at a socket level. This layer exists between the TCP layer and the application layer to encrypt/decode data and authenticate concerned entities. Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block. Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) A protocol that is adapted from the Network Time Protocol (NTP) and synchronizes the clocks of computers over the Internet. secure hash algorithm
(SHA) A technique that computes a 160-bit condensed representation of a message or data file, called a message digest. The SHA is used by the sender and the receiver of a message in computing and verifying a digital signature, for security purposes. security Protection of a computer system and its data from harm or loss. A major focus of computer security, especially on systems accessed by many people or through communication lines, is preventing system access by unauthorized individuals. serial digital interface
(SDI) serial port An interface that transmits data in a single channel in sequence. An input/output location (channel) that sends and receives data to and from a computer's CPU or a communications device one bit at a time. Serial ports are used for serial data communication and as interfaces with some peripheral devices, such as mice and printers. site A group of IP systems with IP connectivity, which can be achieved independent of SP networks. sleep mode A mode that the telepresence system enters if no operation is performed on the touch Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide F Glossary standard definition
(SD) subnet mask panel for a preset period of time. A video format with the resolution below 720p. The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the device and is matched with the IP address. T T1 TCP TCP/IP TKIP TLS Telnet Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) time zone touch panel A North American standard for high-speed data transmission at 1.544Mbps. It provides 24 x 64 kbit/s channels. See Transmission Control Protocol. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol Temporary Key Integrity Protocol Transport Layer Security A standard terminal emulation protocol in the TCP/IP protocol stack. Telnet allows users to log in to remote systems and use resources as if they were connected to a local system. Telnet is defined in RFC 854. The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent using Internet Protocol (IP), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model. A division of the earth's surface, usually extending across 15 of longitude devised such that the standard time is the time at a meridian at the center of the zone. The touch panel is connected to the telepresence system wirelessly. Without cable restriction, users can use the touch panel conveniently. From the touch panel, users can perform operations, such as dialing a number, calling a contact, answering or rejecting a call, controlling a conference, and switching the display mode. See User Datagram Protocol. user interface See uniform resource identifier. See uniform resource locator. See Universal Serial Bus. Coordinated Universal Time U UDP UI URI URL USB UTC Universal Serial Bus
(USB) A serial bus standard to interface devices. It was designed for computers such as PCs and the Apple Macintosh, but its popularity has prompted it to also become commonplace on video game consoles and PDAs. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide F Glossary User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uniform resource identifier (URI) uniform resource locator (URL) A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. UDP uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. That is, UDP messages may be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. The destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is received. A uniform resource identifier (URI) is a member of this universal set of names in registered namespaces and addresses referring to registered protocols or namespaces. URI is used to locate available resources on the Web, including HTML documents, images, video clips, and programs. An address that uniquely identifies a location on the Internet. A URL is usually preceded by http://, as in http://www.microsoft.com. A URL can contain more details, such as the name of a hypertext page, often with the file name extension .html or .htm. video graphics array virtual local area network See Voice over Internet Protocol. V VGA VLAN VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) A value-added service technology for IP calls. The VoIP service is a new IP telecom service. It can run on fixed and mobile networks and support flexible access points. Fees for VoIP subscribers are relatively low. Calls between VoIP subscribers who belong to the same carrier are free of charge. wide area network See wireless local area network. See Wi-Fi Protected Access. W WAN WLAN WPA WPA-PSK Wi-Fi protected access pre-shared key Wi-Fi See Wireless Fidelity. Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) A wireless security protocol replacing WEP and aiming to provide more powerful security performance for the IEEE 802.11 WLAN. WPA is a subset of IEEE 802.11i, whose core is IEEE 802.1x and TKIP. Wireless Fidelity
(Wi-Fi) A short-distant wireless transmission technology. It enables wireless access to the Internet within a range of hundreds of feet wide. wireless local area network (WLAN) A hybrid of the computer network and the wireless communication technology. It uses wireless multiple address channels as transmission media and carriers out data interaction through electromagnetic wave to implement the functions of the traditional LAN. Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide X XGA Extended Graphics Array F Glossary Issue 01 (2014-12-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1 2 | Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.23 MiB |
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint V100R001C01 Administrator Guide Issue Date 01 2013-09-30 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website:
http://enterprise.huawei.com Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide About This Document About This Document Before you use the product, refer to the product vendor for version mapping information and to confirm compatibility with other videoconferencing equipment. This document describes how to install, configure, maintain, and troubleshoot the HUAWEI TE40 Videoconferencing Endpoint (TE40 or endpoint for short), HUAWEI TE50 Videoconferencing Endpoint (TE50 or endpoint for short) and HUAWEI TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint (TE60 or endpoint for short). It also provides step-by-step instructions on conferencing tasks. Intended Audience This document is intended for but not limited to endpoint administrators. An endpoint administrator has access to all functions on the endpoint web interface and remote controlled user interface (UI). Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Change History About This Document Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the changes made in earlier issues. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) This issue is the first official release. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Contents Contents About This Document .................................................................................................................... ii 1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 1 1.1 Definition of an Endpoint Administrator ...................................................................................................................... 2 1.2 Requirements for an Endpoint Administrator ............................................................................................................... 2 1.3 Related Documentation................................................................................................................................................. 3 1.4 Safety Precautions ........................................................................................................................................................ 4 1.5 How to Obtain Help .................................................................................................................................................... 10 2 Basic Configuration and Verification ..................................................................................... 11 2.1 Powering On or Off the Endpoint ............................................................................................................................... 11 2.2 Using the Wizard ........................................................................................................................................................ 13 2.3 Verifying the Basic Configuration .............................................................................................................................. 14 2.3.1 Call Test ................................................................................................................................................................... 14 2.3.2 Sound Test ............................................................................................................................................................... 15 2.3.3 Image Test ................................................................................................................................................................ 15 2.4 Power Management .................................................................................................................................................... 16 3 Network ........................................................................................................................................ 19 3.1 Connecting to an IP LAN Network ............................................................................................................................. 19 3.1.1 Checking Status Indicators of the LAN Port............................................................................................................ 19 3.1.2 Setting IP Parameters ............................................................................................................................................... 20 3.1.3 Setting H.323 Parameters ........................................................................................................................................ 23 3.1.4 Setting SIP Parameters ............................................................................................................................................. 25 3.1.5 Setting Wi-Fi Parameters ......................................................................................................................................... 28 3.2 Connecting to a 4E1 Network ..................................................................................................................................... 31 3.2.1 Inserting a 4E1 Interface Card ................................................................................................................................. 32 3.2.2 Checking Status Indicators on the 4E1 Ports ........................................................................................................... 33 3.2.3 Setting 4E1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................................ 34 4 Display Device and Camera ...................................................................................................... 36 4.1 Connecting a Display Device ..................................................................................................................................... 36 4.2 Configuring a Display Device .................................................................................................................................... 40 4.2.1 Configuring Video Output ....................................................................................................................................... 40 4.2.2 Adjusting the Picture Offset ..................................................................................................................................... 47 Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Contents 4.2.3 Adjusting the Sampling Phase ................................................................................................................................. 47 4.2.4 Setting Video Parameters ......................................................................................................................................... 48 4.2.5 Switching Between Screen Layouts ......................................................................................................................... 49 4.3 Connecting a Camera .................................................................................................................................................. 50 4.4 Configuring Video Input ............................................................................................................................................. 53 4.5 Selecting and Controlling a Camera ........................................................................................................................... 55 4.6 Setting Camera Presets ............................................................................................................................................... 56 5 Microphone and Speaker .......................................................................................................... 58 5.1 Connecting an Audio Input Device ............................................................................................................................. 58 5.1.1 Connecting a VPM220 ............................................................................................................................................. 59 5.1.2 Connecting a VPM220W ......................................................................................................................................... 62 5.1.3 Setting Audio Parameters ......................................................................................................................................... 64 5.2 Connecting an Audio Output Device .......................................................................................................................... 66 5.2.1 Connecting a Speaker .............................................................................................................................................. 66 5.2.2 Placing an External Speaker .................................................................................................................................... 66 5.2.3 Adjusting the Speaker Volume ................................................................................................................................. 67 5.3 Connecting a Tuning Console ..................................................................................................................................... 67 5.4 Adjusting Audio Effects .............................................................................................................................................. 67 5.5 Enjoying Stereo Audio ................................................................................................................................................ 68 6 Conference .................................................................................................................................... 70 6.1 Experiencing a Dual-Stream Conference .................................................................................................................... 71 6.1.1 Designating the Dual Streams .................................................................................................................................. 71 6.1.2 Sharing a Presentation ............................................................................................................................................. 72 6.1.3 Viewing the Combined Picture of the Presentation and the Video .......................................................................... 72 6.2 Experiencing an MSUC Conference ........................................................................................................................... 73 6.3 Joining an Authentication Conference ........................................................................................................................ 75 6.4 Joining an HD-Video Conference over an IMS Network ........................................................................................... 77 6.5 Scheduling a Conference ............................................................................................................................................ 80 6.6 Controlling a Conference ............................................................................................................................................ 80 6.6.1 Conference Control for a Non-Chair Site ................................................................................................................ 81 6.6.2 Conference Control for the Chair Site ..................................................................................................................... 82 6.7 Recording a Conference.............................................................................................................................................. 85 6.8 Managing the Address Book ....................................................................................................................................... 86 6.8.1 Configuring the Network Address Book .................................................................................................................. 86 6.8.2 Managing the Local Address Book .......................................................................................................................... 89 6.8.3 Importing and Exporting an Address Book .............................................................................................................. 91 6.8.4 Customizing a Site Template ................................................................................................................................... 92 6.9 Managing Captions ..................................................................................................................................................... 93 6.9.1 Specifying Caption Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 94 6.9.2 Creating a Banner or Caption .................................................................................................................................. 95 7 Security.......................................................................................................................................... 97 Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Contents 7.1 Setting the Administrator Password ............................................................................................................................ 97 7.2 Enabling Encryption ................................................................................................................................................... 98 7.3 Supporting Remote Logins ......................................................................................................................................... 99 7.4 Setting the Upgrade Password .................................................................................................................................. 101 7.5 Setting the Air Content Sharing Password ................................................................................................................ 101 8 Screen Customization............................................................................................................... 103 8.1 Customizing the Home Screen.................................................................................................................................. 103 8.2 Customizing Onscreen Status Icons .......................................................................................................................... 105 8.3 Customizing Conference Control Functions to Be Displayed .................................................................................. 105 8.4 Customizing the Option Bar ..................................................................................................................................... 106 9 Embedded Web Management Interface ............................................................................... 107 9.1 Web Browser ............................................................................................................................................................. 108 9.2 Logging In to the Endpoint Web Interface ................................................................................................................ 109 9.3 Getting to Know Web Interface Functions ................................................................................................................ 110 9.3.1 Importing and Exporting Settings .......................................................................................................................... 110 9.3.2 Importing License Files ......................................................................................................................................... 111 9.3.3 Downloading an Air Content Sharing Client ......................................................................................................... 111 9.3.4 Multi-View ............................................................................................................................................................. 113 9.3.5 Customizing Shortcut Bar and Desktop Icons ....................................................................................................... 113 9.3.6 Accessing the Site Map .......................................................................................................................................... 114 9.3.7 Importing a Certificate ........................................................................................................................................... 114 9.3.8 Monitoring the Video ............................................................................................................................................. 115 9.3.9 Using the Virtual Remote Control ......................................................................................................................... 115 10 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................. 116 10.1 Checking the Working Environment Periodically .................................................................................................. 116 10.2 Checking the Endpoint Periodically ....................................................................................................................... 117 10.3 Viewing System Status ........................................................................................................................................... 117 10.4 Querying System Information ................................................................................................................................ 118 10.5 Querying Logs ........................................................................................................................................................ 118 11 Upgrading ................................................................................................................................. 120 11.1 Automatic Upgrade ................................................................................................................................................. 121 11.2 Tool Upgrade .......................................................................................................................................................... 122 11.3 Upgrading the Endpoint Using the Bootrom System .............................................................................................. 125 11.4 Upgrading the Endpoint on Its Web Interface ......................................................................................................... 126 12 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................... 127 12.1 Fault Diagnostics .................................................................................................................................................... 127 12.2 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................................................... 130 12.3 Restoring Default Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 140 13 Feature Configuration ............................................................................................................ 141 Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Contents 13.1 Setting the Number Keys and Power Key on the Remote Control ......................................................................... 141 13.2 Setting the Parameters for Placing and Answering Calls ........................................................................................ 142 13.3 Setting Advanced Conference Parameters .............................................................................................................. 144 13.4 Setting SNMP Parameters ....................................................................................................................................... 147 13.5 Setting QoS Parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 150 13.6 Setting Network Diagnostics Parameters ................................................................................................................ 152 14 Ports on the Rear Panel .......................................................................................................... 153 A E1/T1 Grounding Criteria ....................................................................................................... 154 B Technical Specifications ......................................................................................................... 155 C Status Icons ................................................................................................................................ 159 D Menus ......................................................................................................................................... 162 E Terminology .............................................................................................................................. 164 F Acronyms and Abbreviations ................................................................................................. 170 Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 1 Overview 1 Overview About This Chapter This document guides you through configuring, managing, maintaining, and troubleshooting the endpoint. When using this document, note the following:
Unless otherwise specified, the descriptions in this document are applicable to the TE40, TE50, and TE60. Except chapters 9 Embedded Web Management Interface, 10 Maintenance, 12 Troubleshooting and 13.4 Setting SNMP Parameters which apply to the endpoint web interface, descriptions and configurations in this document apply to the endpoint user interface controlled by the remote control (remote controlled UI for short). To access the menu screen, press on the left of the menu screen. This option bar is configurable and is your interface for all functions except calling. For details about how to configure the option bar, see 8.4 Customizing the Option Bar. on the remote control. You can find the option bar To prevent endpoint parameters from being modified by unauthorized users, anyone accessing the Settings screen and use the customized tool bar screen must provide the administrator password. For details about how to set the password, see 7.1 Setting the Administrator Password. on the menu 1.1 Definition of an Endpoint Administrator An endpoint administrator is an enterprise employee who is responsible for managing and maintaining endpoint operations. 1.2 Requirements for an Endpoint Administrator As an endpoint administrator, you must meet the following basic endpoint administrator proficiencies and be capable of collecting all information related to the endpoint and its working environment. 1.3 Related Documentation This section lists the documentation that you may refer to when you perform routine operations and maintenance as well as answering questions from standard users. 1.4 Safety Precautions Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 1 Overview For safety purposes, carefully read through these safety precautions and observe them during operation. 1.5 How to Obtain Help When you encounter an endpoint issue, use the help on the endpoint web interface or contact technical support personnel. 1.1 Definition of an Endpoint Administrator An endpoint administrator is an enterprise employee who is responsible for managing and maintaining endpoint operations. An endpoint administrator has the following job responsibilities:
Configures and manages the endpoint. Routinely maintains the endpoint. Troubleshoots the endpoint failures. Answers standard users' questions about endpoint use. 1.2 Requirements for an Endpoint Administrator As an endpoint administrator, you must meet the following basic endpoint administrator proficiencies and be capable of collecting all information related to the endpoint and its working environment. Basic Endpoint Administrator Proficiencies Windows operating system Gatekeeper (GK) and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) servers Ethernet, TCP/IP, and Client/Server (C/S) model H.323, SIP, and H.320 protocols Safe and effective use of electronic devices Common maintenance tools Videoconferencing endpoint functions and services Information About the Endpoint and Its Working Environment Table 1-1 lists the endpoint and working environment information that must be collected, which helps you fulfill your job responsibilities and check the preparations for a recovery from an emergency. Table 1-1 Information to be collected Category No. Item Description Device information 1 Device location Record the endpoint location in as much detail as possible so the endpoint can be quickly Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Category No. Item 2 Networking condition 3 Endpoint information Software and tools 4 Software versions and tools Contact information 5 Purchased parts' service information 6 Technical support personnel's contact information Spare parts 7 Spare parts 1 Overview Description located. Record the network topology and hardware connection diagram that include every device. List the IP address, user name, and password for the endpoint so you can quickly log in to the endpoint in case of an emergency. If you are not permitted to record the password for security reasons, memorize it. List the software versions corresponding to the endpoint. Prepare troubleshooting tools. Record the manufacturer contact information, serial numbers, and manufacturers'
warranty clauses for purchased parts. Maintain a list of technical support personnel with their contact information and responsibilities. List all spare parts (including the spare parts that Huawei can provide) and corresponding procurement methods. 8 Redundant or temporary devices List all redundant or temporary devices in the system, such as standby file servers and database servers. 1.3 Related Documentation This section lists the documentation that you may refer to when you perform routine operations and maintenance as well as answering questions from standard users. In addition to this administrator guide, you can refer to the documentation listed in Table 1-2. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Table 1-2 Reference documentation 1 Overview Document Description When to Use How to Obtain Describes how to install the endpoint and connect cables. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint V100R001C01 Quick Installation Guide HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint V100R001C01 Quick Start Guide Describes the remote controlled UI and provides quick instructions in commonly-used endpoint functions. Describes how to operate the endpoint. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint V100R001C01 User Guide HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint V100R001C01 Help Describes the endpoint web interface and method for using this interface. Hold Ctrl and click the following hyperlink: Product Support > Unified Communications and Collaboration >
Telepresence and Videoconferencing
>
Videoconferencing Endpoints. Log in to the endpoint web interface and click the Help tab. When checking whether the carton contains all the required items and when installing the endpoint When answering questions from standard users who are using the endpoint for the first time or unfamiliar with the endpoint When answering standard users'
questions about daily endpoint operations When answering questions that standard users encounter on the endpoint web interface or explaining the parameters on this interface 1.4 Safety Precautions For safety purposes, carefully read through these safety precautions and observe them during operation. Basic Precautions Keep the device dry and secure from collision during storage, transportation, and operation of the device. Do not attempt to dismantle the device by yourself. In case of any fault, contact the appointed maintenance center for assistance or repair. Without prior written consent, no organization or individual is permitted to make any change to the structure or safety and performance design of the device. While using the device, observe all applicable laws, directives, and regulations, and respect the legal rights of others. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Environmental Precautions 1 Overview Place the device in a well-ventilated place. Do not expose the device to direct sunlight. Install the device strictly according to the requirements of the manufacturer. Do not place any object on the top of the device. Reserve a minimum space of 10 cm at the four sides of the device for heat dissipation. Do not place the device on or near inflammable materials such as foam. Keep the device away from heat source or fire, such as a radiator or a candle. Keep the device away from any household appliances with strong electromagnetic fields, such as a microwave oven, refrigerator, or mobile phone. Operating Precautions Do not allow children to play with the device or accessories. Swallowing the accessories may be fatal. Use the accessories such as the power adapter and battery provided or authorized only by the manufacturer. Ensure that the device does not get wet. If water gets into the device, disconnect the power supply immediately and unplug all the cables connected to the device, including the power cable, telephone cable, video cable, audio cable, network cable, and serial cable, and then contact the appointed maintenance center. Before plugging or unplugging any cable, shut down the device and disconnect the power supply. While plugging or unplugging any cable, ensure that your hands are dry. Do not step on, pull, or overbend any cable. Otherwise, the cable may be damaged, leading to malfunction of the device. Do not use old or damaged cables. In lightning weather, disconnect the device from the power supply and unplug all the cables connected to the device. Keep the power plug clean and dry, to prevent electric shock or other dangers. If the device is not used for a long time, disconnect the power supply and unplug the power plug. If smoke, sound, or smell is emitted from the device, stop using the device immediately, disconnect the power supply, unplug the power plug and other cables, and remove the batteries. Then, contact the appointed maintenance center for repair. Ensure that no object (such as metal shavings) enters the device through the heat dissipation vent. Before connecting any other cable, connect the ground cable of the device. Do not disconnect the ground cable until you have disconnected all the other cables. Ensure that the three-phase power socket is grounded properly. The neutral line and the live line cannot be connected inversely. Do not scratch or abrade the shell of the device. The shed painting may lead to skin allergy or malfunction of the device. If the shed painting material drops into the host, a short circuit may occur. Cleaning Precautions Before cleaning the device, stop using it, disconnect the power supply, and unplug all the cables connected to the device, including the power cable, telephone cable, video cable, audio cable, network cable, and serial cable. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 1 Overview Do not clean the device shell with any cleaning solution or cleanser spray. Use a piece of soft cloth to clean the device shell. Battery Usage Precautions of the Remote Control Use only the recommended battery. Pay attention to the polarity of the batteries while installing them. If a battery does not fit in the device, do not apply force. Otherwise, the battery may leak or explode. To reduce the risk of explosion, do not use batteries of different types together. For example, do not use an alkaline battery and a Mn-Zn battery together. It is recommended that you use batteries provided or recommended by the manufacturer. Do not use a new battery with an old battery. When you replace batteries, replace all of them at the same time. If you are not going to use the device for a long time, remove all the batteries. If any battery leaks, emits smoke, or emits abnormal smell, stop using it immediately. If the battery fluid comes in contact with your skin or clothes, rinse with water immediately and seek medical assistance. If the battery fluid goes into your eyes, do not rub your eyes. Rinse your eyes with water immediately and seek medical assistance. LCD Usage Precautions Do not expose the LCD to direct sunlight. Do not scratch or strike, apply force to, or place heavy objects on top of the LCD. Do not watch the LCD screen for extended periods of time. This may harm your eyes or blur your vision. LCD Cleaning Precautions According to the instructions in the attached manual, use a piece of soft cloth to remove dust from the surface of the LCD. Do not clean the LCD with volatile solvents, such as alcohol, benzene, or a dilution agent. Do not keep the LCD in contact with a rubber or plastic materials for long periods of time. This will deteriorate the surface gloss of the LCD. Wireless Product Usage Precautions Keep the wireless device away from magnetic storage devices, such as a magnetic card or a floppy disk to prevent loss of the stored information. Stop using the wireless device and disconnect it from the power supply in places where using of wireless devices is prohibited or using of a wireless device may lead to interference or danger. Unplug the wireless device from the endpoint and turn off the endpoint close to a high-precision controlled electronic device, such as an audio phone, a pacemaker, fire alarm, or an automatic gate. Otherwise, this will lead to malfunction of the electronic device. The user who uses an electronic assistant medical-treatment device needs to confirm with the service center regarding the effects of the radio wave on this device. Do not take the wireless device to the operation theater, Intensive Care Unit (ICU), or the Coronary Care Unit (CCU). Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 1 Overview When using the device, ensure that the antenna of the device is at least 20 cm away from all parts of your body. In the area with inflammable or explosive materials, turn off your wireless device and follow the relevant instructions given on the label to prevent an explosion or fire. Use your wireless device and its accessories in a clean and dust-free environment. Ensure that the wireless device does not come in contact with flame or a lit cigarette. Ensure that the wireless device and its accessories are dry. Do not drop, throw, or bend your wireless device. Do not place the wireless device and its accessories in areas with extreme temperatures. Reduction of Hazardous Substances This device is compliant with the EU Registration, Evaluation, Authorization and Restriction of Chemicals (REACH) Regulation (Regulation No 1907/2006/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council) and the EU Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive (Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council). For more information about the REACH compliance of the device, visit the website www.huaweidevice.com/certification. You are recommended to visit the website regularly for up-to-date information. Statement on a Class A Product This is a class A product. In a national environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. European Regulatory Compliance The endpoint complies with the following European directives and regulations. 1999/5/EC (R&TTE) 2002/95/EC & 2011/65/EU (RoHS) EC NO. 1907/2006 (REACH) 2002/96/EC (WEEE) The endpoint complies with Directive 2002/95/EC, 2011/65/EU and other similar regulations from the countries outside the European Union, on the RoHS in electrical and electronic equipment. The endpoint does not contain lead, mercury, cadmium, and hexavalent chromium and brominated flame retardants (Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB) or Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)) except for those exempted applications allowed by RoHS directive for technical reasons. The endpoint complies with Regulation EC NO. 1907/2006 (REACH) and other similar regulations from the countries outside the European Union. Huawei will notify to the European Chemical Agency (ECHA) or the customer when necessary and regulation requires. The endpoint complies with Directive 2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). Huawei is responsible for recycling its end-of-life devices, and please contact Huawei local service center when recycling is required. Huawei strictly complies with the EU Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive (WEEE Directive) and electronic waste management regulations enacted by different countries worldwide. In addition, Huawei has established a system for recycling and reuse of electronic wastes, and it can provide service of dismantling and recycling for WEEE. By Huawei recycling system, the waste can be handled environmentally and the resource can be recycled and reused fully, which is also Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 1 Overview Huawei WEEE stratagem in the word. Most of the materials in the endpoint are recyclable, and our packaging is designed to be recycled and should be handled in accordance with your local recycling policies. In accordance with Article 11(2) in Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE), The endpoints were marked with the following symbol: a cross-out wheeled waste bin with a bar beneath as below:
FCC Part 15 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device does not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If this device is modified without authorization from Huawei, the device may no longer comply with FCC requirements for Class A digital devices. In that a case, your right to use the device may be limited by FCC regulations. Moreover, you may be required to correct any interference to radio or television communications at your own expense. This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters between the radiator and your body. The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 1 Overview modifications to this equipment. Such modifications could void the user authority to operate the equipment. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the device is operated in a commercial environment. This device generates, uses and radiates radio frequency energy. If it is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference. In this case the user will be requested to correct the interference at his or her own expense. Canada Regulatory Compliance RSS-Gen statement This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. RSS-210 statement:
This device complies with Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio RSS-210. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. RSS-102 statement:
The device meets the exemption from the routine evaluation limits in section 2.5 of RSS 102 and compliance with RSS-102 RF exposure, users can obtain Canadian information on RF exposure and compliance. Le dispositif rencontre l'exemption des limites courantes d'valuation dans la section 2.5 de RSS 102 et la conformit l'exposition de RSS-102 rf, utilisateurs peut obtenir l'information canadienne sur l'exposition et la conformit de rf. This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator and your body. Cet quipement est conforme l'exposition aux rayonnements IC limites tablies pour unenvironnement non contrl. Cet metteur ne doit pas tre Co-plac ou ne Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 1 Overview fonctionnant en mme temps qu'aucune autre antenne ou metteur.Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre le radiateur et votre corps. 1.5 How to Obtain Help When you encounter an endpoint issue, use the help on the endpoint web interface or contact technical support personnel. Viewing the Help on the Endpoint Web Interface The help on the endpoint web interface includes context-sensitive help and operation guidance. Context-sensitive help includes status icons and configuration verification messages. For example, if certain settings on the system settings screen are incorrect, a message will be displayed to indicate the error and how to rectify it. The operation guidance describes how to operate the endpoint web interface. When you are using the endpoint and the documents delivered with the endpoint are unavailable, you can press on the remote control and select Help to display the operation guide. Obtaining Technical Support The Huawei support website is an efficient and real-time communication platform where you can obtain technical documents, submit technical questions, service requests, and troubleshooting questions, and provide feedback on Huawei products. To seek technical help over the Internet, please visit http://enterprise.huawei.com. Provide the following information to help Huawei engineers answer your questions:
Endpoint serial number (To view this number, choose Advanced > Diagnostics >
System Information > Version.) Software version (To view this information, choose Advanced > Diagnostics > System Information > Version.) Network information (To view this information, choose Advanced > Diagnostics >
Status > Line Status.) Diagnostic and troubleshooting measures you have taken Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 2 Basic Configuration and Verification 2 Basic Configuration and Verification About This Chapter Before using the endpoint, you must complete basic endpoint configuration, such as setting basic endpoint information and network parameters, and verify the configuration. 2.1 Powering On or Off the Endpoint After connecting all the required devices, connect the power supply and then power on the endpoint. 2.2 Using the Wizard The Wizard helps you quickly set the general, network, and camera parameters on your endpoint. 2.3 Verifying the Basic Configuration After completing the basic configuration, you must verify it by performing call, sound, and image tests. 2.4 Power Management The endpoint supports sleep mode. You can set its sleep time and automatic startup and shutdown time. 2.1 Powering On or Off the Endpoint After connecting all the required devices, connect the power supply and then power on the endpoint. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 2 Basic Configuration and Verification When the endpoint is powered on, ensure that the power cable is connected to the endpoint securely to prevent power disconnection. Before disconnecting the external power supply (for example, the power supply from a power socket), power off the endpoint properly. Check whether the power cable and the power adapter are connected to the relevant devices properly. Ensure that:
The voltage of the alternating current ranges from 100 V to 240 V and the frequency of the alternating current ranges from 50 Hz to 60 Hz. The sequence of and voltage difference between the live wire, neutral wire, and ground cable comply with the relevant international standards. In addition, ensure that the ground cable is properly grounded. To power on the endpoint, slide the power switch on the rear panel to the ON position. To power off the endpoint, perform either of the following operations:
Press box. on the remote control. Confirm the power-off action in the displayed dialog Slide the power switch on the rear panel to the OFF position. When the endpoint is powered off using the remote control, the indicator on the front panel turns orange, but the power switch on the rear panel is still in the ON position. To power on the endpoint again, press on the remote control. Depending on the endpoint's status, the indicators on the front panel may blink in different colors and at different rates, as listed in Table 2-1 and Table 2-2. Table 2-1 Status indicator description When the Status Indicator Is... The Endpoint Is... Blinking blue twice per second Starting. Steady blue Working properly. Blinking purple once every 2 seconds In sleep mode. Steady purple Powered off (the power switch is ON, and the endpoint is powered off by pressing on the remote control). Blinking blue once Responding to a remote control operation. Blinking blue four times per second Being updated. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 2 Basic Configuration and Verification Table 2-2 Alarm indicator description When the Alarm Indicator Is... The Endpoint Is... Blinking red twice per second Overheated. Blinking red four times per second Encountering a temperature fault. For example, the temperature sensor inside the endpoint cannot sense the current operating temperature, causing fast fan rotation speed and loud fan noise. 2.2 Using the Wizard The Wizard helps you quickly set the general, network, and camera parameters on your endpoint. Background When configuring the endpoint for the first time, you can connect to the NMS server to configure the endpoint. For details, see the HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint V100R001C01 Quick Start Guide. If the NMS server has not been configured or obtaining the NMS server settings times out, perform the steps in this section to set the required parameters. If a USB flash drive is provided with your endpoint, you can also load the configuration file from the USB flash drive to configure your endpoint. For details, see the HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint V100R001C01 Quick Installation Guide. Procedure Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Installation > Wizard. The General screen is displayed. Step 2 Set the general parameters described in Table 2-3 and Table 3-3. Table 2-3 General parameters Parameter Description Setting Sites Specifies the name of your site. The site name is superimposed on the local video. Default value: site When your site joins a multipoint conference, this site name is displayed in the site list. Language Specifies the language for the remote controlled UI. Default value: English Time zone Specifies the time difference between the local time and the Greenwich Mean Default value:
Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 2 Basic Configuration and Verification Parameter Description Setting Time (GMT). The endpoint automatically sets this parameter based on the country or region where your site is located. Time format Specifies the format in which time is Default value: 24-hour displayed. System time Specifies the system time. Set the system time to your local time to ensure appropriate use of system functions, such as joining conferences on time and recording accurate event occurrence time in logs. Step 3 Select Next, Set the H.323 parameters described in Table 3-4. Step 4 Select Next. Set the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) parameters described in Table 3-5. Step 5 Select Next. Set the video input parameters described in Table 4-14. Step 6 Select Save.
----End 2.3 Verifying the Basic Configuration After completing the basic configuration, you must verify it by performing call, sound, and image tests. 2.3.1 Call Test By performing a call test, you can check whether the network is functioning and whether the endpoint has registered with the GK or SIP server. Procedure Step 1 Press on the remote control. The call screen is displayed. Step 2 In the text box, enter the IP address or number of a remote site. Step 3 On the remote control, press or to place a call to the remote site.
----End Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 2 Basic Configuration and Verification If you have selected the Enable GK or Register with server parameter and set other required parameters but the endpoint fails to register with the GK or SIP server, displayed in the lower right corner of the call screen. or is Verification Result If you successfully place a call to the remote site using its IP address, the IP network is functioning properly. If you successfully place a call to an H.323 site, the endpoint has registered with the GK server. If you successfully place a call to a SIP site, the endpoint has registered with the SIP server. 2.3.2 Sound Test By performing a sound test, you can check whether the audio input and output of the endpoint is correct. Prerequisites Procedure The endpoint has been connected to an audio input device such as a microphone. The endpoint has been connected to an audio output device, such as a speaker, or connected to a television using an HDMI cable. Step 1 Choose Advanced > Diagnostics > Sound and Color Bar Test from the option bar. Step 2 Select Sound Test.
----End Verification Result If the speaker emits a "ding ding" tone when there is no audio input, the audio output of the endpoint is correct. If audio inputs, for example human voices, are received from the microphone and the speaker emits the voices, the audio input and output of the endpoint are correct. 2.3.3 Image Test By performing an image test, you can check whether the video input and output of the endpoint is correct. Prerequisites The endpoint has been connected to video sources and a display device. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Procedure 2 Basic Configuration and Verification Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Video > Common Settings > Video Input from the option bar. Set the Video Source parameter to the video input ports to which video sources are connected. Step 2 Check whether the videos from connected video sources are correctly displayed on the display device.
----End Verification Result This example assumes that a video source is connected to the 1 MAIN IN port on the endpoint. If the video delivered through the 1 MAIN IN port is correctly displayed on the display device after you select 1 MAIN IN, the video input and output of the endpoint are correct. 2.4 Power Management The endpoint supports sleep mode. You can set its sleep time and automatic startup and shutdown time. To reduce power consumption, the endpoint can be configured to enter sleep mode after it has been in the idle state for a defined period of time. Procedure Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > General > Power supply. Set the sleep and automatic startup and shutdown parameters described in Table 2-4. Table 2-4 Sleep and automatic startup and shutdown parameters Parameter Description Setting Shut Down Enter sleep mode Wake-on-LAN Specifies whether the endpoint can be powered off. If you disable this parameter, you can only restart the endpoint or place it in sleep mode by pressing control. on the remote Specifies the period after which the endpoint enters sleep mode if you do not perform any operations. If you set this parameter to Never, the endpoint will never automatically enter sleep mode. Specifies whether you can remotely wake up a standby or sleeping endpoint by sending The default value is Enable. The default value is After 10 min. This parameter is not selected by default. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 2 Basic Configuration and Verification Parameter Description Setting Wake on LAN (WOL) messages. NOTE A standby endpoint indicates that the power switch on the endpoint's rear panel is in the ON position and that the endpoint is turned off by pressing the power key on the remote control. Specifies whether the endpoint automatically powers on at the specified time. NOTE If you enable this function, you must also set Scheduled power-on time (hh:mm). Scheduled power-on This parameter is not selected by default. Scheduled power-on time Specifies the time when the endpoint automatically powers on. The default value is 0:0, which corresponds to the 24-hour value for Time format. Scheduled power-off The value format depends on the value set for Time format. Specifies whether the endpoint automatically powers off at the specified time. NOTE If you enable this function, you must also set Scheduled power-off time (hh:mm). This parameter is not selected by default. Scheduled power-off time Specifies the time when the endpoint automatically powers off. The default value is 0:0, which corresponds to the 24-hour value for Time format. The value format depends on the value set for Time format. Step 2 Select Save. The endpoint enters sleep mode, and the LED indicator blinks purple once every 2 seconds.
----End To directly place the endpoint in sleep mode, press on the remote control and select Sleep. Follow-up Procedure The endpoint wakes up from sleep mode in response to any of the following conditions:
You use the touch panel. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 2 Basic Configuration and Verification An endpoint upgrade starts. A presentation source is connected to the endpoint. The camera forwards infrared signals to the endpoint. The WOL function is used. The clock matches the scheduled endpoint startup time. The endpoint receives a call. You use the remote control. You log in to the endpoint web interface. When the clock matches the scheduled automatic shutdown time, the endpoint displays a dialog box and begins a 10-second countdown. If you select No, the endpoint will not power off. If you select Yes, or do not select any option within 10 seconds, the endpoint automatically powers off. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 3 Network 3 Network About This Chapter This chapter describes the hardware connection to network devices and the settings on relevant screens required when the endpoint is used in different communication networks. 3.1 Connecting to an IP LAN Network To implement video communication over an IP local area network (LAN), you must connect the endpoint to the IP LAN. 3.2 Connecting to a 4E1 Network Only the TE60 supports 4E1 functions. To implement video communication over a 4E1-line dedicated network, you must connect the TE60 to the network. 3.1 Connecting to an IP LAN Network To implement video communication over an IP local area network (LAN), you must connect the endpoint to the IP LAN. To connect to an IP LAN, use an IP network cable to connect the LAN 1 port on the endpoint's rear panel to the network port on a LAN device. 3.1.1 Checking Status Indicators of the LAN Port The status indicators on the LAN port can quickly provide information about the current network connection. There are two indicators working together to indicate the network connection, as shown in Table 3-1 and Table 3-2. Table 3-1 LAN status indicators of the TE40 and TE50 Indicator Status Connection Status The orange indicator blinks. Data is being transmitted. The green indicator turns off each time a frame of data has been transmitted. The green indicator is steady on. The endpoint is connected to a network. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 3 Network Indicator Status Connection Status The green indicator is off. No data is being transmitted or the network is not reachable. Table 3-2 LAN status indicators of TE60 Indicator Status Connection Status The orange indicator blinks once at a time. The orange indicator blinks twice at a time. The orange indicator blinks thrice at a time. The LAN port is in 10 M network port mode. The LAN port is in 100 M network port mode. The LAN port is in 1000 M network port mode. The green indicator is steady on. The endpoint is connected to a network. The green indicator blinks. Data is being transmitted. The green indicator turns off each time a frame of data has been transmitted. The green indicator is off. No data is being transmitted or the network is not reachable. 3.1.2 Setting IP Parameters To enable video communication over an IP LAN network, you must set the IP parameters of the endpoint, such as the DNS server address, network mode, and gateway IP address. Procedure Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Network > IP. Set the parameters listed in Table 3-3. Table 3-3 IP parameters Parameter Description Setting LAN1 DNS server address 1 DNS server address 2 DNS server address 3 Network interface mode Specifies the DNS server IP address. Example: 202.98.192.67 After you set this IP address, domain names can be used for the GK server address and the SIP server address. The DNS server will translate the domain names to the IP addresses of the GK server and the SIP server. Obtain the IP address from the network administrator. Specifies the working mode for the network ports on the endpoint. The default value is Auto detection. Auto detection: When accessing the NOTE Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 3 Network Parameter Description Setting When you do not know the network port working mode of a remote network device, set this parameter to Auto detection. Otherwise, the endpoint may fail to access the network. network, the endpoint automatically negotiates with a remote network device to determine the optimal work mode. 10 Mbps and half duplex: The data transmission rate is 10 Mbit/s, and data cannot be sent and received at the same time. 10 Mbps and full duplex: The data transmission rate is 10 Mbit/s, and data can be sent and received at the same time. 100 Mbps and half duplex: The data transmission rate is 100 Mbit/s, and data cannot be sent and received at the same time. 100 Mbps and full duplex: The data transmission rate is 100 Mbit/s, and data can be sent and received at the same time. 1000Mbps and full duplex: The data transmission rate is 1000 Mbit/s, and data can be sent and received at the same time. Connection type Specifies the mode in which the endpoint obtains an IP address. The default value is Static IP. Static IP: The network administrator assigns an IP address to the endpoint. If you select this option, you must also set Local IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway address. Dynamic IP: When a DHCP server is available on the network, the endpoint automatically obtains an IP address using the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Specifies the endpoint IP address. The default value is 192.168.1.1 Local IP address Examples:
IPv4: 192.168.1.10 IPv6:
2000:0:0:0:200:55:26:1 Obtain the IP address from the network administrator. The default value is 255.255.255.0 Obtain the subnet mask from the network administrator. Subnet mask Specifies the subnet mask for the endpoint IP address. A subnet mask divides the IP address into a network address and a host address. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Parameter Description Gateway address Specifies the gateway address that corresponds to the endpoint IP address. IPv6 If you select IPv6, you must also set Connection type, Local IP address, Subnet prefix length, and Gateway address. 3 Network Setting Examples:
IPv4: 192.168.1.1 IPv6: 2000:0:0:0:200:55:0:1 Obtain the gateway address from the network administrator. This parameter is not selected by default. Subnet prefix length Specifies the number of the digit 1 in a subnet mask that is converted into binary mode. The default value is 0. PPPoE Specifies whether the endpoint accesses broadband networks using dial-up connections. The default value is Disable. The default value is Auto. NOTE If you set this parameter to Enable, you must also set Dialing mode, User name, and Password. Specifies the dial-up connection mode. The dial-up process complies with the Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
(PPPoE) protocol. To use a dial-up connection, in User name and Password enter the user name and password that are provided by your broadband access service provider. Auto: When the endpoint starts, it automatically sets up a dial-up connection over the IP network. If the dial-up service is not free of charge, charging starts when the dial-up connection is established. Manual: The endpoint uses the dial-up program to access To set up a PPPoE dial-up connection, choose Advanced > Utilities > PPPoE Dialing > Connect. Specifies the alternate IP address of the endpoint. This IP address cannot be in the same network segment as Local IP address (described in the LAN1 section in this table) or the IP address of the gatekeeper (GK) server. No default value is set for this parameter. Obtain the IP address from the network administrator. Dialing mode LAN2 Local IP address Subnet mask Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Step 2 Select Save.
----End 3.1.3 Setting H.323 Parameters 3 Network The H.323 parameters must be set when the GK is used in the conference system. The GK is used in the conference system. When the GK is used in the conference system, the endpoint can be configured with a site number. Other endpoints that also have registered with the GK can then use the site number as well as the IP address to call your endpoint. The GK is the network isolator of the videoconferencing system and is used to manage the network bandwidth, endpoint authentication, and address translation. It enables calls to be made to fixed site names rather than changeable IP addresses. Prerequisites Context Procedure Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Network > IP > H.323, and then set the parameters listed in Table 3-4. Table 3-4 H.323 parameters Parameter Description Setting Enable GK Specifies whether the endpoint registers with the GK. This parameter is not selected by default. If this parameter is selected, when your endpoint starts, it registers with the specified GK. An endpoint that registers with a GK can place calls to remote sites using their IP addresses or site numbers if the remote sites also register with GKs. A GK must be used to initiate a conference attended by IP and integrated services digital network (ISDN) sites. If this parameter is not selected, your endpoint does not register with the GK. To call another endpoint through H.323, your endpoint can only use the called endpoint's IP address. NOTE If you select Enable GK, you must also set GK registration mode, Site number, H.323 ID, and Password. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 3 Network Parameter Description Setting GK registration mode GK address Auto: Your endpoint automatically The default value is Auto. registers with an available GK on the network and obtains the GK address. Manual: You must set GK address, which specifies the GK with which you want your endpoint to register. Specifies the IP address or domain name of the server where the desired GK is installed. If you set this parameter to the domain name, you must enable the DNS server and set correct mapping information on the server. This parameter is mandatory only when GK registration mode is set to Manual. Example: 192.168.1.10 Site number Specifies the site number for your endpoint. Enter a string of 1 to 32 digits. Example: 12345 If your endpoint registers with a GK, endpoints that also register with GKs can dial this site number to call your endpoint. H.323 ID Specifies the name by which a GK identifies your endpoint after your endpoint registers with the GK. The name can consist of digits, letters, and special characters, such as @ # %. Example: ab3@
Authenticati on user name Specifies the user name used for H.323 authentication. Obtain the user name from your IP network service provider. Password Specifies the password your endpoint uses to register with a GK. The GK uses this password to authenticate your endpoint. For successful GK authentication, the name defined on your endpoint must be consistent with the name predefined on the GK. Obtain the password from your IP network service provider. For successful GK authentication, the password defined on your endpoint must be consistent with the password predefined on the GK. Huawei GK Specifies whether your endpoint uses a Huawei GK. This parameter is selected by default. If you do not select Huawei GK, some functions, such as Conference Control and SiteCall are unavailable on your endpoint. Do not select this parameter if your endpoint needs to interwork with other manufacturers' devices. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 3 Network Parameter Description Setting HTTPS mode Specifies whether to upload SiteCall conference information using HTTPS encryption. This parameter is available only when Huawei GK is selected. If this parameter is set to disabled, your endpoint will use the Transfer Control Protocol (TCP) to upload SiteCall conference information, which may be insecure. This parameter is not selected by default. To improve communication security, select this parameter. Multipoint conference authenticatio n Use VoIP gateway VoIP gateway address Specifies whether to authenticate servers when the SiteCall function is used. This parameter is not selected by default. This parameter is available only when HTTPS mode is selected. To improve communication security, select this parameter. Specify whether your endpoint can place calls to the PSTN endpoints connected to the specified voice over IP (VoIP) gateway. If you select Use VoIP gateway, you must also set VoIP gateway address. The Use VoIP gateway is not selected by default. Step 2 Select Save.
----End 3.1.4 Setting SIP Parameters When the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) is used for video communications, the SIP parameters of the endpoint, such as whether to register with the SIP server, must be set. Prerequisites Procedure Both parties of the conference support SIP. Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Network > IP > SIP, and then set the parameters listed in Table 3-5. Table 3-5 SIP parameters Parameter Description Setting Register with server Specifies whether your endpoint registers with a SIP server. This parameter is not selected by default. If this parameter is selected, an endpoint that registers with a SIP Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 3 Network Parameter Description Setting server can place calls to remote sites using their IP addresses or site numbers if the remote sites also register with SIP servers. If this parameter is not selected, your endpoint does not register with the SIP server. To call another endpoint through SIP, your endpoint can only use the called endpoint's IP address. NOTE If you select this parameter, you must also set Server address, Conference service number, Site number, User name, and Password. Specifies the IP address or domain name of the SIP server with which you want the endpoint to register. If you set this parameter to the SIP server domain name, enable the domain name server (DNS). If the DNS is not enabled, enable Proxy server. Server address Example: 192.168.1.10 Conference service number Specifies the conference service number for your endpoint to initiate conferences over an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) network. No default value is set for this parameter. Set this parameter to the conference service number obtained from the administrator of the IMS network. NOTE For details about how to set parameters for interworking with the IMS and joining a conference on the IMS network, see 6.4 Joining an HD-Video Conference over an IMS Network. Enable proxy server Specifies whether to enable the proxy server. This parameter is not selected by default. Set this parameter based on the actual SIP network environment. Select this parameter when the network environment requires the proxy server or when Server address is set to the SIP server domain name but the configured DNS server fails to resolve this domain name or the DNS server is not configured. NOTE If you select this parameter, you must also set Proxy server address, Site number, User name, and Password. Proxy server address Specifies the address of the proxy server. If you set Server address to the SIP Example: 192.168.1.10 Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 3 Network Parameter Description Setting Site number server domain name, set this parameter to the IP address bound to that domain name. Specifies the site number for your endpoint. If your endpoint registers with a SIP server, endpoints that also register with the SIP server can dial this site number to call your endpoint. User name Specifies the user name for authentication registration. Enter a value containing any of the following: letters, digits, special characters such as @
# %. Example: 12345 Example: ab3@
Obtain the value of this parameter from the SIP server administrator. Password Specifies the password that your endpoint uses to register with a SIP server. Obtain the value of this parameter from the SIP server administrator. For successful authentication on a SIP server, this password set on your endpoint must be the same as that set on the SIP server. Server type Specifies the SIP server type. The default value is Standard. OCS: Select this option if your endpoint registers with the Microsoft Office Communications Server
(OCS) or Microsoft Lync Server. CISCO VCS: Select this option if your endpoint registers with the Cisco TelePresence Video Communication Server (VCS). Standard: Select this option if your endpoint registers with other SIP servers. Transmissio n type Specifies the protocol used for SIP signaling transmission. The default value is UDP. TCP: Use the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) to implement transmission reliability. UDP: Use the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) to implement transmission with reduced latency. TLS: Use Transport Layer Security
(TLS) to implement transmission security. If you select this option, you can import a root certificate from the Web interface when your endpoint registers with a SIP server. For details, see 9.3.7 Importing a Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 3 Network Parameter Description Setting The default value is Manual. Video request handling Certificate. Specifies how your endpoint handles video requests from a remote endpoint during a point-to-point SIP audio call or multipoint conference. Accept automatically: Your endpoint automatically accepts video requests from the remote endpoint. Reject automatically: Your endpoint automatically rejects video requests from the remote endpoint. Manual: Your endpoint prompts you to accept video requests from the remote endpoint. Step 2 Select Save.
----End 3.1.5 Setting Wi-Fi Parameters To use your endpoint to implement video communication over a Wi-Fi network, set the Wi-Fi parameters. Setting Wi-Fi Client Parameters When the Wi-Fi client function is enabled, your endpoint functions as a Wi-Fi client and access an available Wi-Fi network after connecting to a wireless router. Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Network > Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi Client. Select Enable for the Wi-Fi Client parameter. Your endpoint automatically scans for available wireless routers and lists them in the Wireless access point list box. If you need to set a static IP address for your endpoint, go to Step 2. Otherwise, go to Step 4. Step 2 Select Advanced. On the displayed Advanced Wireless Settings screen, set IP parameters described in Table 3-6. Table 3-6 Wi-Fi parameters Parameter Description Setting Connection type Specifies the mode in which the endpoint obtains an IP address. Static IP: The network administrator assigns an IP address to the The default value is Dynamic IP. Select Dynamic IP unless special network requirements are imposed. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 3 Network Parameter Description Setting endpoint. If you select this option, you must also set Local IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway address. Dynamic IP: The endpoint automatically obtains an IP address over the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP). If you select this option, a DHCP server must be available on the network. Specifies the IP address for the endpoint to connect to a wireless access point to implement communication. Local IP address Subnet mask Gateway address Specifies the subnet mask for the IP address of your endpoint. A subnet mask divides the IP address into a network address and a host address. Specifies the gateway address that corresponds to the IP address of the endpoint. Example: 192.168.1.10 This IP address and the IP address of the wireless access point must be on the same network segment. For example:
If the IP address of the wireless access point is 192.168.1.100, set Local IP address to 192.168.1.X. X can be any integer ranging from 0 to 255 except 100. Example: 255.255.255.0 Example: 192.168.1.1 Step 3 Select Save. Step 4 From Wireless access point, select the wireless router you want to connect to. Step 5 Press on the remote control. When prompted, enter the security key or password and select Connect. When the endpoint is connected to the router, the Connection Status changes to
.
----End Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Setting Wi-Fi Hotspot Parameters 3 Network When the Wi-Fi hotspot function is enabled on the endpoint, other devices, such as VPM220Ws, tablets, and PCs, can access a Wi-Fi network by connecting to the endpoint. Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Network > Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi Hotspot. Select Enable for the Wi-Fi Hotspot parameter. Step 2 Select Advanced. On the displayed Advanced Wireless Settings screen, set the advanced wireless network parameters described in Table 3-7. Table 3-7 Advanced wireless network parameters Parameter Description Setting SSID Number Specifies the name of your endpoint's Wi-Fi network. Default value for the TE40:
TE40_wifi_ap Default value for the TE50:
TE50_wifi_ap Default value for the TE60:
TE60_wifi_ap The value is a string of 1 to 31 characters, consisting of digits, letters, and special characters, such as @ # %. Channel Specifies a channel that transmits data through Wi-Fi signals. The default value is AUTO. Retain the default value. The default value is OPEN. Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) provides greater security than Wired Equivalent Privacy
(WEP). Therefore, set Identity authentication mode to WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK. NOTE When the endpoint is connected to a VPM220W, you must set Identity authentication mode to WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK. Identity authenticatio n mode If you select AUTO, your endpoint automatically selects the optimal channel. The first parameter specifies the identity authentication mode used on the Wi-Fi network. The second parameter specifies the data encryption mode corresponding to the identity authentication mode adopted. OPEN: If you select this option for Encryption mode, the values available for Encryption mode are NONE and WEP. SHARE: If you select this option for Encryption mode, the value available for Encryption mode is WEP. WPA-PSK: If you select this option for Encryption mode, the values available for Encryption mode are TKIP and AES. WPA2-PSK: If you select this option for Encryption mode, the values available for Encryption mode are TKIP and AES. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 3 Network Parameter Description Setting Encryption mode Specifies the encryption method used on the Wi-Fi network. The required key types vary depending on your settings of this parameter. If you set Encryption mode to NONE, the Wi-Fi network provided by your endpoint is open to everyone. Specifies the password used by other devices to connect to your endpoint. Local IP address Specify the IP address and subnet mask of your endpoint. Subnet mask Default value: NONE The required password varies depending on your settings of Encryption mode. If you set Encryption mode to NONE, the Wi-Fi network provided by your endpoint is open to everyone. Default values:
Local IP address:
192.168.2.1 Subnet mask:
255.255.255.0 DHCP Specifies whether your endpoint assigns IP addresses to devices connected to it. This parameter is selected by default. NOTE If you select this parameter, you must also set Start IP address and End IP address. Specify the IP address segment for the devices connected to your endpoint. Default values:
Start IP address:
192.168.2.10 End IP address:
192.168.2.100 Start IP address End IP address Step 3 Select Save. In the Connected devices list box, you can view the MAC and IP addresses of all the devices connected to your endpoint.
----End 3.2 Connecting to a 4E1 Network Only the TE60 supports 4E1 functions. To implement video communication over a 4E1-line dedicated network, you must connect the TE60 to the network. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 3 Network Do not connect outdoor cables directly to the TE60. If outdoor E1 lines (unbalanced) are led indoors, surge protectors are required. Any questions, contact technical support personnel. The connection of E1 lines must comply with grounding specifications. For details, see A E1/T1 Grounding Criteria. A 4E1 interface card provides four balanced-output ports. If the TE60 has a 4E1 interface card installed, connect the TE60 to a 4E1-line dedicated network. The ports of a 4E1 interface card can be used for any of the four E1 lines. There is no mapping between the ports and the four E1 lines on the local and the remote ends, so the lines can be connected to any of the ports at the local and remote ends, as long as all the four lines are connected. 3.2.1 Inserting a 4E1 Interface Card To hold conferences over a 4E1 network, you must insert a 4E1 interface card into the corresponding interface slot at the back of the TE60. For safety reasons, insert the interface card only when the TE60 is powered off. Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of a 4E1 interface card, for your reference only. Figure 3-1 4E1 interface card 1 Captive screw 2 4E1 port (RJ45) 3 Edge connector Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 3 Network To avoid damage to the interface card, implement antistatic measures before touching the card, such as wearing an ESD wrist strap, as shown in Figure 3-2. Figure 3-2 Wearing an ESD wrist strap Insert the interface card, as shown in Figure 3-3. Figure 3-3 Inserting an interface card Procedure 1. Loosen the two screws and remove the cover panel of the interface card slot. 2. Take out the interface card from its package. Slide the interface card into the card slot while keeping the side with components facing upwards. 3. Fasten the screws on the interface card. 3.2.2 Checking Status Indicators on the 4E1 Ports The status indicators on the 4E1 ports can quickly provide information about the current network connection. There are two indicators on the 4E1 port to indicate the network connection, as shown in Table 3-8. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 3 Network Table 3-8 Status indicator on the 4E1 port Indicator Status Connection Status The orange indicator is on. The lines are connected and the clocks on the lines are synchronous. The green indicator is on. A call can be placed. 3.2.3 Setting 4E1 Parameters If 4E1 lines are used for video communication, you must set 4E1 parameters such as the account, password, clock mode, signaling mode, and sensitivity. Prerequisites Context Procedure Before setting 4E1 parameters, ensure that 4E1 lines are used by the TE60. If the TE60 has a 4E1 interface card installed, the TE60 automatically detects the interface card type and displays the corresponding configuration screen. For parameter details, contact your network service provider. If 4E1 lines are faulty and if automatic backup is available, the endpoint uses the backup line preferentially, and then reduces the conference rate automatically. The endpoint can perform automatic backup, automatic rate reduction, or automatic rate increase in one second. During the process, erratic display may occur on the video and noise may exist. After two seconds, however, the video and the audio will be recovered and the conference rate remains unchanged. Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Network > 4E1/E1. Set the parameters listed in Table 3-9. Table 3-9 4E1 parameters Parame ter Account Passwor d Clock mode Description Setting Specifies the user name and password the TE60 uses to place an H.320 call. Obtain the user name and password from the videoconferencing system administrator. Specifies the clock mode used by the TE60. The following clock modes are available:
Preferred clock: The TE60 uses its internal clock and provides the clock to the endpoint connected to its 4E1 port. To place a point-to-point call, set Clock If the TE60 is connected to an MCU, set the MCU clock as the master clock and the TE60 clock as the slave clock. If the TE60 is connected to another endpoint, set one endpoint's clock as the master clock and the other's to slave clock. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 3 Network Parame ter Description Setting mode for either endpoint to Preferred clock. Alternate clock 1/Alternate clock 2/Alternate clock 3/Alternate clock 4: The TE60 obtains a clock from any of these lines. Signalin g mode Specifies the transmission mode for 4E1 signaling. To use channel associated signaling, select CAS. The Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) is used to test the network quality, and CRC results indicate frame error rates. When you select an option that contains 4 CRC, the TE60 tests the network for bit errors. Sensitivi ty Specifies the sensitivity of the receive equalizer. Set this parameter based on the length of the 4E1 line used between the TE60 and the nearest network node such as a switch. To use common channel signaling, select CCS. If the length of the 4E1 line used between the TE60 and the nearest network node exceeds 100 meters, select Long line. If the length of the 4E1 line used between the TE60 and the nearest network node is less than 100 meters, you can select Long line or Short line. Long line is recommended because it provides a higher sensitivity. Step 2 Select Save.
----End Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Display Device and Camera 4 Display Device and Camera About This Chapter To bring an impressive video experience, correctly connect video input and output devices to the video input and output ports on the endpoint and set the video input and output parameters. 4.1 Connecting a Display Device When connecting display devices to the endpoint, choose cables based on the related ports. 4.2 Configuring a Display Device Correctly setting video output parameters and adjusting video display parameters enable a display device to deliver superior video quality. 4.3 Connecting a Camera You can view the video delivered by a camera only after correctly connecting the camera to the endpoint and setting the required video input parameters. 4.4 Configuring Video Input Correct video input settings enable your endpoint to properly display video input from the video input ports. 4.5 Selecting and Controlling a Camera If you have connected multiple video devices to the video input ports, you must select local and remote video sources from these devices. Then, you can control the local and remote cameras to view the desired video. 4.6 Setting Camera Presets Camera presets are camera positions you store ahead of time. Each camera preset stores the camera pan, tilt, and zoom (PTZ) settings. You can easily control the camera by switching between its presets. 4.1 Connecting a Display Device When connecting display devices to the endpoint, choose cables based on the related ports. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Display Device and Camera The video output formats vary according to port types. Table 4-1, Table 4-2, and Table 4-3 describe the video output ports on the endpoint. Table 4-1 Capabilities of the TE40's video output ports Port Name on the UI Port Numbe r on the Rear Panel Type Output Format Default Settings After Startup 1 HDMI DVI and HDMI By default, this port functions as the main output port, GUI port, and caption output port and is used to display the remote controlled UI, captions, and local video. This port can also be used to switch to combined pictures. 2 HDMI DVI and HDMI By default, this port functions as the auxiliary output port and is used to display the local video. When the Dual-screen function is enabled, this port is used to display the local or remote presentation if a presentation source is connected to this port and display a black screen if no presentation source is connected to this port. 3 VGA VGA and YPbPr By default, this port is used to display the local video. 1 MAIN OUT 2 HDMI OUT 3 VGA OUT Table 4-2 Capabilities of the TE50's video output ports Port Name on the UI Port Numbe r on the Rear Panel Type Output Format Default Settings After Startup 1 MAIN OUT 1 HDMI DVI and HDMI By default, this port functions as the main output port, GUI port, and caption output port and is used to display the remote controlled UI, captions, and local video. This port can Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Display Device and Camera Port Name on the UI Port Numbe r on the Rear Panel Type Output Format Default Settings After Startup 2 HDMI DVI and HDMI By default, this port also be used to switch to combined pictures. 2 HDMI OUT functions as the auxiliary output port and is used to display the local video. When the Dual-screen function is enabled, this port is used to display the local or remote presentation if a presentation source is connected to this port and display a black screen if no presentation source is connected to this port. VGA VGA and YPbPr By default, this port is used to display the local video. BNC SDI By default, this port is used to display the local video. By default, this port is used to display the local video. 3 VGA OUT 4 3G-SDI OUT 3 4 5 SD OUT 5 RCA CVBS Table 4-3 Capabilities of the TE60's video output ports Port Name on the UI Port Number on the Rear Panel Type Output Format Default Settings After Startup 1 MAIN OUT 1 DVI-I DVI, VGA, YPbPr, and HDMI By default, this port functions as the main output port, GUI port, and caption output port and is used to display the remote controlled UI, captions, and local video. This port can also be used to switch to combined pictures. 2 PC OUT 2 DVI-I DVI, VGA, YPbPr, and HDMI By default, this port functions as the auxiliary output port and is used to Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Display Device and Camera Port Name on the UI Port Number on the Rear Panel Type Output Format Default Settings After Startup HDMI DVI and HDMI display the local video. When the Dual-screen function is enabled, this port is used to display the local or remote presentation if a presentation source is connected to this port and display a black screen if no presentation source is connected to this port. NOTE If you select HDMI and DVI as the output signal source, these two ports deliver the same video. If you select another type of signal source, only the DVI-I port delivers videos. 2 SD OUT 2 (DVI-I port) DVI-I S-VIDEO and CVBS By default, this port is used to display the local video. Connect a display device to this port using a DVI-S-Video/VGA/CVBS cable. HDMI DVI and HDMI By default, this port is used BNC SDI to display the local video. By default, this port is used to display the local video. 3 DVR OUT 4 3G-SDI OUT 3 4 Selecting Between Ports When you connect the endpoint to one or more display devices, select ports based on the content you want to view. Connecting to one display device The 1 MAIN OUT port is recommended. Using the default endpoint settings, a display device connected to the 1 MAIN OUT port can show the local video, presentation, remote controlled UI, captions, and combined pictures. Connecting to two display devices To show the video and presentation independently on two display devices, connect the two display devices to the 1MAIN OUT and 2 PC OUT ports if you are using the TE60 and to the 1 MAIN OUT and 2 HDMI OUT ports if you are using the TE50 or TE40. A display device shows the local video when connected to the 1 MAIN OUT port and shows the presentation when connected to the 2 PC OUT port (or 2 HDMI OUT port). Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Display Device and Camera The Dual-screen parameter must be enabled in order for this to method to work. For details, see 4.2.1 Configuring Video Output. The preceding information describes the recommended connection methods for default endpoint settings. Select ports based on the actual settings of your endpoint and the capabilities of its video output ports. Selecting Between Cables Use the cable that is provided to connect a display device to the endpoint based on the content to be displayed and the port on the display device. Please use the cables provided with the endpoint. Other cables may not be able to ensure the desired quality. Contact the device supplier to purchase appropriate cables. For the details about how to connect cables, set the HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint V100R001C01 Quick Installation Guide. 4.2 Configuring a Display Device Correctly setting video output parameters and adjusting video display parameters enable a display device to deliver superior video quality. 4.2.1 Configuring Video Output After connecting all the video cables, correctly set the video output parameters, such as the output mode, resolution, refresh rate, and stretch mode, to deliver superior video quality. Background For details about the video output ports on various endpoint models, see 4.1 Connecting a Display Device. Table 4-4, Table 4-5, and Table 4-6 list the resolutions supported by the video output ports in each output mode. Although video is sharper at a higher resolution, the resolution you select must be supported by the display device used. Table 4-4 Available video resolutions in each output mode of TE40 Output Mode Video Resolution 1 MAIN OUT DVI 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p HDMI 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 2 HDMI OUT DVI 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Output Mode Video Resolution HDMI 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 4 Display Device and Camera 3 VGA OUT VGA 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, and 1080p YPbPr 720p, 1080i, and 1080p Table 4-5 Available video resolutions in each output mode of TE50 Output Mode Video Resolution 1 MAIN OUT DVI 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p HDMI 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 2 HDMI OUT DVI 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p HDMI 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 3 VGA OUT VGA 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, and 1080p YPbPr 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 4 3G-SDI OUT SDI 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 5 SD OUT CVBS NTSC and PAL Table 4-6 Available video resolutions in each output mode of TE60 Output Mode Video Resolution 1 MAIN OUT VGA YPbPr DVI 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, and 1080p 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Display Device and Camera Output Mode Video Resolution x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p HDMI 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 2 PC OUT VGA YPbPr DVI 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, and 1080p 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p HDMI 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 2 SD OUT CVBS NTSC and PAL S-VIDEO NTSC and PAL 3 DVR OUT DVI 800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600 x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p HDMI 720p, 1080i, and 1080p 4 3G-SDI OUT SDI 720p, 1080i, and 1080p Although video is smoother at a higher refresh rate, the refresh rate you select must be supported by the display device used. Table 4-7 lists the refresh rates available for each video resolution. Table 4-7 Available refresh rates for each resolution Video Resolution NTSC PAL 800 x 600 pixels 1024 x 768 pixels 1280 x 1024 pixels Refresh Rate (Hz) 60 50 56, 60, 72, 75, or 85 60, 70, 75, or 85 60, 75, or 85 UXGA (1600 x 60 Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Display Device and Camera Video Resolution 1200) 1920 x 1200 pixels Refresh Rate (Hz) 60 720p 60, if the output mode is VGA 50 or 60, if the output mode is DVI, YPbPr, or HDMI 1080i 1080p Procedure 50 or 60 60, if the output mode is VGA 24, 25, 30, 50, or 60, if the output mode is DVI, YPbPr, or HDMI Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Video > Common Settings > Video Output. Set the common video output parameters described in Table 4-8. Table 4-8 Common video output parameters Parameter Description Setting GUI Specifies the video output port for the remote controlled UI. The default value is 1 MAIN OUT. During a conference, you can configure your endpoint to display video on one display and the remote controlled UI on another display by setting this parameter to a value different from the value of Main output interface. Caption output Specifies the video output port for captions. The default value is 1 MAIN OUT. Main output interface NOTE This parameter takes effect only when the caption type is set to T.140. Specifies the main output port. Only the main output port supports combined picture output. For details about the combined picture function. The default value is 1 MAIN OUT. To ensure good video quality, retain the default value. Auxiliary output port Specifies the auxiliary output port for preferentially displaying presentation. The default value of TE60 is 2 PC OUT. The default value of TE40 or TE50 is 2 HDMI OUT. Do not set Main output interface and Auxiliary output port to the same Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43 4 Display Device and Camera Setting output port. The default value is Disable. Disable this parameter when only one display device is connected to the endpoint. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Parameter Description Dual-screen Specifies whether the endpoint displays the video and presentation on separate displays. When this parameter is disabled, the Auxiliary output port is used to display the local or remote presentation if a presentation source is connected to the Auxiliary output port and display the local or remote video if no presentation source is connected to the Auxiliary output port. When this parameter is enabled, the Auxiliary output port is used to display the local or remote presentation if a presentation source is connected to the Auxiliary output port and display a black screen if no presentation source is connected to the Auxiliary output port. Step 2 Select Save. Step 3 Choose Advanced > Settings > Video > Video Output. Set the advanced video output parameters described in Table 4-9. Table 4-9 Advanced video output parameters Parameter Description Setting Name Specifies the output port name to help you identify ports during a conference. The default value for the 1 MAIN OUT port is 1 MAIN OUT. The default value for the 2 PC OUT port (only TE60) is 2 PC OUT. The default value for the 2 HDMI OUT port (only TE40 and TE50) is 2 HDMI OUT. The default value for the 3 VGA OUT port (only TE40 and TE50) is 3 VGA OUT. The default value for the 3 DVR OUT port (only TE60) is 3 DVR OUT. The default value for the Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Display Device and Camera Parameter Description Setting 4 3G-SDI OUT port
(only TE50 and TE60) is 4 3G-SDI OUT. The default value for the 5 SD OUT port (only TE50) is 5 SD OUT. The default value for the 2 SD OUT port (only TE60) is 2 SD OUT. Default values:
1 MAIN OUT port: DVI 2 PC OUT port (only for the TE60): DVI 2 HDMI OUT port (only for the TE50 and TE40):
DVI 3 VGA OUT port (only for the TE50 and TE40):
VGA 3 DVR OUT port (only for the TE60): DVI 4 3G-SDI OUT port
(only for the TE50 and TE60): SDI 5 SD OUT port (only for the TE50): CVBS 2 SD OUT port (only for the TE60): CVBS The default value for the 5 SD OUT port (only TE50) is NTSC. The default value for the 2 SD OUT port (only TE60) is NTSC. The default value for other ports is 1080p. The default value is 60Hz. Output mode Specifies the format for the video received by the display. Output modes vary according to video output ports. For details, see Table 4-4, Table 4-5, and Table 4-6. Video resolution Specifies the resolution for each video output port. The available options vary depending on your settings of Output mode. Table 4-4, Table 4-5, and Table 4-6 list the resolutions supported by the video output ports in each output mode. Refresh rate Specifies the video refresh rate. The available options vary depending on your settings of Video resolution. Table 4-7 lists the refresh rates available for each video resolution. Stretch mode Specifies how to adjust the aspect ratio to fit the video into the screen. The default value is Stretch. Stretch: The aspect ratio is changeable. No stretch: The aspect ratio is not Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Display Device and Camera Parameter Description Setting changeable. Intelligent stretch: Your endpoint crops the video to an appropriate size and stretches the video to full screen with the original aspect ratio. For example, to change a wide-screen video to a narrow-screen video, your endpoint crops the left and right edges of the wide-screen video and stretches the video to till the screen. Automatic layout mode Specifies how your endpoint displays the video and presentation. The default value is Full screen. NOTE Only the main output port supports this parameter. Full screen: Your endpoint displays the video or presentation in full screen in the following priority sequence:
remote presentation, local presentation, remote video, and local video. PiP: The Picture in Picture (PiP) function is enabled to display the video and presentation. 2 panes: The video and presentation are displayed in two panes. 3 panes (a) or 3 panes (b): The video and presentation are displayed in three panes. Small window position Specifies the position of the PiP window on the screen. The default value is Lower right corner. This parameter is available only when Automatic layout mode is set to PiP. NOTE Only the main output port supports this parameter. Display local video Specify the content to be display through a port. Display remote video Display Presentation You can select these three parameters for video output ports, except Main output interface and Auxiliary output port. Choose whether to display the local and remote videos and presentations based on your needs. Step 4 Select Save.
----End Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4.2.2 Adjusting the Picture Offset 4 Display Device and Camera If you find that the displayed video deviates from its normal position, adjust the picture offset. Prerequisites Background Procedure A VGA or YPbPr video signal source is connected to the endpoint. VGA or YPbPr Image offset may occur in video input or output, such as when the computer desktop is displayed on the display. Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Video > Image Offset. Step 2 Select a video input or output port. You can adjust the picture offset only for a video input or output port to which a VGA or YPbPr video signal source is connected. The ports to which other video signal sources are connected are unavailable for adjustment. Step 3 Select Horizontal offset or Vertical offset and move the slider to make adjustments.
----End 4.2.3 Adjusting the Sampling Phase If a blurring or slight jitter issue occurs in the video shown on the display device, adjust the sampling phase. Prerequisites Background Procedure A VGA or YPbPr video signal source is connected to the endpoint. Images input through a VGA or YPbPr port, such as the computer desktop, may suffer from blurring or slight jitter. Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Video > Sampling Phase. Step 2 Select the video input port you want to adjust. You can adjust the sampling phase only for a video input port to which a VGA or YPbPr video signal source is connected. The ports to which other video signal sources are connected are unavailable for adjustment. Step 3 Move the slider to adjust the sampling phase.
----End Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4.2.4 Setting Video Parameters 4 Display Device and Camera If the endpoint is connected to a Huawei HD camera, you can set the camera video parameters, including the video mode, noise reduction, and video resolution. You can view the video result of your settings on the display device connected to your endpoint. Prerequisites Background Procedure A Huawei HD camera has been connected to a video input port on the endpoint. The video parameters you can set vary according to the camera model connected to the endpoint. Table 4-10 is for your reference only. To determine the camera model connected to the video input port, choose Advanced > Settings > Video > Video Input. Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Video > Video Parameters. Step 2 Select the desired video input port such as the 1 MAIN IN port. Set the video parameters described in Table 4-10. Table 4-10 Video parameters Parameter Description Setting Exposure mode Specifies the mode of using natural light. You can select either of the following modes:
The default value is Auto. Auto: The camera automatically selects the optimum configuration based on the surrounding environment. Manual: You need to manually adjust Brightness gain, Shutter speed, and Iris. Specifies the white balance to enable the camera to accurately recognize the color white and deliver more vivid videos. Red gain: adjusts the brightness of red signals. Blue gain: adjusts the brightness of blue signals. The default value is Auto. Specifies the output video display effect. The default value is Standard. Standard: reproduces video more faithfully. Vivid: delivers brighter video with cooler colors. Natural: delivers video with warmer colors. White balance Picture mode Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Display Device and Camera Parameter Description Setting User defined: delivers video with custom settings. After you select this option, you can set the following parameters. Aperture: sharpens video edges and contours to preserve the impression of clarity and fine details. Over-sharpening will make video less realistic. Brightness: specifies the video output level that changes the brightness of the video displayed on the monitor. Hue: adjusts the video color. Saturation: adjusts the gray scale of each color. The higher the saturation, the brighter a color. Noise reduction Removes noise artifacts from video. A larger value causes the video to have less noise but detail may also be lost. The default value is Low. Specifies whether the camera automatically sets the video output resolution. The default value is Disable. Specifies the video output resolution for the camera. This parameter is available only when Set output resolution automatically is set to Disable. Specifies whether the video input from the camera is rotated by 180 degrees. When the camera is hung, set this parameter to Enable. The default value is 1080p 60Hz. The default value is Disable. Set output resolution automaticall y Video resolution Image inversion
----End 4.2.5 Switching Between Screen Layouts By adjusting the screen layout, you can view multiple videos on the same display device. Only the main output port supports combined picture output. For details, see Table 4-8 in 4.2.1 Configuring Video Output. To adjust the screen layout, use either of the following methods:
When the endpoint is not in use in a conference, press on the remote control to switch between the Picture in Picture (PiP) and two-pane modes. When the endpoint is in Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Display Device and Camera use in a conference, press PiP, two-pane, and three-pane modes. on the remote control to switch between the full screen, When the endpoint is in use in a conference, select from the option bar and select a desired layout from the following:
Remote video in full screen Local video in full screen Combination of the local video, remote video, local presentation, and remote presentation in PiP, two-pane, or three-pane mode Figure 4-1 Screen layout example Figure 4-1 is for your reference. Icons displayed in the rectangle vary according to endpoint status. For example, the local and remote presentation icons are displayed only when the following conditions are met:
A presentation source is connected to your site. When this happens, the icon for the local presentation is displayed. Your site receives a presentation shared by a remote site. When this happens, the icon for the remote presentation is displayed. The icon for the local presentation disappears if the local presentation source is disconnected from the endpoint. The icon for the remote presentation disappears if the remote presentation sharing stops. Before a conference starts, you can set the position of the PiP window on the screen. For details, see Table 4-9 in 4.2.1 Configuring Video Output. 4.3 Connecting a Camera You can view the video delivered by a camera only after correctly connecting the camera to the endpoint and setting the required video input parameters. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Display Device and Camera The endpoint supports various camera models, including the HUAWEI VPC600 HD camera
(VPC600), HUAWEI VPC620 HD camera (VPC620), ViewPoint C500 HD camera (C500), HUAWEI VPC500 HD camera (VPC500), HUAWEI VPC520 HD camera (VPC520), HUAWEI VPC500S camera (VPC500S), HUAWEI VPC500E camera (VPC500E), SONY EVI-HD1, SONY EVI-D100, SONY EVI-D70, SONY D30/D31, SONY BRC-300P, SONY BRC-H700, SONY BRC-Z330, CANON V50, CANON VCC1, CANON VCC4, 3CCD, C200, GTP CAM, KX, PELCO, PTC100, SYYT, TAC, VCC-SW80P, and VCC-HD90P. Table 4-11, Table 4-12, and Table 4-13 list the capabilities of the video input ports. Table 4-11 Capabilities of the TE40's video input ports Port Name on the UI Port Numbe r on the Rear Panel Type Receivable Input Format Control Description 1 MAIN IN 1 HD-VI 2 PC IN 2 VGA HDMI DVI(HW), HDMI(HW), and YPbPr(HW) VGA and YPbPr DVI and HDMI Camera PTZ None Camera PTZ Camera PTZ The VGA and HDMI Port ports are mutually exclusive and cannot be used at the same time. Table 4-12 Capabilities of the TE50's video input ports Port Name on the UI Port Numbe r on the Rear Panel Type Receivable Input Format Control Description 1 MAIN IN 1 RCA CVBS HD-VI 2 PC IN 2 VGA HDMI DVI(HW), HDMI(HW), and YPbPr(HW) VGA and YPbPr DVI and HDMI Camera PTZ Camera PTZ The RCA and HD-VI ports are mutually exclusive and cannot be used at the same time. Camera PTZ Camera PTZ The VGA and HDMI Port ports are mutually exclusive and cannot be used at the same time. 3 3G-SDI IN 3 BNC SDI Camera None Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Port Name on the UI Port Numbe r on the Rear Panel 4 Display Device and Camera Type Receivable Input Format Control Description PTZ Table 4-13 Capabilities of the TE60's video input ports Port Name on the UI Port Numbe r on the Rear Panel Type Receivable Input Format Control Description 1 MAIN IN 1 DVI-I HD-VI 2 PC IN 2 DVI-I Display Port VGA, YPbPr, DVI, HDMI, CVBS, and S-VIDEO DVI(HW), HDMI(HW), and YPbPr(HW) VGA, YPbPr, DVI, and HDMI Camera PTZ Camera PTZ Camera PTZ DP and HDMI Camera PTZ Camera PTZ The DVI-I and HD-VI ports are mutually exclusive and cannot be used at the same time. The DVI-I and Display Port ports are mutually exclusive and cannot be used at the same time. The HDMI and HD-VI ports are mutually exclusive and cannot be used at the same time. 3 AUX IN 3 HDMI DVI and HDMI HD-VI DVI(HW) and HDMI(HW) Camera PTZ 4 3G-SDI IN 4 BNC SDI Camera PTZ None Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Display Device and Camera PTZ is an acronym for Pan, Tilt, and Zoom. A PTZ camera supports panning, tilting, and zooming control. The HD-VI port can only be connected to the HUAWEI VPC600 or VPC620. After connecting this port to the HUAWEI VPC600 or VPC620, you can perform PTZ controls on and supply power to the HUAWEI VPC600 or VPC620 without additional cables. If you connect a port other than the HD-VI port to the camera, you must connect the cable used for transmitting VISCA control signals to the COM port on your endpoint to perform PTZ controls on the camera. Each input port to be used for transmitting a video or a presentation can be specified on the user interface. For details, see section 6.1.1 Designating the Dual Streams. Select a video input port on your endpoint based on the video format supported by the camera. Then connect the camera to your endpoint using the cable provided. 4.4 Configuring Video Input Correct video input settings enable your endpoint to properly display video input from the video input ports. Procedure Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Video > Video Input. Set the video input parameters described in Table 4-14. Table 4-14 Video input parameters Parameter Description Setting Name Specifies the video input port name to help you identify ports during a conference. Camera type Specifies the type of the camera connected. The endpoint supports cameras of multiple manufacturers and models. Serial port Specifies the serial port that is connected to the camera control interface. You can select either COM1 or COM2. Do not leave this parameter blank. Enter a string of 1 to 64 characters. The default value is VPC600/VPC620. The control commands vary with different cameras. Therefore, select the camera type correctly to ensure that the camera can be controlled properly. The default value for the 1 MAIN IN port is COM2 while that for other video input ports is None. Select the serial port that is being used. Otherwise, the camera cannot be controlled. Initial position Specifies the position of the camera after startup. The default value is Auto. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Display Device and Camera Parameter Description Setting Auto: The camera moves to its initial position after startup. Preset 1: The camera moves to the preset after startup. NOTE Each camera preset stores the pan, tilt, and zoom settings of the camera. For how to set presets, see 4.6 Setting Camera Presets. Moving speed Specifies the movement and zoom speed for the camera at your site. The default value is Medium. Mirroring Select Slow for accurate positioning. Select Fast for quick positioning. Select Medium for medium paced positioning. Specifies whether the endpoint displays a reflection of an input video, wherein the right and left sides of the original are reversed. Normal: The input video will not be reversed. Horizontal: The endpoint displays a reflection of the input video, wherein the right and left sides of the original are reversed like the reflection of something seen in a mirror. The default value is Normal. Input source Specifies the input source format. The default value is Auto. 1080p PsF conversion When the camera connected to the endpoint uses the Progressive segmented Frame (PsF) mode for transmitting signals, enable this function. The default value is Disable. The default value is No stretch. Stretch mode Specifies how your endpoint adjusts the input video based on the video encoding format. Stretch: Stretch the video to full screen with an unfixed aspect ratio. No stretch: Stretch the video to full screen with a fixed aspect ratio. Black borders may appear at the upper and lower or left and right edges of the display. Intelligent stretch: Crop the video to an appropriate size and stretch the video to full screen with the original aspect ratio. For example, to change a wide-screen video to a narrow-screen video, your endpoint crops the left and right edges of the wide-screen Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Display Device and Camera Parameter Description Setting video and stretches the video to till the screen. Step 2 Select Save.
----End 4.5 Selecting and Controlling a Camera If you have connected multiple video devices to the video input ports, you must select local and remote video sources from these devices. Then, you can control the local and remote cameras to view the desired video. Selecting a Camera If the endpoint is not in use during a conference, only the local camera can be selected. If the endpoint is in use during a conference, both the local and remote cameras can be selected. Choose Advanced Settings > Settings > Video > Common Settings > Video Input. Set Video Source Management to Allow. Select a camera as follows:
Press lower right corner of the screen. on the remote control and select the desired camera from the list displayed in the The text in the upper left corner indicates the camera that is currently being controlled (local or remote). Press on the remote control to toggle between the local and remote cameras. Adjusting the Focal Length You can change the magnification of distant objects by adjusting the focal length of the camera. Step 1 On the option bar, select
. Step 2 Select Adjust Focus and adjust the focal length.
----End Controlling a Camera You can control pan, tilt, and zoom (PTZ) actions for a local or remote camera. Before controlling a remote camera, ensure that Remote control has been set correctly for the remote site. Choose Advanced Settings > Settings > Video > Common Settings > Video Input. Set Remote control to Allow. Step 1 Press on the remote control. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Display Device and Camera Step 2 On the camera control screen, perform any of the following:
Press navigation keys on the remote control to turn the camera lens. Press to zoom in or to zoom out. The text in the upper left corner indicates the camera that is currently being controlled (local or remote). Press on the remote control to toggle between the local and remote cameras.
----End 4.6 Setting Camera Presets Camera presets are camera positions you store ahead of time. Each camera preset stores the camera pan, tilt, and zoom (PTZ) settings. You can easily control the camera by switching between its presets. If a camera supports PTZ functions, you can create and save a maximum of 30 camera presets. A camera preset remains valid until it is deleted or changed. Table 4-15 lists camera preset specifications. Table 4-15 Camera preset specifications Endpoin t Number of Camera Presets Whether Data Is Lost After Restart Local 30 Remote 6 No Yes Saving a Camera Preset A camera preset stores the camera PTZ settings. If you select a preset number that has already been saved as another preset, the new camera preset replaces the exiting one. To save a camera preset:
Step 1 Set the camera lens position. For details, see 4.5 Selecting and Controlling a Camera. Step 2 On the option bar, select
, Save Preset, and then a number. Press on the remote control to save the camera preset to the selected number.
----End Moving a Camera to a Preset If you have saved camera presets for the endpoint, you can tap a preset number to apply that preset to the camera. To move a selected camera to a camera preset:
Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 4 Display Device and Camera Step 1 On the option bar, select then Switch Preset. Step 2 Select a camera preset number and press the remote control to apply that preset to the camera.
----End Deleting a Camera Preset To delete a camera preset, select the preset number and press on the remote control. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 5 Microphone and Speaker 5 Microphone and Speaker About This Chapter Before using the endpoint, ensure that the microphones and speakers are correctly connected to the endpoint and that the audio parameters are correctly set. 5.1 Connecting an Audio Input Device Before connecting the endpoint to an audio input device, you need to know each audio input port so you can make connections quickly and correctly. 5.2 Connecting an Audio Output Device Knowledge of audio interfaces on the endpoint and the various types of audio interfaces can help in quickly and correctly connecting an audio output device to an audio output interface on the endpoint. 5.3 Connecting a Tuning Console If a conference room requires multiple microphones or already has a tuning console for controlling microphones, you can connect the tuning console to the endpoint as the endpoint's audio input source. 5.4 Adjusting Audio Effects You can adjust the audio effects, such as the audio input, sound effect, and volume. 5.5 Enjoying Stereo Audio In dual-audio-channel mode, stereo effect audio can be enjoyed allowing users to accurately locate the direction from which the sound comes, gaining a true-to-life experience. 5.1 Connecting an Audio Input Device Before connecting the endpoint to an audio input device, you need to know each audio input port so you can make connections quickly and correctly. Table 5-1, Table 5-2, and Table 5-3 describe various audio input ports and their supported audio sources. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Table 5-1 TE40's audio input ports Audio Input Port Type 5 Microphone and Speaker Supported Audio Feature MIC 1 RCA L RCA R XLR (cannon connector) One channel of analog audio input RCA (RCA connector) Left channel for line input RCA (RCA connector) Right channel for line input MIC HD-AI Microphone array port VPM220 microphone array PSTN PSTN port PSTN signal Table 5-2 TE50's audio input ports Audio Input Port Type Supported Audio Feature MIC 1 XLR (cannon connector) One channel of analog audio input LINE IN L 3.5 mm audio port Left channel for line input LINE IN R 3.5 mm audio port Right channel for line input RCA L RCA R RCA (RCA connector) Left channel for line input RCA (RCA connector) Right channel for line input MIC HD-AI Microphone array port VPM220 microphone array PSTN PSTN port PSTN signal Table 5-3 TE60's audio input ports Audio Input Port Type Supported Audio Feature MIC 1 MIC 2 RCA L RCA R XLR (cannon connector) One channel of analog audio input XLR (cannon connector) One channel of analog audio input RCA (RCA connector) Left channel for line input RCA (RCA connector) Right channel for line input MIC HD-AI Microphone array port VPM220 microphone array PSTN PSTN port PSTN signal 5.1.1 Connecting a VPM220 The endpoint can be used with a HUAWEI VPM220 microphone array (VPM220). Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 5 Microphone and Speaker When installing a VPM220, do not point any microphone towards the speaker. Status Indicators on the VPM220 VPM220 status indicators quickly provide working status information. There are three indicators on top of the VPM220 at an interval of 120. Table 5-4 describes these three indicators. Table 5-4 VPM220 status indicators Indicator Status VPM220 Status All red All blue Microphones in all the three directions are muted. Microphones in all the three directions are unmuted or working correctly. All blue and blinking in turn clockwise The VPM220 is connecting to the endpoint. All off The VPM220 is in sleep mode or disconnected from its power supply. For more information, see the HUAWEI VPM220 Microphone Array User Guide and HUAWEI VPM220 Microphone Array Quick Start Guide. VPM220 Cascading The VPM220 provides 360 sound pickup and an optimal pickup range of six meters. In a large conference room (of about 40 to 50 square meters) with only one VPM220, audio far from the VPM220 becomes problematic; cascaded VPM220s can help alleviate this problem. Dynamically cascading, connecting, or disconnecting VPM220s will not interrupt a conference. The TE40 and TE50 can be connected to only one VPM220 while the TE60 can be connected to two cascaded VPM220s. Figure 5-1 shows the cascading of VPM220s. Figure 5-1 Cascading of VPM220s Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Using the Stereo Mode 5 Microphone and Speaker To obtain better stereo effect, configure the mode for cascading VPM220s and their positions based on the actual conditions in your conference room. Choose Advanced > Settings > Conference > Advanced and set the VPM220 mono or stereo mode. Table 5-5 describes each mode. Table 5-5 VPM220 mono and stereo modes Mode Mono Audio Protocol G.719, G.729A, G.711A/U, G.722, G.728, and G.7221C (at any rate) AAC-LD or HWA-LD when mono mode is enabled Stereo AAC-LD or HWA-LD when stereo mode is enabled When multiple VPM220s are cascaded or when a single VPM220 works in mono mode, all the microphones in the VPM220 collect sounds. The VPM220 automatically transmits to the endpoint the best quality sound collected by one of the microphones. Figure 5-2 shows the application of left and right audio channels when a single VPM220 works in stereo mode. L: The microphones are used to collect sounds for the left audio channel. R: The microphones are used to collect sounds for the right audio channel. N: No microphone is used. (The Huawei logo on the VPM220 should point to the display device.) Figure 5-2 A single VPM220 working in stereo mode To set the mode for cascading VPM220s:
Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Audio. Step 2 Based on the actual conditions in the conference room, set Microphone array position to Horizontal or Vertical. The default value is Horizontal. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Step 3 Select Save.
----End 5.1.2 Connecting a VPM220W 5 Microphone and Speaker The endpoint can be connected to a HUAWEI VPM220W wireless microphone array
(VPM220W) over a Wi-Fi network. The TE50 and TE40 can be connected to only one VPM220W while the TE60 can be connected to one or two VPM220Ws. When installing a VPM220W, do not point any microphone towards the speaker. Status Indicators on the VPM220W VPM220W status indicators quickly provide VPM220W working status. There are five indicators on top of the VPM220W and a charging status indicator on the charger base. Table 5-6 describes these indicators. Table 5-6 Status indicators on the VPM220W Indicator Status VPM220W Work Status All three microphone indicators are steady red. All three microphone indicators are steady blue. All three microphone indicators are off. All the three microphones are turned off. All the three microphones are turned on. The power switch of the VPM220W is turned off. All three microphone indicators are blue on and off gradually. The VPM220W is in sleep state. All three microphone indicators are blinking blue in a clockwise direction. The VPM220W is connecting to the videoconferencing endpoint. All three microphone indicators are blinking blue twice simultaneously. The VPM220W is restarting. The VPM220W is preparing to send a videoconferencing endpoint a request for Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) Push Button Configuration (PBC) authentication. All three microphone indicators are blinking blue simultaneously. The VPM220W is upgrading. All three microphone indicators are blinking red twice in a clockwise direction. The VPM220W is about to power off. The Wi-Fi indicator is off. The VPM220W is powered off. The Wi-Fi indicator is steady red. The VPM220W is connecting to a videoconferencing endpoint over Wi-Fi, and the Wi-Fi signal is strong. The VPM220W is connecting to a videoconferencing endpoint over Wi-Fi, and Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 5 Microphone and Speaker Indicator Status VPM220W Work Status the Wi-Fi signal is weak. The Wi-Fi indicator is blinking red. The VPM220W is searching for Wi-Fi hotspots. The battery indicator is off. The battery level is sufficient (the battery The battery indicator is steady red. can run another 30 minutes or more). The VPM220W is powered off. The battery level is insufficient (the battery can run less than 30 minutes). The charging status indicator is blue and is in breathing state. The VPM220W is being recharged. The charging status indicator is steady blue. The VPM220W is fully charged. The charging status indicator is off. The VPM220W is not placed on the charger base. The VPM200W's power adapter is not connected to an AC power supply. For more information, see the HUAWEI VPM220W Microphone Array V100R001 Quick Start Guide and HUAWEI VPM220W Microphone Array V100R001 User Guide. Connecting the VPM220W to the Endpoint TThe endpoint can be connected over a Wi-Fi network to a VPM220W for sound pickup. Before connecting the VPM220W to the endpoint, you must enable the Wi-Fi hotspot and set Wi-Fi parameters as follows:
Set Identity authentication mode to WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK. Enable DHCP and set Start IP address and End IP address. For details, see Setting Wi-Fi Hotspot Parameters. To connect the VPM220W to the endpoint:
Step 1 Press the power button at the bottom of the VPM220W to power it on. The VPM220W automatically searches for an available Wi-Fi network. If the VPM220W was once connected to the endpoint, the connection between these two will automatically set up, so you can skip the following steps. If you are using the VPM220W for the first time or moving it outside the connected Wi-Fi network range, go to Step 2 and Step 3. Step 2 Hold and press the button on top of the VPM220W for at least 3 seconds. A confirmation dialog box is displayed on the remote controlled UI. Step 3 Select OK. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 5 Microphone and Speaker The VPM220W then performs the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) Push Button Configuration
(PBC) authentication with the videoconferencing endpoint in order to obtain an IP address.
----End 5.1.3 Setting Audio Parameters Before using your endpoint to join a conference, set the audio parameters to gain the best possible audio experience. Procedure Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Audio. Set the audio parameters described in Table 5-7. Table 5-7 Audio input parameters Parameter Description Setting These parameters are selected by default. These parameters are selected by default. These parameters are selected by default. MIC 1 MIC 2 (available only for the TE60) RCA L RCA R HDMI L HDMI R Adjusts the microphone volume at your site. When you adjust this microphone volume, the volume heard at remote sites is adjusted accordingly. Adjusts the input volume of the RCA port at your site. When you adjust this input volume, the volume heard at remote sites is adjusted accordingly. Adjusts the input volume of the HDMI port at your site. When you adjust this input volume, the volume heard at remote sites is adjusted accordingly. NOTE If you are using the TE40 or TE50, this parameter is available only when you select the 2 PC IN port as the HDMI input source. If you are using the TE60, this parameter is available only when you select the 3 AUX IN port as the HDMI input source. DP L (available only for the TE60) DP R (available only for the TE60) Adjusts the input volume of the DP port at your site. When you adjust this input volume, the volume heard at remote sites is adjusted accordingly. This parameter is selected by default. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 5 Microphone and Speaker Parameter Description Setting LINE IN L (available only for the TE50) LINE IN R (available only for the TE50) PSTN Gain NOTE This parameter is available only when you select the 2 PC IN port of the TE60 as the DP input source. Adjusts the input volume of the LINE IN port at your site. When you adjust this input volume, the volume heard at remote sites is adjusted accordingly. Adjusts the volume of a PSTN call at your site. When you adjust this volume, the volume heard at remote sites is adjusted accordingly. Adjusts the volume for the MIC 1, MIC 2, RCA L, RCA R, HDMI L, HDMI R, DP L, DP R, LINE IN L, LINE IN R, and PSTN ports. These parameters are selected by default. This parameter is selected by default. Value range: -12 dB to +12 dB The default value is +0dB. Volume indicator Displays volume in real time. No default value is set for this parameter. No default value is set for this parameter. The default value is All audio inputs. Microphone array battery level Displays the microphone array battery level in real time. Switch controls MIC array only: Your endpoint can receive audio signals collected by audio input devices, excluding the microphone array, when you turn off the microphone array. All audio inputs: Your endpoint cannot receive audio signals collected by any audio input devices when you turn off the microphone array. To enable your endpoint to receive audio signals again, perform any of the following:
Press the button on the microphone array to enable this function. Press the microphone button on the remote control to turn on the Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 5 Microphone and Speaker Parameter Description Setting microphone array only or all audio input devices, depending on your settings of Switch controls. On the endpoint web interface, choose Device Control > Audio Control and select the audio input ports you want to enable. On the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced >
Settings > Audio > Audio Input and select the audio input ports you want to enable. Microphone array position Specifies the arrangement of cascaded microphone arrays. Set this parameter based on the number and arrangement of microphone arrays. For details, see Using the Stereo Mode.
----End 5.2 Connecting an Audio Output Device Knowledge of audio interfaces on the endpoint and the various types of audio interfaces can help in quickly and correctly connecting an audio output device to an audio output interface on the endpoint. 5.2.1 Connecting a Speaker Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT RCA L/R port and the audio input port of a display device using an audio cable. In this way, the endpoint can use the built-in speaker of the display device (for example, a television which is usually equipped with a speaker) or it can be connected to an external speaker system, wherein the volume can be increased and a better audio effect can be obtained. Use an audio cable to connect the AUDIO OUTPUT L/SPDIF port to a speaker to provide high-fidelity audio quality. 5.2.2 Placing an External Speaker If the endpoint is connected to an external speaker, correctly placing the speaker helps to achieve the expected audio quality. Note the following when placing an external speaker:
If you are using a unidirectional microphone, the speaker and microphone must not face one another. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 5 Microphone and Speaker If you are using an omnidirectional microphone, the distance between the speaker and microphone must be more than 1 meter. 5.2.3 Adjusting the Speaker Volume Press volume heard only at the local site. to increase the volume or to decrease the volume. The adjustment affects the 5.3 Connecting a Tuning Console If a conference room requires multiple microphones or already has a tuning console for controlling microphones, you can connect the tuning console to the endpoint as the endpoint's audio input source. Connect the output interface of the tuning console to the RCA L/R audio input interface of the endpoint using an RCA audio cable. 5.4 Adjusting Audio Effects You can adjust the audio effects, such as the audio input, sound effect, and volume. Background Procedure For details about how to adjust the audio input, see 5.1.3 Setting Audio Parameters. This section only describes how to adjust the sound effect and the volume. Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Audio and then set the parameters listed in Table 5-8 and Table 5-9. Table 5-8 Sound effect parameters Parameter Description Setting Ringtone Specifies the ringtone for incoming calls. Locally output sound from AUDIO IN Specifies whether to allow the audio input from the LINE IN port, the HDMI port or the RCA port to be heard at your site. The default value is Default. This parameter is not selected by default. AUDIO IN remote output Specifies whether to allow the audio input from the LINE IN port, the HDMI port or the RCA port to be heard at remote sites. This parameter is selected by default. Mix PSTN audio Specifies whether all the participants
(including PSTN participants such as mobile phones) in a a multipoint conference can hear each other. This parameter is selected by default. Retain the default value when the endpoint joins a multipoint Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Parameter Description SPDIF switch Specifies whether you can hear sound from the local S/PDIF digital audio port at your site. 5 Microphone and Speaker Setting conference as a PSTN participant. This parameter is not selected by default. Bass Middle Treble Adjusts the equalizers by moving the sliders. Value range: -6 dB to
+6 dB The default value is
+0dB. Table 5-9 Volume parameters Parameter Description Setting Speaker volume Left Right Alert tone volume Adjusts the speaker volume. To hear other sites, unmute the speaker. Otherwise, mute the speaker. Displays the current volume of the speaker's left and right audio channels. Adjusts the alert tone volume. Press navigation keys on the remote control to move the slider. Value range: 0-15 The default value is 15. No default value is set for this parameter. Press navigation keys on the remote control to move the slider. Value range: 0-3 The default value is 3. Step 2 Select Save.
----End 5.5 Enjoying Stereo Audio In dual-audio-channel mode, stereo effect audio can be enjoyed allowing users to accurately locate the direction from which the sound comes, gaining a true-to-life experience. Background For details about the VPM220, see 5.1.1 Connecting a VPM220. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Procedure 5 Microphone and Speaker Step 1 Connect the endpoint to a microphone and a stereo acoustic system. During a conference, move the microphone only when required. Otherwise, the quality of the stereo audio heard by remote sites is affected. Step 2 Choose Advanced > Settings > Audio > Audio Input. Select audio input sources. All available audio input sources are selected by default. When the VPM220 is connected to the HD-AI port on the endpoint, you do not need to set the stereo parameter, as the VPM220 works in dual-audio-channel mode. Step 3 Select Save to return to the Settings screen. Step 4 On the Settings screen, choose Conference > Advanced Settings and set Audio protocol to AAC_LD or HWA-LD. Then, set Audio channels to Two.
----End Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6 Conference 6 Conference About This Chapter You can create a conference or answer an incoming call to join a conference. 6.1 Experiencing a Dual-Stream Conference During a dual-stream conference, two independent video stream channels, that is, the video and the presentation, can be transmitted; furthermore, two channels of video from the local site can be transmitted or two channels of video from a remote site can be received at the same time. 6.2 Experiencing an MSUC Conference Huawei videoconferencing systems can be used in the Microsoft Unified Communications
(MSUC) environment. Register the endpoint (networked with MSUC) with a Lync Server using SIP. After that, the endpoint can place calls to Lync clients, receive calls from Lync clients, and view Lync clients' online status. 6.3 Joining an Authentication Conference If you do not know how many sites are expected to join the conference, set the number of anonymous sites and hold an authentication conference. A site can join the authentication conference by calling the specified conference access number. 6.4 Joining an HD-Video Conference over an IMS Network The endpoint can join an HD video conference over an IMS network. 6.5 Scheduling a Conference On your endpoint, you can schedule a specific time to hold a conference. 6.6 Controlling a Conference During a multipoint conference, you can control the video and audio of the participating sites using conference control functions. 6.7 Recording a Conference Your endpoint can record conferences if your site is the chair site. 6.8 Managing the Address Book The address book stores site information. You can add, edit, and delete site entries. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6.9 Managing Captions 6 Conference You can create a caption on your endpoint. In addition, you can share the caption with remote sites during a conference. 6.1 Experiencing a Dual-Stream Conference During a dual-stream conference, two independent video stream channels, that is, the video and the presentation, can be transmitted; furthermore, two channels of video from the local site can be transmitted or two channels of video from a remote site can be received at the same time. 6.1.1 Designating the Dual Streams You need to choose the input sources and output destinations for the video and presentation. Background If multiple video-source devices are connected to the video input ports on the endpoint, you can choose a channel of video as the source of the local video and another channel as the source of the local presentation. The endpoint adopts difference policies to deliver the video and presentation based on on-site situations:
In single-screen display mode, if no presentation is shared during a conference, remote sites view the conference video of the local site; if a presentation is shared, both the local and remote sites view the presentation. In dual-screen mode, the display device connected to the main output port delivers the video while the display device connected to the auxiliary output port delivers the presentation. During the layout switch in combined picture or continuous presence mode, remote sites can always view the conference video of the local site. Selecting the Video Source Choose Advanced > Settings > Video > Common Settings > Video Input. On the displayed screen, set Video Source to a video feed. Selecting the Presentation Source Choose Advanced > Settings > Video > Common Settings > Video Input. On the displayed screen, set Presentation Source to a video feed. Selecting the Output Destinations for the Video and Presentation By default, the endpoint comes with one display device and uses the main output port to deliver both the video and presentation. If two display devices are connected to the endpoint, you can set the endpoint to separately display the video and presentation on the two display devices. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6 Conference One display device: Based on the default endpoint settings, the display device connected to the 1 MAIN OUT port can show the video, presentation, remote controlled UI, captions, and combined pictures. Two display devices: To show the video and presentation independently on two display devices, connect the two to the 1MAIN OUT and 2 PC OUT ports if you are using the TE60 or to the 1 MAIN OUT and 2 HDMI OUT ports if you are using the TE50 or TE40. A display device shows the video when connected to the 1 MAIN OUT port and shows the presentation when connected to the 2 PC OUT port (or 2 HDMI OUT port). The Dual-screen parameter must be enabled in order for this to work. For details, see 4.2.1 Configuring Video Output. 6.1.2 Sharing a Presentation A computer can be connected to the endpoint to share files, and the remote sites can view both your video and the desktop contents of the computer. Prerequisites Background Procedure The video source of the presentation has been configured. The presentation sharing function has been enabled, and the presentation parameters have been set. By default, the endpoint has the presentation sharing function enabled, and the default presentation parameter settings support presentation sharing. To modify these parameters, see 13.3 Setting Advanced Conference Parameters. You can select either of the following modes for sharing a presentation:
Auto: The endpoint automatically sends the video along with the presentation. This mode is available only when Presentation mode is set to Live. Manual: You can use the remote control to share a presentation. For details, see Table 13-3 in 13.3 Setting Advanced Conference Parameters. However, in live mode, the endpoint does not support presentation sharing using SIP. On a Microsoft unified communications (MSUC) network, the endpoint does not support presentation sharing. Press on the remote control to share a presentation. To stop sharing a presentation, press on the remote control. you can also select on the option bar to share a presentation. 6.1.3 Viewing the Combined Picture of the Presentation and the Video During a conference, a combined picture of the video and the presentation can be viewed by pressing on the remote control or selecting from the option bar. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide For details, see section 4.2.5 Switching Between Screen Layouts. 6 Conference 6.2 Experiencing an MSUC Conference Huawei videoconferencing systems can be used in the Microsoft Unified Communications
(MSUC) environment. Register the endpoint (networked with MSUC) with a Lync Server using SIP. After that, the endpoint can place calls to Lync clients, receive calls from Lync clients, and view Lync clients' online status. Background After the endpoint joins the MSUC network, the following can be implemented. The endpoint and Lync clients can place calls to each other. During a point-to-point call, switching between audio-only and video calls is available on both the endpoint and Lync client. The endpoint supports call forwarding on Lync clients. For example, if calls to Lync A has been set to be forwarded to Lync B, then after a call between Lync A and endpoint C is set up, endpoint C automatically disconnects from Lync A and calls Lync B. From Address Book you can view Lync clients' online status. To view a Lync client's online status, you must save that Lync client to the local address book. For details, see Searching the LDAP Network Address Book for Sites. The following describes how the endpoint places a call to the Lync client. Procedure Step 1 Register the endpoint with the MSUC network. 1. Choose Advanced > Settings > Network > IP > SIP. 2. Set the SIP parameters for interworking with the MSUC and registering the endpoint with the Lync Server. Table 6-1 describes the related parameters. Table 6-1 SIP parameters Parameter Description Setting Register with server Specifies whether your endpoint registers with a Lync Server. Select this parameter. An endpoint that registers with a Lync Server can place calls to remote sites using their IP addresses or site numbers if the remote sites also register with Lync Servers. NOTE If you select this parameter, you must also set Server address, Site number, User name, and Password. Server address Specifies the IP address or domain name of the Lync Server with which you want Example 1: 192.168.1.10 Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6 Conference Parameter Description Setting the endpoint to register. Example 2: lync.zdtest.com Conference service number Enable proxy server Proxy server address Site number If you set this parameter to the Lync Server domain name, enable the domain name server (DNS). If the DNS is not enabled, enable Proxy server.
-
-
-
Specifies the site number for your endpoint. If your endpoint registers with a Lync Server, endpoints that also register with the Lync Server can dial this site number to call your endpoint. User name Password Specifies the user name for authentication registration. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the IP address of the Lync Server with which you want your endpoint to register. You do not need to set this parameter. You do not need to set this parameter. You do not need to set this parameter. Example: 123@zdtest.com Obtain this value from the Lync Server administrator. Example: lync_1@zdtest.com Obtain the value of this parameter from the Lync Server administrator. Server type Specifies the SIP server type. Set this parameter to OCS. OCS: Select this option if your endpoint registers with the Microsoft Office Communications Server
(OCS) or Microsoft Lync Server. CISCO VCS: Select this option if your endpoint registers with the Cisco TelePresence Video Communication Server (VCS). Standard: Select this option if your endpoint registers with other SIP servers. Transmissio n type Specifies the protocol used for SIP signaling transmission. Only TCP and TLS transmission are supported. TCP: Use the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) to implement transmission reliability. UDP: Use the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) to implement transmission with reduced latency. TLS: Use Transport Layer Security
(TLS) to implement transmission Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6 Conference Parameter Description Setting The default value is Manual. Video request handling security. Specifies how your endpoint handles video requests from a remote endpoint during a point-to-point SIP audio call or multipoint conference. Accept automatically: Your endpoint automatically accepts video requests from the remote endpoint. Reject automatically: Your endpoint automatically rejects video requests from the remote endpoint. Manual: Your endpoint prompts you to accept video requests from the remote endpoint. 3. Select Save. Step 2 Place a call from the endpoint to the Lync client. 1. Press on the remote control. The Call screen is displayed. 2. In the text box, enter the Lync client number. 3. Press or on the remote control.
----End 6.3 Joining an Authentication Conference If you do not know how many sites are expected to join the conference, set the number of anonymous sites and hold an authentication conference. A site can join the authentication conference by calling the specified conference access number. Background Figure 6-1 outlines the procedure for joining an authentication conference. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Figure 6-1 Procedure for joining an authentication conference 6 Conference Setting the number of anonymous sites: Set the number of anonymous sites when initiating a conference. Setting the authentication conference password: When initiating the conference, set Conference control password, which functions as the authentication conference password. Anonymous sites must enter this password to join the conference. If Conference control password is left blank, anonymous sites can join the conference without entering any password. Obtaining the access number of the authentication conference: When a conference starts, endpoints that have joined the conference can view the conference access number by choosing Advanced > Diagnostics > Status > Conference. On the displayed screen, the value of Remote number is the conference access number. Anonymous sites can obtain the conference access number and authentication password from the SMC administrator or chair site using other methods. Joining the authentication conference as an anonymous site: Anonymous PSTN sites can join the conference by dialing the audio access number, and anonymous IP sites can join the conference by dialing the video access number. Prerequisites You have confirmed with the SMC administrator that the conference you want to join has available resources for anonymous sites. You have obtained the following from the calling party or SMC administrator: video (or audio) authentication conference access number and authentication conference password. The site has registered with the GK server. Procedure Step 1 Press on the remote control. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide The Call screen is displayed. 6 Conference Step 2 In the text box, enter the access number of the authentication conference. Step 3 Press or on the remote control. If the authentication conference is password-protected, the endpoint plays an interactive voice response (IVR), prompting you to enter the password. If the conference is not password-protected, you can join the conference after selecting the desired language.
----End 6.4 Joining an HD-Video Conference over an IMS Network The endpoint can join an HD video conference over an IMS network. Background Prerequisites Procedure Borne by the standard IP protocol, IMS uses VoIP applications based on the standard SIP applications of the 3GPP to provide fixed and mobile multimedia services for operators. Integrating MCUs can enhance the functionality of the Huawei IMS HD videoconferencing solution. You have obtained the required authentication information from the IMS administrator:
unified access number, conference ID, and conference password. Endpoint users can obtain the required authentication information allocated by the IMS through emails, text messages, notices, or other methods. Step 1 Register the endpoint with the network where the IMS is located. 1. Choose Advanced > Settings > Network > IP > SIP. 2. Set the parameters for interworking with the IMS described in Table 6-2. Table 6-2 SIP parameters Parameter Description Setting Register with server Specifies whether your endpoint registers with an IMS server. Select this parameter. Only endpoints that have registered with IMS servers can join the IMS network. An endpoint that registers with an IMS server can place calls to remote sites using their IP addresses or site numbers if the remote sites also register with IMS Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6 Conference Parameter Description Setting Server address servers. NOTE If you select this parameter, you must also set Server address, Conference service number, Site number, User name, and Password. Specifies the IP address or domain name of the IMS server with which you want the endpoint to register. If you set this parameter to the IMS server domain name, enable the domain name server (DNS). If the DNS is not enabled, enable Proxy server. IP address example:
192.168.1.10 Domain name example:
huawei.com It is recommended that you set Server address to the domain name of the IMS server with which you want the endpoint to register. Conference service number Specifies the conference service number for your endpoint to initiate conferences over an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) network. Set this parameter to the conference service number obtained from the IMS network administrator. Enable proxy server Specifies whether to enable the proxy server. Select this parameter. Proxy server address You must enable the proxy server when using the IMS network. Specifies the address of the proxy server. If you set Server address to the IMS server domain name, set this parameter to the IP address bound to that domain name. Example: 192.168.1.10. Site number Specifies the site number for your endpoint. The parameter value must contain only digits. If your endpoint registers with an IMS server, endpoints that also register with the IMS server can dial this site number to call your endpoint. Example: 12345 User name Password Specifies the user name for authentication registration. The value can contain digits, letters, and special characters, such as @ # %. Example:
+0867552842007@huawei.co m Obtain the value of this parameter from the IMS server administrator. Server type Specifies the SIP server type. Set this parameter to Standard. OCS: Select this option if your endpoint registers with the Microsoft Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6 Conference Parameter Description Setting Office Communications Server
(OCS) or Microsoft Lync Server. CISCO VCS: Select this option if your endpoint registers with the Cisco TelePresence Video Communication Server (VCS). Standard: Select this option if your endpoint registers with other SIP servers. Transmissio n type Specifies the protocol used for SIP signaling transmission. Video request handling TCP: Use the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) to implement transmission reliability. UDP: Use the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) to implement transmission with reduced latency. TLS: Use Transport Layer Security
(TLS) to implement transmission security. Specifies how your endpoint handles video requests from a remote endpoint during a point-to-point SIP audio call or multipoint conference. Accept automatically: Your endpoint automatically accepts video requests from the remote endpoint. Reject automatically: Your endpoint automatically rejects video requests from the remote endpoint. Manual: Your endpoint prompts you to accept video requests from the remote endpoint. Set this parameter to UDP. The IMS network only supports UDP transmission. The default value is Manual. 3. Choose Save. Step 2 Press on the remote control to display the Call screen. Step 3 In the text box, enter the conference unified access number. Step 4 On the remote control, press or to initiate the conference. Enter the required authentication information, such as the conference ID and password, as prompted.
----End Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Result 6 Conference After the IMS authenticates the password, the endpoint can join an HD video conference over an IMS network. 6.5 Scheduling a Conference On your endpoint, you can schedule a specific time to hold a conference. Background Prerequisites You can schedule H.323 or 4E1 conferences on the endpoint. To schedule an H.323 conference:
The endpoint is not in use during a conference. The endpoint has registered with a GK, and the Huawei GK parameter has been selected. For details, see 3.1.3 Setting H.323 Parameters. Conference line type has been set to Auto or H.323. For details, see 13.3 Setting Advanced Conference Parameters. To schedule a 4E1 conference:
The endpoint is not in use during a conference. A SiteCall account has been set on the endpoint. For details about how to set a SiteCall account, see 3.2.3 Setting 4E1 Parameters. Conference line type has been set to 4E1. For details, see 13.3 Setting Advanced Conference Parameters. Procedure Step 1 Choose Advanced > Conference Schedules > Conference. Step 2 Schedule a conference using either of the following methods:
Select a conference from Conference, set Start time and Conference duration (ranging from 30 minutes to 360 minutes), and select Schedule. Select Create. Set the site and conference parameters, set Start time and Conference duration, and select Schedule.
----End When the conference is scheduled, you can view its information or delete it on the Conference Schedules screen. 6.6 Controlling a Conference During a multipoint conference, you can control the video and audio of the participating sites using conference control functions. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6.6.1 Conference Control for a Non-Chair Site 6 Conference Non-chair sites have access to only four conference control functions: Request chair, Request floor, View site, and Revoke chair. The Revoke chair function is available only to the site that initiates or pays for a conference. Viewing a Site During a conference, the function to view a site is unavailable when the function to broadcast a site or continuous presence is used. You view the sites connected to their own MCUs or MCUs of the same level only. You can choose to view a single site. You can view continuous presence during a conference if the conference supports Continuous presence . During multipoint conferences hosted by standalone MCUs, the endpoint supports multiple continuous presence views. Request Chair The conference chair site can use more conference control functions than other sites. Only non-chair sites can request chair control rights when no chair site exists in a conference. Audio-only sites cannot request chair control rights. The conference access number is required when a site requests chair control rights. Obtain this number from the SMC administrator or the calling party. Request Floor If a non-chair site wants to speak during a conference, the site can request the floor from the chair site. This function is available only when a chair site exists in the conference. After a site requests the floor, the request is submitted to the chair site. The chair site can then determine whether to give the floor to the site. If the chair site gives the floor to the site, the site is broadcast, and all the sites, except the chair site and the site given the floor, are muted. If the chair site does not give the floor to the requesting site, the conference status remains unchanged. Revoke Chair When chair control rights are revoked, no chair site exists in the conference. Sites in the conference can then request to chair the conference. Only the site that initiates or pays for the conference can revoke chair control rights. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6.6.2 Conference Control for the Chair Site 6 Conference Only one site can chair a conference. Another site can chair the conference only after the current chair site releases its chair control rights or the chair control rights is revoked. The chair site has access to various conference control functions, such as viewing sites, enabling or disabling voice activation, adding sites, setting continuous presence, releasing chair control rights, ending the conference, and broadcasting sites. View Site The chair site has full access to view the participant sites in the conference except when the endpoint is broadcasting sites in turn. You can view any sites residing on the local MCU and MCUs cascaded to the local MCU. You can choose to view a single site or multiple sites in turn at preset intervals. You can view a site even when another site is being broadcast in continuous presence. Broadcast Site The chair site can broadcast any of the participant sites (except for an audio-only site) in a conference and broadcast multiple sites (including the chair site) in turn at preset intervals. When a site is broadcast, all non-chair sites are limited to viewing the broadcast site while the chair site can view any site in the conference. To stop broadcasting, select Stop or Discussion using the remote control. The Stop function is available when a site is being broadcast. When the chair site stops broadcasting sites, all the sites in the conference can view any other sites. Give Floor Using this function, the chair site can give the floor to a site and mute all the other sites. After the chair site gives the floor to a site, the video and sound of this site are broadcast, and all the sites are muted, except the chair site and the site given the floor. To give the floor to a site, access the Give Floor screen, scroll to the site, and press on the remote control. To take back the floor, select Discussion. Lock Presentation During a conference, the chair site can lock the presentation sharing right of a single site or the entire conference. Before using this function, ensure that the MCU and service software used along with your endpoint support this function. To lock the presentation sharing right of a single site, select Lock Conference and then that site. After the chair site locks the presentation sharing right of a site, only the site can share its presentation. To enable the other sites to share presentations, unlock the presentation sharing right of the site. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6 Conference To lock the presentation sharing right of a conference, select Lock Conference. After the chair site locks the presentation of the conference, any site in the conference can share a presentation only when no other site is doing so. Call Site You can place a call to a site that is not in the conference. The site joins the conference after answering the call. To call all absent sites included in the conference site list into the conference, select Call All on the Call Site screen. Disconnect Site The chair site can disconnect a participant site from the conference. The site exits the conference automatically upon being disconnected. Delete Site During a conference, the chair site can delete a site that is present in or absent from the conference. After being deleted, the site is removed from the site list and not related to the conference any more. To enable the site to join the conference again, the chair site must add the site to the conference by using the Add Site function. Mute/Unmute MIC After you have muted the microphone of a site, the other sites in the conference cannot hear the site. To reverse that, unmute the site microphone. Depending on the microphone status of a remote site, you can mute or unmute the remote microphone after selecting the site:
: indicates that the microphone of the site is not muted. You can press to mute the microphone.
: indicates that the microphone of the site is muted. You can press to unmute the microphone. Mute/Unmute Speaker After you have muted the speaker of a site, the site cannot hear the current conference. To enable the site to hear the conference, unmute the speaker. Depending on the speaker status of a remote site, you can mute or unmute the remote speaker after selecting the site:
: indicates that the speaker of the site is not muted. You can press to mute the speaker.
: indicates that the speaker of the site is muted. You can press to unmute the speaker. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Continuous Presence 6 Conference The continuous presence function simultaneously displays the videos of two or more sites on the same display device. The number of sites to be displayed and the layout of the site videos vary depending on continuous presence modes. This function is available only when continuous presence resources have been reserved for the conference. To set continuous presence:
Select a pane. From the drop-down list box in the displayed dialog box, select the site whose video you want to display in the pane. If a site already exists in the pane selected, the site is displaced by the site you just select. To delete all the sites from continuous presence views, select Delete All. Revoke Presentation During a dual-stream conference where the Presentation mode is adopted, if a non-chair site is sharing its presentation, the chair site can revoke the presentation sharing right of this site. A site stops sharing its presentation after its presentation sharing right is revoked. Voice Activation Voice activation is used in discussion mode. When voice activation is enabled, the site with the highest volume is displayed to other sites in the conference. Based on your experience, set Sensitivity to enable voice activation. If the volume of one or more sites exceeds the voice activation threshold, the video of the site with the highest volume is broadcast. If the voice activation threshold is not exceeded, the conference status does not change. To disable voice activation, select Disable from the Voice Activation drop-down list box. Release Chair A non-chair site can request chair control rights only after the chair site releases the chair control rights. Discussion The chair site can enable the discussion function to cancel certain ongoing site control or conference control operations, such as broadcasting sites. This function is used to cancel the following operations performed by the chair site:
Broadcast site Mute Speaker Mute Microphone Give floor In discussion mode:
Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6 Conference Audio: All sites have unmuted microphones, and the audio from all these sites is mixed and broadcast to every site. Video: The video viewed by each site does not change and each site can view the video of any other site. Add Site During a conference, the chair site can add sites to the current conference. If a site is successfully added to the conference, the site becomes a participant of the conference. You can add a site no matter whether it included or not included in the address book. Extend Conference This function enables you to extend a conference that is not likely end as scheduled. Before extending a conference, ensure that the videoconferencing resources and your account balance are sufficient. To increase the chances of success, extend the conference by a maximum of 30 minutes at a time. End Conference If a conference is complete before the scheduled time, you can use this function to end it in advance. To end a conference, select End Conference on the Conference Control screen or press on the remote control. Then confirm your action. 6.7 Recording a Conference Your endpoint can record conferences if your site is the chair site. Prerequisites The recording server is online. Check the recording server's online status from SMC (Service Management Center). Your endpoint is in a multipoint conference hosted by a standalone MCU, such as the HUAWEI VP9660. The ongoing multipoint conference supports recording. Your site is chairing the conference. If you are using a standalone MCU to schedule or initiate a conference, you must select Support recording when setting conference parameters. Background Procedure Step 1 Select Control Recording from the option bar. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Step 2 Select Start. The recording starts.
----End Follow-up Procedure To stop recording, select Stop. 6 Conference 6.8 Managing the Address Book The address book stores site information. You can add, edit, and delete site entries. The address book saves time because you do not need to enter site information to initiate a conference and prevents entry of incorrect IP addresses. You can save sites listed in the conference history to the address book. To do so, choose Advanced >
Address Book > Conference History and select next to the desired sites. 6.8.1 Configuring the Network Address Book A network address book stores the addresses of the sites in the videoconferencing system. You can download a network address book to update the entries in the local address book in batches. Network address books can be stored on:
File Transfer Protocol over SSL (FTPS) or File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server LDAP server Configuring the FTPS or FTP Network Address Book Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Network > Network Address Book > Network Address Book. Set the network address book parameters described in Table 6-3. Table 6-3 Network address book parameters Parameter Description Setting Enable network address book Specifies whether to enable the network address book. If you enable this function, set the other parameters listed in this table. This parameter is not selected by default. Synchronize automatically Specifies whether your endpoint automatically downloads site entries from the network address book to the local address book when it is powered on. This parameter is not selected by default. FTPS Specifies whether to use FTPS to encrypt data through the SSL and ensure data This parameter is selected by default. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6 Conference Parameter Description Setting integrity. If FTPS is not used, the endpoint uses FTP, which is insecure. To improve communication security, retain the default value. Local records prevail if duplicates exist Prompt users during update Specifies whether the following function is enabled: If some entries in the network address book on the FPTS or FTP server already exist in the local address book, these entries remain unchanged when the local address book is updated. Specifies whether a message is displayed to prompt you to update the local address book if the versions of the network and local address books are different. When you confirm the update, site information in the network address book is downloaded to the local address book. This parameter is not selected by default. This parameter is selected by default. Clear local records during update Specifies whether your endpoint automatically clears the local address book when updating the local address book. This parameter is not selected by default. Server address Specifies the IP address of the server that stores the network address book. No default value is set for this parameter. File path User name Password Specifies the save path to the network address book on the server. No default value is set for this parameter. Specify the user name and password your endpoint uses to access the network address book. No default value is set for this parameter. Step 2 Select Save.
----End Downloading the FTPS or FTP Network Address Book After you select Synchronize automatically, the endpoint automatically downloads the latest network address book each time it is powered on. For details about the Synchronize automatically parameter, see Table 6-3 in Configuring the FTPS or FTP Network Address Book. If you have not selected this function, select Update on the Address Book screen to update the FTPS or FTP network address book. The downloaded address book is saved in vCard format. The file name extension is vcf. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Configuring the LDAP Network Address Book 6 Conference Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Network > Network Address Book > LDAP Server. Set the LDAP server parameters described in Table 6-4. Table 6-4 LDAP server parameters Parameter Description Setting Server address Specifies the LDAP server IP address. No default value is set for this parameter. The default value is 389. Port Base DN Specifies the port used to connect to the LDAP server. Specifies the distinguished name (DN) of the entry at which a specified search starts. No default value is set for this parameter. Authentication type Specifies the type of LDAP server authentication. The default value is General. General: Use the user name and password for authentication. Secured: Perform authentication, including authentication on digital certificates, based on the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol. If you select this value, you must also set Domain name. Anonymous: No authentication is performed. The LDAP server is accessible to all users. SSL encryption Specifies whether the SSL protocol is used to encrypt data streams sent to and received from the LDAP server. This parameter is not selected by default. User name Password Specifies the user name and password used for LDAP server authentication. Their default values are both admin. The value can contain digits, letters, and special characters, such as @ # %. Domain name Specifies the domain name used for LDAP server authentication. No default value is set for this parameter. This parameter is mandatory only when Authentication type is set to Secured. Synchronize automatically Specifies whether your endpoint regularly updates the LDAP Address Book entries in the local address book. This parameter is selected by default. If you select this parameter, you must also set Automatic update interval and Local records prevail if duplicates exist. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6 Conference Parameter Description Setting Local records prevail if duplicates exist Specifies whether the following function is enabled: If some entries in the network address book on the LDAP server already exist in the local address book, these entries remain unchanged when the local address book is updated. This parameter is not selected by default. Automatic update interval Specifies the interval for updating the LDAP Address Book entries in the local address book. The default value is 24 h. Step 2 Select Save.
----End Searching the LDAP Network Address Book for Sites After the LDAP server parameters are set, your endpoint can communicate with the LDAP server. On the Address Book page, you can search for sites stored in the LDAP network address book. Select the sites you want to save to the local address book and click Save. Table 6-5 lists the online status icons for LDAP sites. Table 6-5 Online status icons Icon Description Available Busy Offline 6.8.2 Managing the Local Address Book You can add, delete, or edit site information in the local address book. To view the local address book, choose Advanced > Address Book on the remote controlled UI, or click the Address Book tab on the endpoint web interface. To quickly add, delete, or search for address book entries, it is recommended that you perform these operations on the endpoint web interface where you can click the Help tab for instructions on how to operate the local address book. Background Sites and site groups you add to the local address book are automatically saved to the respective lists on the Address Book screen. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6 Conference The following parameters are important site attributes: Name, Number, Rate, Type, and IP address. Table 6-6 lists these parameters. Table 6-6 Site parameters Paramet er Description Setting Category Specifies the category of the site. The default value is Ordinary site. Ordinary site: Select this option for a traditional videoconferencing site. Telepresence site: Select this option for a Huawei telepresence site. CT site: Select this option for a Cisco TelePresence site. Type Specifies the line the site uses to access the videoconferencing network. The default value is H.323. If you select IP, your endpoint uses the protocol specified Preferred IP protocol to call the site. If you set Category to CT site, the available value for this parameter is SIP. Number Specifies the site number used to place calls between sites. No default value is set for this parameter. IP, T1, 4E1, basic rate interface
(BRI), and H.323 phone site numbers are allocated by the videoconferencing service provider. PSTN site numbers are telephone numbers. IP address Specifies the site IP address. NOTE No default value is set for this parameter. This parameter is unavailable if you set Category to IP address. Rate Specifies the call rate for the line selected for a remote endpoint. The call rates supported vary depending on the type of the site you want to call. The default value is 8Mbps. Select the highest available call rate. URI Specifies the uniform resource identifier
(URI) of the site, for example, abcd@huawei.com. No default value is set for this parameter. NOTE This parameter is available only when Type is set to IP, H.323, or SIP. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Adding a Site Step 1 On the Address Book screen, select All Sites. 6 Conference Step 2 If no site is displayed, select Add site. If sites are displayed, select next to any site. Step 3 In Create Site, name the site you want to add. Step 4 Set the site parameters described in Table 6-6. Step 5 Select Save.
----End Creating a Group Step 1 On the Address Book screen, select All Groups. Step 2 If no group is displayed, select Add Group. If groups are displayed, select next to any group. Step 3 In Create Group, name the group. Step 4 Select the sites you want to add to the group. After being selected, a site has a check mark () displayed before it and is listed in the group box. Step 5 Select Save.
----End Modifying a Site Entry Select a site or group, press on the remote control, and modify the site or group settings. Deleting a Site Entry Select next to the desired site or group to delete it from the address book. Searching for a Site Entry Enter the search criteria in the Search text box. The displayed query results are filtered in real time based on what you enter. For example, after you enter 12 in the text box, sites whose names, site numbers, or IP addresses containing the number 12 are displayed in the site list. To perform an exact search for a site, enter the whole name of the site in the text box. 6.8.3 Importing and Exporting an Address Book From the endpoint web interface, you can export an address book to the local computer or a server. This facilitates site information editing. You can also import a modified address book to the endpoint after which the records in the address book are displayed on the address book page. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Background 6 Conference The exported address book is saved to a file in vCard format. The file name extension is vcf. For example, you can export the address book of endpoint A, modify the records in the address book, and then import these records to the address book of endpoint B. The exported contacts file may contain personal information. Keep the file in a safe location to prevent personal information disclosure. Exporting an Address Book To export an address book:
Step 1 Log in to the web interface of endpoint A. Choose Address Book > Address Book. Step 2 Select Export from Local Address Book. Step 3 Select a character encoding format for the address book. International: The character set is UTF-8. Local: The character set is GB2312. It is recommended that you retain the default value International. Step 4 Save the records to file A.
----End Modifying Records in the Address Book After exporting the address book of endpoint A to file A, modify its records as follows:
Use a text editor to open file A. Based on the notes of the parameters in the file, modify file A so that it applies to endpoint B. Save the modified file as file B. Importing the Address Book To import the address book to endpoint B:
Step 1 Log in to the web interface of endpoint B. Choose Address Book > Address Book. Step 2 Click Import to Local Address Book and select file B to import. Step 3 Click Import.
----End 6.8.4 Customizing a Site Template A site template is used to group sites for easy site management. In this template, the sites are identified by their site names. Creating a Site Template Step 1 Log in to the endpoint web interface. Choose Address Book > Site Template. Step 2 Click Create. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6 Conference Step 3 In Template Name, enter a template name, for example, test. Step 4 Add a group to the template, as the test template in the following example:
1. Click Create Group. The Create Group group is displayed under Group Name. 2. Double-click the Create Group group and change the group name to, for example, group1. Step 5 Add sites to the new group, as the group1 group in the following example:
Select group1 under Group Name. Click Add from Address Book to add sites from the address book, or click Add Temporary Site to add temporary sites. Step 6 Repeat Step 4 to add another group to the template. Step 7 Repeat Step 5 to add sites to the new groups. Step 8 Click Save. After being saved, a site template is displayed under Template Name. When one of the sites in the site template is in a conference, the site template name is listed in the drop-down list box on the Conference Control page.
----End Editing a Site Template Step 1 Log in to the endpoint web interface. Choose Address Book > Site Template. Step 2 From the Template Name drop-down list box, select the site template you want to edit. Click Edit. Step 3 Modify the settings of the site template. Step 4 Click Save.
----End Deleting a Site Template Step 1 Log in to the endpoint web interface. Choose Address Book > Site Template. Step 2 Select the site template you want to delete. Step 3 Click Delete.
----End 6.9 Managing Captions You can create a caption on your endpoint. In addition, you can share the caption with remote sites during a conference. Your endpoint supports T.140 and non-T.140 captions. Table 6-7 describes the differences between these caption types. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 6 Conference Table 6-7 Comparison between non-T.140 and T.140 captions Non-T.140 Caption T.140 Caption Superimposed on the video of your site and sent with the video to remote sites Can be sent and received by Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) and H.323 endpoints Not superimposed on the video of your site, sent to remote sites, and displayed on remote displays Can be sent and received by H.323 endpoints only Can be sent and received by all endpoints Can be sent and received only by endpoints that support T.140 captions Can be sent only from endpoints in a conference Can be sent from any of the following in a conference:
Endpoint used at the chair site SMC2.0 Endpoint used by either party during a point-to-point call 6.9.1 Specifying Caption Settings Caption settings include the caption font size, color, and background. Procedure Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Display > Caption. Set the caption parameters described in Table 6-8. Table 6-8 Caption parameters Parameter Description Font size Specifies the font size for banners and middle and bottom captions. Backgroun d color Specifies the background color of banners and middle and bottom captions in any of 64 colors. Font color Specifies the foreground color of banners and middle and bottom captions in any of 64 colors. Setting Default values:
For banners, the default value is Largest. For middle and bottom captions, the default value is Medium. Default values:
For banners, the default color is red. For middle and bottom captions, the default color is gray. The default color is white. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Parameter Description Effect Specifies the display effect for banners and middle and bottom captions. 6 Conference Setting Default value:
For banners, the default value is Center. For middle captions, the default value is Scroll upward. For bottom captions, the default value is Scroll leftward. Scrolling speed Specifies the scroll rate for middle and bottom captions. Adjust the rate based on the preview. Transparen cy Specifies banner or caption transparency. Scrolling speed Specifies the percentage of the banner or bottom caption height to the entire screen. Font Type Specifies the font type of captions. Bold Specifies whether banners or captions are displayed in bold. Line spacing Sharing mode Specifies the vertical spacing between lines when there are multiple lines of middle captions. Specifies the type of the caption to be shared, T.140 or non-T.140. For the differences between T.140 and non-T.140 captions, see Table 6-7. The default value is Fast. The default value is Half transparent. The default value is 10%. The default value is Boldface. For banners, this parameter is selected by default. For middle and bottom captions, this parameter is not selected by default. The default value is Small. The default value is T.140. Step 2 Select Save.
----End 6.9.2 Creating a Banner or Caption You can create and preview a banner or caption on your endpoint. Procedure Step 1 Choose Advanced > Utilities. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide The Utilities screen is displayed. Step 2 Select Middle Caption, Banner, or Bottom Caption. Step 3 Select New and compose the desired banner or caption.
----End After a banner or caption is created, you can preview, share, or edit it. 6 Conference Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 Security 7 Security About This Chapter To improve communication security, you can encrypt conferences, set or change conference passwords, and disable remote access to the endpoint. 7.1 Setting the Administrator Password To prevent endpoint parameter settings from being modified by unauthorized users, anyone who wants to access the Settings screen must provide the administrator password. 7.2 Enabling Encryption On an IP network, which is neither quality-guaranteed nor secure, encryption can be used to increase video communication security. 7.3 Supporting Remote Logins You can specify whether remote users can log in to the endpoint to manage it using the endpoint web interface, SSH, or Telnet. 7.4 Setting the Upgrade Password You can set the password required to upgrade the endpoint software using the upgrade tool. 7.5 Setting the Air Content Sharing Password When connecting to the endpoint, an air content sharing client must provide the predefined password. 7.1 Setting the Administrator Password To prevent endpoint parameter settings from being modified by unauthorized users, anyone who wants to access the Settings screen must provide the administrator password. Procedure Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Secured > Password. Set the administrator password parameters described in Table 7-1. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 Security Table 7-1 Administrator password parameters Parameter Description Setting Specifies the new administrator password for the remote controlled UI. The default value is 12345678. Current password New password Confirm password The password contains 8 to 32 characters. To improve device security, set a password at your first login. This parameter is not selected by default. Encryption advanced settings Specifies whether to encrypt the Advanced Settings screen of the remote controlled UI. If this parameter is enabled, you must enter the administrator password to access the Advanced screen. If this parameter is disabled, the administrator password is required only when you select Settings on the Advanced screen. Step 2 Select Save.
----End 7.2 Enabling Encryption On an IP network, which is neither quality-guaranteed nor secure, encryption can be used to increase video communication security. Background Procedure Encryption can be H.235 or SRTP encryption. Both parties involved in communication must support encryption; otherwise, encryption fails. Step 1 Choose Advanced > Set > Security > Encryption and select an encryption policy. Disable: No stream is encrypted. Enable: Stream encryption is mandatory. If you select this option, the endpoint can only attend encrypted conferences. If a remote site is also encryption capable, an encrypted conference is initiated upon successful call connection with the remote site. If the remote site is encryption incapable, the call to the remote site fails. Maximum interconnectivity: Media streams are encrypted only when a call is set up. If you select this option for the local site, the conferences between the local and remote sites are not encrypted only when Disable is selected for the remote sites. Step 2 Choose Save. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide
----End 7 Security 7.3 Supporting Remote Logins You can specify whether remote users can log in to the endpoint to manage it using the endpoint web interface, SSH, or Telnet. Web-based Login Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Secured > Web Login. Set the web-based login parameters described in Table 7-2. Table 7-2 Web-based login parameters Parameter Description Setting Specifies whether a remote user can log in to the endpoint web interface to perform operations such as setting endpoint parameters, controlling the endpoint, and viewing the endpoint status. If you select this parameter, you must also set the administrator user name and password. Specify the user name and password used to log to the endpoint web interface. Web Login Administrator name Current password New password Confirm password SSL encryption Specifies whether to enable Security Socket Layer (SSL) encryption to improve transmission security. When SSL encryption is enabled, the touch panel must use Hypertext Transfer Protocol This parameter is selected by default. The administrator name cannot be left blank and contains a maximum of 64 case-sensitive characters. In New password, enter a string of 6 to 32 characters. In addition, it must include at least two of the following: uppercase letter, lowercase letter, digit, or special character. The default administrator name is admin. The default administrator password is Change_Me. To protect against unauthorized access, change the password at your first login. When the data to be transferred must be highly secured, it is recommended that you select SSL encryption. This parameter is selected by default. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99 HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 Security Parameter Description Setting Secure (HHTPS) to connect to the endpoint. Monitor video Specifies whether to allow remote users to log in to the endpoint web interface to view local and remote videos and presentations and take pictures. For details, see 9.3.8 Monitoring the Video. This parameter is not selected by default. NOTICE This function involves privacy protection. Ensure that its use complies with local laws and regulations. Step 2 Select Save.
----End SSH and Telnet Login Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Secured > SSH/Telnet. Set the SSH and Telnet login parameters described in Table 7-3. Table 7-3 SSH and Telnet login parameters Parameter Description Setting Telnet Login Specifies whether remote users can log in to the endpoint in Telnet mode for maintenance and configuration purposes, such as querying system logs and status information. This parameter is selected by default. The default user name and password for telnetting to the endpoint are debug and Change_Me respectively. NOTICE If the computer you use to telnet to your endpoint runs Linux, specify the Telnet port on the endpoint by running telnet endpoint IP address port number. For example, run telnet 10.11.12.123 23 where 23 is the port number. Specifies whether to enable SSH, which improves transmission security and prevents information disclosure. To protect against unauthorized access, change the password at your first login. This parameter is selected by default. The default user name and password for logging in to the endpoint in SSH mode are debug and Change_Me respectively. To protect against unauthorized access, change the password at your first login. SSH Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 7 Security A maximum of three users is allowed to simultaneously log in to the endpoint in SSH mode. A maximum of seven users is allowed to simultaneously log in to the endpoint in SSH and Telnet modes. Step 2 Select Save.
----End 7.4 Setting the Upgrade Password You can set the password required to upgrade the endpoint software using the upgrade tool. Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Secured > Upgrade password. Set the upgrade password parameters described in Table 7-4. Table 7-4 Upgrade password Parameter Description Setting Upgrade password Specifies the password required to upgrade your endpoint software using the upgrade tool. Default value: Change_Me The password contains 6 to 32 characters. In addition, it must include at least two of the following: uppercase letter, lowercase letter, digit, or special character. To improve device security, set a password at your first login. Step 2 Choose Save.
----End 7.5 Setting the Air Content Sharing Password When connecting to the endpoint, an air content sharing client must provide the predefined password. Background Procedure For details about how to download and use an air content sharing client, see 9.3.3 Downloading an Air Content Sharing Client. Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Security > Air content sharing. Set the air content sharing password described in Table 7-5. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Table 7-5 Air content sharing password Parameter Description Setting 7 Security Password Specifies the password an air content sharing client uses to connect to the endpoint. Default value: Change_Me The password contains 6 to 32 characters. In addition, it must include at least two of the following: uppercase letter, lowercase letter, digit, or special character. To improve device security, set a password at your first login. Step 2 Choose Save.
----End Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 8 Screen Customization 8 Screen Customization About This Chapter You can customize the menu option bar, conference control functions, and status icons. 8.1 Customizing the Home Screen You can customize the home screen, such as specifying whether the site name, IP address, system time, or date is displayed. 8.2 Customizing Onscreen Status Icons You can customize which status icons are displayed on the home screen, helping you quickly understand the endpoint's status. 8.3 Customizing Conference Control Functions to Be Displayed You can customize the conference control functions you want to display on the Conference control screen to quickly access these functions. 8.4 Customizing the Option Bar You can customize icons on the option bar to facilitate access to the corresponding screens. 8.1 Customizing the Home Screen You can customize the home screen, such as specifying whether the site name, IP address, system time, or date is displayed. Choose Advanced > Settings > Display > Personalize. Set the custom parameters described in Table 8-1. Table 8-1 Custom parameters Parameter Description Setting Transparenc y Specifies the transparency of the background image displayed on the remote controlled UI. If you set this parameter to Opaque, the background image is not displayed on The default value is 15%. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 8 Screen Customization Parameter Description Setting operation screens except for the call and menu screens. If you set this parameter to any other value, you can vaguely see the background image on all operation screens. Display IP address Specifies whether to display the local IP address on the conferencing screen. This parameter is selected by default. Select conference controls Specifies the conference control functions you want to display on the Conference Control screen. None Display position Specifies the position where your site name is superimposed on the video of your site. The default value is Lower right corner. Display duration Specifies the duration for displaying a site name. The default value is Always display. Display time and zone Specifies whether the time zone and time are superimposed on the local video sent to remote sites. This parameter is not selected by default. The time zone and time are not displayed on the local video shown on the display device at your site. Font color Specifies the color in which a site name is displayed. The default color is white. Font size Specifies the font size for the site name display. The default value is Medium. Font Type Specifies the typeface of a site name. The default value is Boldface. This parameter is available only when Language is set to . Bold Specifies whether a site name is displayed in bold. This parameter is not selected by default. Fine-tunes the site name's position left or right on the local video. Value range: 0-96. The default value is 48. Fine-tunes the site name's position up or down on the local video. Value range: 0-96. The default value is 48. Set the horizontal offset Set the vertical offset Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 8 Screen Customization 8.2 Customizing Onscreen Status Icons You can customize which status icons are displayed on the home screen, helping you quickly understand the endpoint's status. Packet Loss Rate Icon To set thresholds (A and B) for the packet loss rate, choose Advanced > Settings > Display >
Packet Loss Threshold. By comparing the packet loss rate on the current network with threshold A and threshold B, the endpoint determines whether to display the packet loss rate icon on the remote controlled UI. The policy is as follows:
Threshold A must be less than threshold B. Their value ranges are 0.1% to 100%. The default values for threshold A and threshold B are 1% and 5%, respectively. If the packet loss rate is less than or equal to threshold A, no packet loss rate icon is displayed. If the packet loss rate is between threshold A and threshold B, is displayed. If the packet loss rate is greater than or equal to threshold B, is displayed. Other Icons A status icon is displayed on screens if the following conditions are met:
You have set the icon as follows:
Choose Advanced > Settings > Display > Icon and select the icon. The function or the condition that corresponds to the status icon has been enabled. For details about common status icons, see C Status Icons. 8.3 Customizing Conference Control Functions to Be Displayed You can customize the conference control functions you want to display on the Conference control screen to quickly access these functions. Background Procedure The following conference control functions are displayed by default: Continuous Presence, Discussion, Give floor, Voice activation, Add site, Request floor, Enable Chair Control, Lock conference, and Restore Auto Continuous Presence. Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Display > Personalize > Select conference controls. Select the conference control functions you want to display on the Conference control screen. Step 2 Select Save. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide
----End 8 Screen Customization 8.4 Customizing the Option Bar You can customize icons on the option bar to facilitate access to the corresponding screens. Background To hide the option bar Press the left arrow key,
, or on the remote control. To show the option bar Press on the remote control. Procedure Step 1 Press on the remote control. The menu screen is displayed. Step 2 Select on the option bar to display the Customize Option Bar screen. To access the Customize Option Bar screen, you must enter the administrator password whose default value is 12345678. Step 3 Select the icon you want to move and select Up or Down. To show or hide an icon on the option bar, use the remote control to select or deselect the icon. Step 4 Select OK.
----End Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 9 Embedded Web Management Interface 9 Embedded Web Management Interface About This Chapter The built-in web server of the endpoint allows you to operate the endpoint in web mode, for example, to set endpoint parameters, control the endpoint, and view endpoint status. The features for operating the endpoint using the web interface include the following:
A computer is used to access the IP network where the endpoint is located. When you log in to the endpoint using the web interface, the endpoint web pages are displayed. A maximum of 10 users can log in to the endpoint web interface simultaneously. The administrator can configure the endpoint, while standard or API users can customize only personal settings. A user who uses the remote control to operate the endpoint has more rights than a user who logs in to the endpoint using the endpoint web interface. The former can grant control rights to or revoke the control rights of the latter. On the endpoint web interface, you can import and export address books and configuration files. You can import license files on the endpoint web interface. You can download an air content sharing client from the endpoint web interface. The multi-view function is supported on the endpoint web interface. With regard to inputting information in quantity, such as adding sites to an address book, using the endpoint web interface is more convenient than using the remote control. 9.1 Web Browser Before using the endpoint web interface for remote management, configure the web browser on your computer. 9.2 Logging In to the Endpoint Web Interface To remotely manage the endpoint in web mode, log in to its web interface. 9.3 Getting to Know Web Interface Functions The functions provided by your endpoint are reorganized on its web interface so you can conveniently use them with a web browser. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 9.1 Web Browser 9 Embedded Web Management Interface Before using the endpoint web interface for remote management, configure the web browser on your computer. Background The web interface can run on Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0, Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0, Microsoft Internet Explorer 8.0, Microsoft Internet Explorer 9.0, Mozilla FireFox 3.6, Mozilla FireFox 7.0, Mozilla FireFox 8.0, and Google Chrome 15. The following description uses Window XP as an example to describe how to configure Microsoft Internet Explorer 8.0 and FireFox 3.6. The methods for configuring other browser versions are similar. Before you begin, ensure that the latest patches for the operating system and browser are installed. Procedure Step 1 Start Internet Explorer. Step 2 From the Internet Explorer menu bar, choose Tools > Internet Options. In the displayed Internet Options dialog box, click the Security tab. Step 3 In the bottom of the tab, click Custom level. Step 4 In the displayed Security Settings dialog box, set all options under Downloads and Scripting to Enable. Click OK. Step 5 (Optional) On the Security tab, click Trusted sites and then Sites. The Trusted sites dialog box is displayed. Step 6 (Optional) In the Add this website to the zone text box, enter the IP address of your endpoint. Then click Add. Step 7 (Optional) Click OK. Step 8 Click the Privacy tab. Move the slider to display the Medium level. Step 9 Click OK. The configuration is complete. To ensure that information can be properly displayed, if you choose to skip Step 5 through Step 7, choose Tools > Pop-up Blocker > Turn Off Pop-up Blocker from the menu bar of Internet Explorer.
----End To set Firefox, do the following:
Start the Firefox. On the menu bar, choose Tools > Options. On the Main tab, select Show the Downloads window when downloading a file. On the Privacy tab, select Accept cookies from sites. Then select OK. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 9 Embedded Web Management Interface 9.2 Logging In to the Endpoint Web Interface To remotely manage the endpoint in web mode, log in to its web interface. Prerequisites The correct security certificate has been imported into the endpoint. For details about how to import a security certificate, see 9.3.7 Importing a Certificate. You have enabled the web login function. For details about how to enable the function, see 7.3 Supporting Remote Logins. Procedure Step 1 Open Internet Explorer. Step 2 In the address box, enter the endpoint IP address, such as 10.10.10.10. Step 3 Press Enter. The login page is displayed. Step 4 Fill in User name and Password. The default user name and password are admin and Change_Me respectively. Step 5 From the Language drop-down list, select a language. Step 6 Select Log In. The home page is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-1. Figure 9-1 Home page of the endpoint web interface 1 Menu bar 2 Expand/Collapse button 3 Area for displaying your site name 4 Shortcut bar Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 9 Embedded Web Management Interface 5 Desktop icons 6 Area for displaying logs 7 Area for displaying messages 8 Status icons
----End 9.3 Getting to Know Web Interface Functions The functions provided by your endpoint are reorganized on its web interface so you can conveniently use them with a web browser. The following are the functions unique to the web interface:
Importing and exporting an address book, see 6.8.3 Importing and Exporting an Address Book. Importing and exporting settings Importing a license file Downloading an air content sharing client Setting the multi-view mode Customizing the shortcut bar and desktop icons Providing the site map Customizing site templates (For details, see 6.8.4 Customizing a Site Template.) Monitoring the video Importing a certificate Using the virtual remote control Setting SNMP parameters (For details, see 13.4 Setting SNMP Parameters.) Upgrading the endpoint by importing upgrade files (For details, see 11.4 Upgrading the Endpoint on Its Web Interface.) 9.3.1 Importing and Exporting Settings On the endpoint web interface, you can import and export settings. If your endpoint is restored to its default settings, you can import previously exported settings. Procedure Step 1 Log in to the endpoint web interface. Choose System Settings > Installation. The Installation page is displayed. Step 2 Select Import/Export Settings. The Import/Export Settings page is displayed. Step 3 Select Export Settings to export or Import Settings to import.
----End Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 9.3.2 Importing License Files 9 Embedded Web Management Interface Some functions on your endpoint, such as Wi-Fi and recording, require license files. Prerequisites You have obtained the latest license files. From http://enterprise.huawei.com, you can use your contract number and device serial number to download license files. Background Procedure Your endpoint can start properly even when no license file is loaded on it or the existing license file has expired. After startup, you can load a valid license file, set parameters, and upgrade software. When a license file is updated, the original license file expires. For example, after you purchase an official license, the trial license will expire. Step 1 Log in to the endpoint web interface. Choose System Settings > Installation. The Installation page is displayed. Step 2 Click Import License. The File upload dialog dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click Select File, select the license file you want to import and click Import. Step 4 Click Back when OK is displayed.
----End 9.3.3 Downloading an Air Content Sharing Client You can download an air content sharing client from the endpoint web interface. With this client, you can connect your endpoint to presentation sources and share presentations without the use of any physical ports. Prerequisites An air content sharing client is not available when you are using the remote desktop. A computer for air content sharing must run any of the following operating systems:
32-bit Windows Vista 64-bit Windows Vista 32-bit Windows 7 64-bit Windows 7 32-bit Windows XP Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Background 9 Embedded Web Management Interface If the computer and endpoint are on the same LAN, you can share your desktop as a presentation without using a VGA cable to connect the video output port on the computer to the presentation input port on the endpoint. You cannot connect multiple computers to the same endpoint to implement air content sharing. For example, if two computers A and B are available in a conference and their desktops are required to be shared as presentations in turn during the conference, you can separately install air content sharing clients on these two computers. When the desktop of computer A is required to be shared as the presentation, connect computer A to the endpoint. When the presentation sharing stops, disconnect computer A from the endpoint and connect computer B to the endpoint to share computer B's desktop as the presentation. Procedure Step 1 Log in to the endpoint web interface. Choose System Settings > Installation. The Installation page is displayed. Step 2 Click Download Air Content Sharing Client. The Downloads dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click Save and select a save path for the air content sharing client.
----End Usage of an Air Content Sharing Client Step 1 Double-click the installation program of the air content sharing client and complete the installation by following onscreen instructions. The installation is complete. icon of the air content sharing client is displayed on the desktop when the Restart the computer so the air content sharing client can take effect. Step 2 Double-click
. The air content sharing dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Connect the client to an endpoint using either of the following methods:
In the list of endpoint search results, double-click the desired endpoint. Enter the IP address of the desired endpoint and click Connect. Step 4 (Optional) In the displayed dialog box, enter the password and click Connect. The default password is Change_Me. For details, see 7.5 Setting the Air Content Sharing Password. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 9 Embedded Web Management Interface The "An Air Content Sharing source device requests to connect to your endpoint. Accept?" message is displayed on the endpoint web interface and remote controlled UI. Select Accept on either the endpoint web interface or remote controlled UI. The client successfully connects to the endpoint without any passwords. If your endpoint is not used in a conference, the computer desktop is sent to your endpoint as a presentation when the connection succeeds. If your endpoint is used in a conference, the computer desktop is sent to remote sites when the connection succeeds.
----End To stop air content sharing, click Stop. To disconnect the air content sharing client from the endpoint, click Disconnect. 9.3.4 Multi-View With the multi-view function, you can view multiple local videos in Picture in Picture (PiP) or split-screen mode on one display. Procedure Step 1 Log in to the endpoint web interface. Choose Device Control > Device Control and click the Multi-View tab. Step 2 Set Multi-view mode to any of the following:
PiP 2 panes 3 panes 3 panes Step 3 Specify input sources for the multi-view mode you selected. Step 4 Click the Video Control tab. Step 5 In the Video Input Source area, set Video Source to Multi-View.
----End 9.3.5 Customizing Shortcut Bar and Desktop Icons You can customize the shortcut bar and desktop icons on the endpoint web interface so you can conveniently perform desired operations using these icons. Background Procedure The following procedure uses customizing shortcut bar icons as an example. Step 1 Log in to the endpoint web interface. Choose System Settings > Display. Step 2 Click the User defined tab. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 9 Embedded Web Management Interface Step 3 Click Shortcut Bar Icons. The Shortcut Bar Icons dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Add or delete shortcut bar icons. Step 5 Click Save.
----End 9.3.6 Accessing the Site Map You can quickly navigate to a desired page using the site map. To access the site map:
Log in to the endpoint web interface. Choose Help > Site Map. 9.3.7 Importing a Certificate You can import client, server, and SiteCall certificates into your endpoint. These certificates can be used to identify users, certificate authorities, and servers to improve communication security. Client certificate: You have obtained the required certificate from the SIP server administrator or downloaded it from a certificate authority. Server certificate: You have downloaded the required certificate from a certificate authority. Multipoint conference certificate: You have obtained the required certificate from the GK server administrator. Prerequisites Procedure Step 1 Log in to the endpoint web interface. Choose System Settings > Installation. The Installation page is displayed. Step 2 Click Import Certificate. The File upload dialog dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Select the desired certificate type. To import a certificate for authentication calls and when the endpoint functions as the server, select Client certificate. To import a certificate for authentication registration or calls and when the endpoint functions as a client (for example, TLS-based registration), select Server certificate. To import a certificate used for SiteCall security, select Multipoint conference certificate. Step 4 Select the certificate you want to import and click Import. Step 5 Click Back when OK is displayed.
----End Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 9.3.8 Monitoring the Video 9 Embedded Web Management Interface To ensure that a conference runs smoothly, you may need to monitor how the endpoint operates and whether the local and remote videos are displayed properly in the conference room. From the endpoint web interface, you can capture photos and view local and remote videos and presentations. The web login and video monitoring functions have been enabled. For details, see Web-based Login in 7.3 Supporting Remote Logins. Log in to the endpoint web interface. Choose Device Control > Video Control. View the video or presentation of the local or remote site. You can then click Capture. In the displayed window, right-click the captured picture and choose Save Picture As to save the picture. When you are on the Video Control page, monitoring is enabled. appears on the endpoint display to indicate that video 9.3.9 Using the Virtual Remote Control You can use the virtual remote control on the endpoint web interface to control the endpoint. Log in to the endpoint web interface. Choose Device Control > Use remote control. Click the keys on the virtual remote control to operate the endpoint. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 10 Maintenance 10 Maintenance About This Chapter You must periodically check the working environment, cable connection, communication network connection, and audio-visual input and output of your endpoint. This ensures that the endpoint and its peripheral equipment work properly. 10.1 Checking the Working Environment Periodically To ensure that your endpoint can function properly, check the working environment periodically. 10.2 Checking the Endpoint Periodically For preventive maintenance purposes, you need to check the audio, video, and communication cables periodically. 10.3 Viewing System Status Knowing system status at any given time helps to better maintain the endpoint. 10.4 Querying System Information System information helps you maintain your endpoint. 10.5 Querying Logs Your endpoint logs all non-query events in real time, including user activities and commands. The logs help with device maintenance, fault identification, and auditing. 10.1 Checking the Working Environment Periodically To ensure that your endpoint can function properly, check the working environment periodically. Table 10-1 lists the items to be checked. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 10 Maintenance If any of the items does meet the requirements, power off the endpoint and take measures to improve the environment. Ensure that the endpoint is used only when all the listed items meet the requirements. Table 10-1 Checking the working environment Item Requirement Operating temperature 0C to 40C Operating humidity 10% to 80% RH 10.2 Checking the Endpoint Periodically For preventive maintenance purposes, you need to check the audio, video, and communication cables periodically. Periodically (once a week is recommended) check that the cables connecting peripheral equipment and the power supply to the endpoint are securely connected. Periodically (once a week is recommended) check whether the communication cables connected to the endpoint work properly. Power on the endpoint and call some other endpoints using different methods, such as calling over a broadband network. If a call cannot be set up, verify that the cables are connected correctly and securely and the communication parameters are set correctly. If the problem persists, contact the videoconferencing network administrator to check the network. 10.3 Viewing System Status Knowing system status at any given time helps to better maintain the endpoint. Use any of the following methods to access the Status screen and view system status:
Press on the remote control and select Status. Select from the option bar. Choose Advanced > Diagnostics > Status. The following information is displayed on the Status screen:
Line status: includes the local IP addresses and network port modes of LAN1 and LAN2, MAC address, WLAN IP address, whether to enable the GK, H.323 site number, whether to enable SIP, SIP site number, and camera status and uptime. Call status: includes the line rate, video resolution, video rate (frame rate), presentation resolution, presentation rate (frame rate), audio rate, video packet loss rate, presentation Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 10 Maintenance packet loss rate, audio packet loss rate, conference participating duration, and presentation token. This information is displayed only after the endpoint joins a conference. Conference parameters: includes the call bandwidth, video protocol, video bandwidth
(frame rate), audio protocol, audio bandwidth, presentation protocol, presentation bandwidth (frame rate), remote site number, media stream encryption, conference number for video access, conference number for audio access, ISDN trunk number, conference number for ISDN access, and password for conference authentication. This information is displayed only after the endpoint joins a conference. Input port status: includes the video information of all video input and USB1 and USB2 ports as well as air content sharing information. 4E1 line connection status (applicable only to the TE60) 10.4 Querying System Information System information helps you maintain your endpoint. Choose Advanced > Diagnostics > System Information. On the displayed System Information screen, you can check:
Version information Specification information Audio and video protocols and video resolutions supported by your endpoint Network ports provided by your endpoint and the maximum bandwidth supported by each port Whether your endpoint supports the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Whether your endpoint supports dual stream, namely, the video and presentation Whether your endpoint supports signaling and media stream encryption Whether your endpoint is interoperable with Lync Whether your endpoint supports recording, Scalable Video Coding (SVC), Wi-Fi, and public switched telephone network (PSTN) Maximum presentation resolution and codec capability of your endpoint Connection status to the network diagnostics client ESN Valid term of the license 10.5 Querying Logs Your endpoint logs all non-query events in real time, including user activities and commands. The logs help with device maintenance, fault identification, and auditing. Your endpoint can store a maximum of 100,000 log records. When the memory for recording logs is full, new logs can still be recorded. The latest log will simply replace the oldest one. Choose Advanced > Diagnostics > Logs. Then select the log you want to view. Logs are sorted by time. You can turn pages to view more entries. To display the details of a log, scroll to the log and select Details. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 10 Maintenance Each log contains the following information:
Event time Event level Endpoint-defined event type Event details To search for a log, select Query and specify the search criteria. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 11 Upgrading 11 Upgrading About This Chapter Your endpoint supports the following software upgrade methods: automatic, using upgrade tools, using the bootrom system, and from the endpoint web interface. During the upgrade, do not power off the endpoint to prevent irreversible faults. Table 11-1 describes the differences between the four upgrade methods. Table 11-1 Endpoint upgrade methods Upgrade Method Description Automatic upgrade With the automatic upgrade function enabled and automatic upgrade parameters set, your endpoint obtains upgrade files from the specified server and installs the upgrade files when the preset upgrade interval arrives. For details, see 11.1 Automatic Upgrade. Tool upgrade Download the upgrade software to a computer, connect the computer to the endpoint directly or over the LAN, and upgrade the endpoint. For details, see 11.2 Tool Upgrade. Upgrade using the bootrom system If upgrading the endpoint using its normal system fails due to a power failure or other causes, you can use the bootrom system to complete the upgrade For details, see 11.3 Upgrading the Endpoint Using the Bootrom System. Upgrade from the endpoint web interface On the endpoint web interface, manually upgrade the endpoint or set it to upgrade automatically. For details, see 11.4 Upgrading the Endpoint on Its Web Interface. Before the upgrade, complete the following:
Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 11 Upgrading Read the Release Notes to understand the contents to be upgraded and precautions required to be taken during the upgrade. Obtain the current software version. Back up the settings on the endpoint, such as the communication settings and address book. 11.1 Automatic Upgrade With the automatic upgrade function enabled and automatic upgrade parameters set, your endpoint obtains upgrade files from the specified server and installs the upgrade files when the preset upgrade interval arrives. 11.2 Tool Upgrade You can use a computer to locally upgrade the endpoint. 11.3 Upgrading the Endpoint Using the Bootrom System If upgrading the endpoint using its normal system fails, you can use the bootrom system to complete the upgrade. 11.4 Upgrading the Endpoint on Its Web Interface You can update the endpoint software from the web interface. 11.1 Automatic Upgrade With the automatic upgrade function enabled and automatic upgrade parameters set, your endpoint obtains upgrade files from the specified server and installs the upgrade files when the preset upgrade interval arrives. Procedure Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Installation > Auto Upgrade Settings. Step 2 Set the automatic upgrade parameters described in Table 11-2. Table 11-2 Automatic upgrade parameters Parameter Description Setting Auto upgrade This parameter is not selected by default. Specifies whether the automatic upgrade function is enabled. If you select this parameter, you must also set Upgrade interval, Server address, User name, and Password. Your endpoint will obtain upgrade files from the specified server and install them when the preset upgrade interval is reached. Enable wireless MIC auto update Specifies whether to automatically update an upgradable wireless microphone VPM220W after it is connected to the endpoint. This parameter is selected by default. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 11 Upgrading Parameter Description Setting Upgrade interval Specifies the upgrade interval. This parameter is available only when Auto upgrade is selected. Server address Specifies the IP address of the server that stores the upgrade files for your endpoint. The default value is 0.5 h. Value range: 0.5 h to 24 h. This parameter cannot be left blank. Example:
http://200.55.55.100/
Specify the user name and password your endpoint uses to access the server. No default value is set for this parameter. User name Password Step 3 Choose Save.
----End 11.2 Tool Upgrade You can use a computer to locally upgrade the endpoint. Prerequisites Before the upgrade, ensure that:
The target software is saved to the computer. The computer is connected to the endpoint using a straight-through cable, crossover cable, or switch. You have obtained the upgrade password. The default upgrade password is Change_Me. For details, see 7.4 Setting the Upgrade Password. Upgrading a Single endpoint Step 1 Power on the computer and endpoint. Step 2 Extract the compressed software upgrade package on the computer. Step 3 Run UpgMaster.exe to display the window shown in Figure 11-1. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Figure 11-1 Upgrading a single endpoint 11 Upgrading Step 4 (Optional) Click Browser and select the te.dat file. By default, the path of the te.dat file is displayed in Upgrade File. Step 5 In Remote Terminal IP Address, enter the endpoint IP address, such as 10.10.10.10. If Reboot is selected, the endpoint automatically restarts after the upgrade. Step 6 Click Upgrade. Step 7 In the displayed dialog box, enter the upgrade password and click OK.
----End Upgrading Multiple Endpoints in Batches Step 1 Power on the computer and endpoint. Step 2 Extract the compressed software upgrade package on the computer. Step 3 Run UpgMaster.exe to display the window shown in Figure 11-1. Step 4 (Optional) Click Browser and select the te.dat file. By default, the path of the te.dat file is displayed in Upgrade File. Step 5 Click shown in Figure 11-1 to display the window as shown in Figure 11-2. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Figure 11-2 Upgrading multiple endpoints in batches 11 Upgrading Step 6 In area 1 shown in Figure 11-2, enter the number of the endpoints you want to upgrade, for example, 4. Step 7 In area 3 shown in Figure 11-2, enter the IP addresses of the endpoints you want to upgrade. Step 8 In area 4 shown in Figure 11-2, enter the upgrade passwords of the endpoints you want to upgrade. Step 9 In area 2 shown in Figure 11-2, select the endpoints you want to upgrade and click Upgrade. To improve upgrade efficiency when the network bandwidth is insufficient, you can press Ctrl+ALT+C in the window shown in Figure 11-1, and then set the upgrade policy in the displayed window.
----End Upgrading Specified Software Modules Step 1 Power on the computer and endpoint. Step 2 Extract the compressed software upgrade package on the computer. Step 3 Run UpgMaster.exe to display the window shown in Figure 11-1. Step 4 (Optional) Click Browser and select the te.dat file. By default, the path of the te.dat file is displayed in Upgrade File. Step 5 Press Ctrl+ALT+P to display the Pack Upgrade File window. Step 6 In the upgrade file list area, select the software modules you want to upgrade. Step 7 Click Pack File to pack the selected software modules into a .dat file. Save the file to the computer, for example, save the file as tepart.dat to the computer. Step 8 In the displayed dialog box, click OK. Step 9 (Optional) In the window shown in Figure 11-1, click Browser and select the tepart.dat file you saved in Step 7. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 11 Upgrading The path displayed in Upgrade File automatically changes to the path of the tepart.dat file. Step 10 In Remote Terminal IP Address, enter the endpoint IP address, such as 10.10.10.10. Step 11 Click Upgrade. Step 12 In the displayed dialog box, enter the upgrade password and click OK.
----End 11.3 Upgrading the Endpoint Using the Bootrom System If upgrading the endpoint using its normal system fails, you can use the bootrom system to complete the upgrade. Prerequisites Background Procedure A copy of the target software is available on the computer. The computer is connected to the endpoint directly or over a LAN. You have obtained the upgrade password. The default upgrade password is Change_Me. For details, see 7.4 Setting the Upgrade Password. The bootrom system is used for upgrades when the endpoint software malfunctions. This method can be repeatedly used and ensures successful software upgrades provided that there are no hardware failures. Step 1 While the endpoint is restarting or powering on, press and hold the RESET button for 10 seconds. The endpoint enters the bootrom system. At this time, the endpoint has two IP addresses available: the static IP address of the normal system and the default IP address (192.168.1.1). If the normal system IP address cannot be used for connection setup or the endpoint fails to obtain any IP address because of the dynamic IP address or other causes, you can use the default IP address for upgrades. Step 2 Use Telnet to log in to the endpoint. Run the mnt upgswitch on command to enable the bootrom system upgrade function. The bootrom system upgrade function is disabled by default. The default administrator user name and password for telnetting to the endpoint are debug and Change_Me respectively. Step 3 Extract the compressed software upgrade package on the computer. Step 4 Run the upgrade program UpgradeTool.exe. The upgrade dialog box is displayed. Step 5 (Optional) Click Browser and select the te.dat file. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 11 Upgrading By default, the path of the te.dat file is displayed in Upgrade File. Step 6 In Remote Terminal IP Address, enter your endpoint IP address, for example, 192.168.1.1. Then click Upgrade. Step 7 In the displayed dialog box, click OK to start the upgrade. Step 8 Restart the endpoint.
----End 11.4 Upgrading the Endpoint on Its Web Interface You can update the endpoint software from the web interface. Prerequisites The upgrade file has been copied to your computer. Do not close the endpoint web interface during the upgrade as doing so causes an upgrade failure. Procedure Step 1 Log in to the endpoint web interface. Choose Maintenance > Upgrade. The File upload dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Click Select File and select the te.dat file on your computer. Step 3 Click Import. The endpoint starts the upgrade.
----End The endpoint automatically restarts when the upgrade is complete. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 12 Troubleshooting 12 Troubleshooting About This Chapter This chapter describes how to diagnose and troubleshoot endpoint faults. 12.1 Fault Diagnostics On the endpoint, you can perform the following diagnostic tests: sound and color bar tests, network tests, loopback tests, and remote control tests. 12.2 Troubleshooting This section describes the problems you might encounter when using your endpoint and provides solutions. 12.3 Restoring Default Settings If customized endpoint settings do not bring expected effects (for example, the display device fails to deliver images because of incorrect input or output port settings), use the Restore Default function to restore your endpoint to its default settings. 12.1 Fault Diagnostics On the endpoint, you can perform the following diagnostic tests: sound and color bar tests, network tests, loopback tests, and remote control tests. Choose Advanced > Diagnostics. Use the diagnostics methods available on the displayed Diagnostics screen. Figure 12-1 shows the endpoint diagnostics model. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Figure 12-1 Diagnostics model 12 Troubleshooting Figure 12-1 shows the diagnostics of three modules: audio module, video module, and network transception module. Audio signals are transmitted in the following signal path:
Local microphone 1 5 Communication network 6 7 Remote speaker Local speaker 2 5 Communication network 6 8 Remote microphone Video signals are transmitted in the following signal path:
Local camera 3 5 Communications network 6 9 Remote display device Local display device 4 5 Communications network 6 10 Remote camera Sound and Color Bar Tests Table 12-1 describes sound and color bar tests. Table 12-1 Sound and color bar tests Test Sound Item to Be Tested Signal Stream 2 audio output 2 Speaker Color bar 4 video output 4 Display device Loopback Tests To perform a sound test, choose Sound & Color Bar Test > Sound Test. While the test audio stored on your endpoint plays, check the sound quality. To perform a color bar test, choose Sound & Color Bar Test > Color Bar Test. While seven color bars are displayed on the display device, check the color display quality. During a loopback test, your endpoint transmits audio or video data through a channel to simulate actual working conditions and tests whether the output is satisfactory. You can Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 12 Troubleshooting perform a local loopback test to check the network connection at your site or a remote loopback test to check the network connection at a remote site. While a remote loopback test is being performed, data is transmitted from your site to a remote site and then back to your site. Table 12-2 describes loopback tests. To enable your endpoint to communicate with other endpoints, stop the loopback test. You cannot perform a loopback test on remote video during a dual-stream conference. Table 12-2 Loopback tests Test Item to Be Tested Signal Stream Audio loopback Local audio module Microphone 1 2 Speaker Video loopback Local video module Camera 3 4 Display device Digital loopback Local audio and video modules The endpoint performs local audio and video loopback tests simultaneously. Remote audio loopback Remote audio module Network transmission Microphone 1 5 6 7 8 6 5 2 Speaker Remote video loopback Remote video module Network transmission Camera 3 5 6 9 10 6 5 4 Display device Remote digital loopback Remote audio and video modules The endpoint performs remote audio and video loopback tests simultaneously. Network transmission Network Tests Table 12-3 Network tests Test Item to Be Tested Signal Stream Network IP access Endpoint LAN or public network Before a network test, ensure that your endpoint is connected to an IP network and IP parameters are set correctly. If your endpoint is on a public network: In IP address, enter an IP address that is in a different network segment from your endpoint IP address. Then select Start. If the test is successful, the gateway settings and IP address of your endpoint are correct. If your endpoint is on a private network: In IP address, enter a public IP address. Then select Start. If the test is successful, the gateway settings, NAT address, and IP address of your endpoint are correct. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Remote Control Tests 12 Troubleshooting Test the keys on the remote control to check whether they are functioning properly. If only some of the keys are tested, you can exit the Remote Control Test screen by pressing and holding on the remote control. When all the keys are tested, the Remote Control Test screen automatically exits. The normal operating distance of the remote control is 6 meters. Its performance may be affected under strong light. If the remote control does not work, verify that:
The endpoint is powered on. The positive and negative charges of the battery are connected correctly. The battery has sufficient power left. There are no special fluorescent or neon signs nearby. 12.2 Troubleshooting This section describes the problems you might encounter when using your endpoint and provides solutions. Web Interface Table 12-4 lists the troubleshooting methods for problems that may arise on the endpoint web interface. Table 12-4 methods for troubleshooting endpoint web interface problems Problem Possible Cause Solution A message is displayed to indicate that your endpoint failed to connect to the Internet or download images. The latest patches for the operating system or Internet Explorer are not installed. Install the latest patches for the operating system and Internet Explorer. The security level of Internet Explorer is too high, or your endpoint IP address has not been added to the list of trusted sites. 1. From the Internet Explorer menu bar, choose Tools >
Internet Options. 2. Click the Security tab, Trusted sites, and then Sites. 3. In Add this Web site to the zone, enter your endpoint IP address. Then click Add. 4. Click OK. Button text is not fully displayed. Internet Explorer is set to ignore the font styles specified on web pages. In this case, the font specified by your endpoint cannot be recognized. 1. From the Internet Explorer menu bar, choose Tools >
Internet Options. 2. Under Appearance on the General tab, click Accessibility. 3. In the Accessibility dialog box, Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 12 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Solution If Internet Explorer 6 is used, the endpoint web interface responds to operations slowly. The records of the local address book cannot be exported. The JavaScript engine of Internet Explorer 6 is not upgraded, or the required patches are not installed. deselect all options. 4. Click OK. Install Microsoft Windows Script 5.7 (recommended). Install the patches. The pop-up blocker is enabled on your browser. If Internet Explorer is used: On the Internet Explorer menu bar, choose Tools > Pop-up Blocker > Turn Off Pop-up Blocker. If the Firefox is used: Choose Tools > Options. On the General tab, select Show the Downloads window when downloading a file. On the Privacy tab, select Accept cookies from sites. Then click OK to save the settings. Network Table 12-5 lists the troubleshooting methods for problems that may arise on the network. Table 12-5 Methods for troubleshooting common network problems Problem Possible Cause Solution Disconnect some Telnet connections. When you attempt to use Telnet to access the endpoint, a message is displayed to indicate that the number of connections to the endpoint has reached the limit. The number of connections to the endpoint has reached the maximum value. NOTE A maximum of seven SSH and Telnet connections to the endpoint is allowed. A maximum of three SSH connections to the endpoint is allowed. Video Table 12-6 lists the troubleshooting methods for video problems. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 12 Troubleshooting Table 12-6 Methods for troubleshooting video problems Problem Possible Cause Solution While the endpoint is powered on and not in a conference, the display device does not display the remote controlled UI or the video of your site. While the endpoint is powered on and not in use during a conference, the display device displays the video of your site but cannot display the remote controlled UI. While the endpoint is in use during a conference, the display device displays the video of your site but cannot display the video of any remote site. The display device is powered off. Power on the display device. The video channel of the display device is incorrect. Use the remote control to select the correct video channel. The video settings of the endpoint or display device are incorrect. For example, the brightness is set to 0. Retain the default values for the video parameters on the endpoint and display device. The video cable connection is not secure. Secure the video cable between the endpoint and display device. No display device is connected to the output port for the remote controlled UI or the connected display device is faulty. The output port for the remote controlled UI is not set or the output port you set for the remote control UI is not the port connected to the display device. The endpoint does not respond to remote control operations. Connect a display device to the output port for the remote controlled UI and verify the video settings on the display device. Choose Advanced > Settings >
Video > Common Settings >
Video Output. Set GUI to the output port connected to the display device. Telnet to the endpoint. If you fail to operate the endpoint, it is malfunctioning. In this case, restart the endpoint. If the problem persists, contact the local distributor for maintenance. A local or remote loopback test is being performed. Stop all local and remote loopback tests. Check the call statistics. If the value of Video bandwidth[frame rate] is 0, no video is sent from remote sites. If the remote video is displayed as a blue screen, the remote site is blocking its video by sending a blue screen. Contact the remote site administrator to resolve this problem. Contact the remote site administrator to resolve this problem. The video output port is set to display the video of your site. Set the video output port to display the video of a remote site. The video of your site is in black and white or flickers in The mode adopted by the video output port is set Ensure that the mode adopted by the video output port and the cable in use match each Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 12 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause black and white. incorrectly. Solution other. Verify that the cable is connected correctly. Replace the cable if necessary. Perform a local video loopback test. If the video quality is poor, faults occur in the local video module. In this case, send the endpoint to the local distributor for maintenance. Set the remote camera to automatic focus. If the conference rate is lower than 256 kbit/s, set the audio protocol to G.728 to reduce the bandwidth used for audio transmission. Do not initiate conferences during network busy hours. Replace the related network connection device. Ask the administrator of the remote site to disconnect from the conference, set the video frame rate to a smaller value, and join the conference again. Faults occur in the local video module. The remote camera is set to focus on a close or distant scene. When the remote camera is not set to automatic focus and the scene captured by a remote camera changes, the captured video becomes unclear. Incorrect audio protocols are specified for conferences whose data transmission rates are lower than or equal to 256 kbit/s. To view the data transmission rate of a conference, access the Status screen. For example, if the conference rate is 256 kbit/s and the audio bandwidth is 64 kbit/s, the video bandwidth is only 196 kbit/s. In this case, the video quality is poor. Only low video bandwidth is available for your site because the network is busy. The quality of a network connection device, such as an optical fiber transceiver, is poor. As a result, certain data is lost during transmission. Ask the remote site administrator to perform a local video loopback test. If the video quality is good, the video frame rate set at the remote site is too high. While the endpoint is in use during a conference, the video of a remote site is not clear. For example, there are artifacts, frozen images, or discontinuity in the video output. While the endpoint is in use during a conference, the video of a remote site can be displayed continuously but the video quality is not satisfactory. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 12 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Solution While the endpoint is not in use during a conference, the video displayed on the display device is too bright or too dark. The video settings of the endpoint are inappropriate. Retain the default values for the video parameters on the endpoint and display device. The video settings of the display device are inappropriate. Retain the default values for the video parameters on the endpoint and display device. While the endpoint is in use during a conference and a remote site is sharing its computer desktop, the local VGA display cannot display the shared computer desktop. The camera is faulty. The resolution of the remote computer exceeds the maximum resolution supported by the endpoint. Send the endpoint to the local distributor for maintenance. Ask the remote site administrator to change the resolution and refresh rate of the remote computer to those the endpoint supports. The local VGA display is not supported. Replace the local VGA display with a supported display. The presentation sharing function is not enabled at your site. Choose Advanced > Settings >
Conference > Advanced and select Presentation. A computer is connected to the endpoint, but the local VGA display does not show the computer desktop. The capability of the VGA display is limited. The resolution or refresh rate of the local SXGA output is too high to be supported by the VGA display. Set the resolution and refresh rate of the local SXGA output to those the VGA display supports. The endpoint supports only certain combinations of resolutions and refresh rates. The combination of the resolution and refresh rate set on the computer, however, is not supported by the endpoint. In this case, the local site cannot display or properly display the computer desktop. The presentation source is not set as the computer desktop. The dual screen function is not enabled. Set the resolution and refresh rate of the computer used for the VGA input to those the endpoint supports. Choose Advanced > Settings >
Video > Common Settings >
Video Input. Set Presentation Source to the input port connected to the computer desktop. Choose Advanced > Settings >
Video > Common Settings >
Video Output and set Dual-screen to Enable. On the camera The camera you want to control is not selected. Access the camera control screen and select the camera you want to Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Problem Possible Cause 12 Troubleshooting Solution control. Camera settings are incorrect. Verify the camera settings. The remote control is disabled on the remote camera. Ask the remote site administrator to enable the remote camera control at the remote site. The camera settings are incorrect or the control cable of the camera is not securely connected. Ask the remote site administrator to verify the camera settings or securely connect the camera control cable. control screen,
,
, and navigation keys on the remote control cannot be used to control the camera. While the endpoint is in use during a conference and the display device displays the video of a remote site, after you press
,
, or navigation keys on the remote control, the video remains unchanged. That is, you cannot control the remote camera. Audio Table 12-7 lists the troubleshooting methods for audio problems. Table 12-7 Methods for troubleshooting audio problems Problem Possible Cause Solution While the endpoint is in use during a conference, no audio is delivered from the local display device. Perform an audio test to check whether the problem occurs at your site or a remote site. If no audio is delivered from the display device during the audio test, the problem exists at your site. If the chair site has muted the speaker of your site, contact the chair site to resolve this problem. If the display device volume is adjusted to the lowest, restore the volume to its default value. If the endpoint volume is adjusted to the lowest, restore the volume to its default value. If the audio cable is connected incorrectly or insecurely, reconnect the audio cable from the endpoint to the display device. If audio is properly delivered from the display device during the audio test, the problem The microphone at the remote site has been muted or the chair site has muted this microphone. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 12 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Solution occurs at the remote site. In this case, contact the chair site to resolve this problem. No sound pickup device, such as a microphone, is connected to the audio input port. In this case, set the audio source again or connect a sound pickup device to the corresponding port. The related sound pickup device is powered off. In this case, power on the device. The audio cable is connected insecurely. In this case, reconnect the audio cable to the endpoint. A loopback test is being performed at your site. Stop all local and remote loopback tests. While the endpoint is in use during a conference, only the sound from your site can be delivered from the display device and you cannot hear other sites. Conference Initiation Table 12-8 lists the troubleshooting methods for problems you may encounter during conference initiation. Table 12-8 Methods for troubleshooting common problems with conference initiation Problem Possible Cause Solution Verify GK registration settings and register your site and the remote site with a GK. Your site and a remote site cannot call each other using site numbers. Your site or the remote site has not registered with a GK. A GK is responsible for translating site numbers into IP addresses. If either your site or the remote site does not register with a GK, the translation cannot be implemented, and your site cannot place a call to the remote site using the site number. If a remote site places a call to your site by site number, it Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 12 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Solution will receive a message from the GK indicating that your site has not registered with the GK, and the call cannot be set up. The local or remote endpoint is not connected to an IP network. Your site cannot place a call to a remote site using the IP address of the remote site. The local or remote endpoint is not connected to an IP network. NAT settings are incorrect. Specifically, the local endpoint is on a private network while the remote endpoint is on a public or different private network. Check whether your endpoint can communicate with a public network. If the endpoint cannot, NAT settings 1. Verify that the endpoint is connected to an IP network. Specifically, the LAN indicator on the rear panel of the endpoint is steady green. 2. From the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced >
Diagnostics > Network Test. Enter the IP address of the remote site and start a Ping test. If the Ping test fails, a network error has occurred. In this case, contact the administrator. 3. From the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > IP. Verify IP network settings. 1. Verify that the endpoint is connected to an IP network. Specifically, the LAN indicator on the rear panel of the endpoint is steady green. 2. From the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced >
Diagnostics > Network Test. Enter the IP address of the remote site and start a Ping test. If the Ping test fails, a network error has occurred. In this case, contact the administrator. 3. From the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > IP. Verify IP network settings. Choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > Firewall and verify NAT settings. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 12 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Solution are incorrect. The GK with which the local or remote endpoint registers does not support the function for placing calls using IP addresses. Choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > IP > H.323 at your site and the remote site, respectively. Then, disable GK functions. After the endpoint starts, it fails to register with the GK. The parameters (GK address, encryption password, and user name) used for GK registration are incorrect. On the endpoint web interface, choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > IP > H.323 and correct the settings. Contact the videoconferencing system administrator to check whether another site with the same number as your site has already registered with the GK. If such a site exists, change the user name of your site. 1. Verify that the endpoint is connected to an IP network. Specifically, the LAN indicator on the rear panel of the endpoint is steady green. 2. From the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced >
Diagnostics > Network Test. Enter the IP address of the remote site and start a Ping test. If the Ping test fails, a network error has occurred. In this case, contact the administrator. 3. From the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > IP. Verify IP network settings. Choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > Firewall and verify NAT settings. Another site with the same number as your site has already registered with the GK. The endpoint is disconnected from an IP network. NAT settings are incorrect. Specifically, the local endpoint is on a private network while the GK is on a public network. Check whether your endpoint can communicate with a public network. If the endpoint cannot, NAT settings are incorrect. The GK listening port, such as port 1719, is restricted by the network firewall. Contact the videoconferencing system administrator to resolve this problem. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 12 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Solution A predefined conference fails to be initiated on the endpoint. The endpoint is disconnected from an IP network. Your site is set to pay for the conference but does not have sufficient account balance. Another site is set to pay for the conference but does not have sufficient account balance, or account number or password entered is incorrect. Multiple conferences are currently being held while port resources on the videoconferencing system are insufficient. 1. Verify that the endpoint is connected to an IP network. Specifically, the LAN indicator on the rear panel of the endpoint is steady green. 2. From the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced >
Diagnostics > Network Test. Enter the IP address of the remote site and start a Ping test. If the Ping test fails, a network error has occurred. In this case, contact the administrator. 3. From the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > IP. Verify IP network settings. Enter the correct account number and password and top up the related account. Wait until the resources are available. Alternatively, reduce the number of sites attending the conference and then add sites as required after the conference is held successfully. The SiteCall account for using the 4E1 lines is incorrect. Contact the videoconferencing system administrator to resolve this problem. Conference Control Table 12-9 lists the troubleshooting methods for common problems you may encounter during conference control. Table 12-9 Methods for troubleshooting conference control problems Problem Possible Cause Solution While the endpoint A site in the conference is being Ask the chair site to stop Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Problem Possible Cause is in use during a conference, you cannot view the desired site. broadcast, and all the sites must view that site except the chair site and broadcast site. A site is having the floor, and non-chair sites cannot view other sites. The chair site has enabled the Voice Activation function. No video is sent from the site you want to view. The View Site function is restricted on the RM or the SMC. 12 Troubleshooting Solution site broadcast. Ask the chair site to enable the discussion function. Ask the chair site to disable the Voice Activation function. Ask the related site administrator to troubleshoot the site video. Contact the videoconferencing system administrator to resolve this problem. 12.3 Restoring Default Settings If customized endpoint settings do not bring expected effects (for example, the display device fails to deliver images because of incorrect input or output port settings), use the Restore Default function to restore your endpoint to its default settings. Restoring your endpoint to its default settings causes the loss of certain stored information, for example, site information in the address book, call records, and logs. Choose Advanced > Settings > Installation > Restore Default. In the displayed dialog box, enter the endpoint serial number and select OK. To view the serial number of your endpoint, choose Advanced > Diagnostics > System Information > Version. Press and hold the RESET button on the back of the endpoint for about 10 seconds, and the endpoint will be restored to its default settings and restart. After the endpoint is restored to its default settings, its IP address is reset to 192.168.1.1. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 13 Feature Configuration 13 Feature Configuration About This Chapter Feature configuration includes setting the number keys and power key on the remote control, parameters for placing and answering calls, advanced conference parameters, SNMP parameters, quality of service (QoS) parameters, and network diagnostics parameters. 13.1 Setting the Number Keys and Power Key on the Remote Control You can set the number keys and power key on the remote control to facilitate your daily use of the endpoint. 13.2 Setting the Parameters for Placing and Answering Calls You can set the mode in which the endpoint places and answers calls. For example, you can set the endpoint to automatically answer calls or to enable the do not disturb function. 13.3 Setting Advanced Conference Parameters Correctly setting advanced conference parameters brings expected conference effects. 13.4 Setting SNMP Parameters To enable the videoconferencing network management system to manage your endpoint, configure the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) settings. 13.5 Setting QoS Parameters Quality of service (QoS) settings determine the mode for processing IP data packets during a conference. 13.6 Setting Network Diagnostics Parameters Correct settings on the ports used for diagnostics enable you to use a network diagnostics tool to diagnose your endpoint using the ports. 13.1 Setting the Number Keys and Power Key on the Remote Control You can set the number keys and power key on the remote control to facilitate your daily use of the endpoint. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 13 Feature Configuration Choose Advanced > Settings > General. Set the number keys and power key, which are described in Table 13-1. Table 13-1 Number keys and power key on the remote control Parameter Description Setting Select number key function Select number key function Specifies the functions of the number keys on the remote control. The default value is Second Dial. When the endpoint is not in a conference and the display is showing the menus or camera control screen, you can only control camera presets by pressing number keys on the remote control. To toggle between these two options, press remote control. on the When the endpoint is in a conference, you can select either of the following options:
Second Dial: Follow the instructions to press number keys to perform two-stage dialing. Control camera preset: On the menus or camera control screen, press a number key to move the camera to the preset bound to that key. Power supply Shut Down Specifies whether the endpoint can be powered off. The default value is Enable. If you set this parameter to Disable, pressing on the remote control can only restart the endpoint or place it in sleep mode. 13.2 Setting the Parameters for Placing and Answering Calls You can set the mode in which the endpoint places and answers calls. For example, you can set the endpoint to automatically answer calls or to enable the do not disturb function. Choose Advanced > Settings > Conference > Normal. Set the parameters described in Table 13-2. Table 13-2 Parameters for placing and answering calls Parameter Description Setting Answer Mode Specifies how your endpoint handles incoming calls. The default value is Manual. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 13 Feature Configuration Parameter Description Setting Manual: Your endpoint prompts you to handle a call when the call comes in. Answer call automatically: Your endpoint automatically answers incoming calls when not being used in a conference. Mute local audio for answered calls This parameter is available only when Answer Mode is set to Answer call automatically. This parameter is not selected by default. Specifies whether the endpoint turns off all sounds generated at your site when your endpoint joins a conference. If you enable this parameter, no remote site can hear your site. Open do not disturb right Specifies whether the do-not-disturb function is available to all users. This parameter is selected by default. Call parameter configuration If you enable this parameter, under Advanced > Utilities, common users can enable or disable the do-not-disturb function. The do-not-disturb function prevents you from being disturbed by incoming calls. Specifies whether you can set the call type and data transmission rate before initiating point-to-point calls. If you select this parameter, you can set the call type and data transmission rate in the displayed dialog box before initiating a point-to-point call. If you do not select this parameter, the endpoint uses the default call type and data transmission rate. This parameter is not selected by default. Wi-Fi network preferred Specifies whether to prioritize a Wi-Fi network when both wireless and wired networks are available. This parameter is not selected by default. This parameter is available only when Wi-Fi is enabled. For details about how to enable Wi-Fi, see 3.1.5 Setting Wi-Fi Parameters. Default call bandwidth Specifies the default data transmission rate for your endpoint. The default value is 1920 kbps. NOTE If this parameter is set incorrectly, the video quality will be affected or the call might even fail to be set up. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 13 Feature Configuration 13.3 Setting Advanced Conference Parameters Correctly setting advanced conference parameters brings expected conference effects. Advanced conference parameters apply to the following conferences:
Point-to-point conferences initiated by your site Multipoint conferences initiated by your site Conferences that your site joins by answering a call from a remote site Choose Advanced > Settings > Conference > Advanced. Set the advanced conference parameters described in Table 13-3. Table 13-3 Advanced conference parameters Parameter Description Setting Audio and video protocols Using the audio or video protocol you select, your endpoint negotiates the audio or video capability with a remote endpoint to set up a call. If you do not select an audio or video protocol, this protocol is not an option value of the related advanced conference parameters. For example, if you do not select the H.264 HP protocol, it will not be displayed in the option values of the Video protocol parameter. Retain the default value. NOTE Select at least one audio protocol and one video protocol so that you can use your endpoint to place audio calls or video calls. Audio protocol Specifies the audio protocol your endpoint uses to encode audio. The default value is Auto. Audio channels Specifies the audio channels. The default value is Two. This parameter is available only when you select AAC_LD or HWA-LD. Video protocol Specifies the video protocol the endpoint uses to encode video. Video resolution During a non-multi-stream conference, Video protocol is the video protocol the endpoint uses at your site. Specifies the video format. The available options vary depending on your settings of Video protocol. When Video protocol is set to Auto, set this parameter to either of the following:
Sharp: Your endpoint uses a high video resolution to ensure clear video. Smooth: Your endpoint uses a high frame rate to ensure smooth video. The default value is Auto. To initiate an HD video conference, select an H.264-related video protocol. The default value is Sharp. Video frame Specifies the frame rate used during The default value is Auto. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 13 Feature Configuration Parameter Description Setting rate video encoding. Retain the default value. Video at a higher frame rate is smoother. When Video protocol is set to Auto, this parameter is not available. Prevent little packet loss Specifies whether to prevent sporadic packet loss to avoid artifacts. This parameter is not selected by default. Select this parameter if all endpoints are on the same private network and sporadic packet loss occurs. Presentation Specifies whether you can share presentations during conferences. This parameter is selected by default. NOTE You can set Presentation protocol, Presentation resolution, Presentation mode, Presentation bandwidth setting, Presentation bandwidth (%), Presentation sharing mode, and Presentation plug-and-share only after you set this parameter to Enable. Presentation protocol Specifies the video protocol your endpoint uses to encode presentations. The default value is Auto. Presentation resolution Specifies the presentation video resolution. The default value is Sharp. Presentation bandwidth setting Smooth: Your endpoint uses a high frame rate to ensure smooth video. Sharp: Your endpoint uses a high video resolution to ensure clear video. Specifies the mode for setting the presentation video bandwidth. Auto: Your endpoint automatically sets the presentation video bandwidth based on the bandwidth available. Manual: You must manually set Presentation bandwidth. The default value is Auto. Presentation bandwidth Specifies the percentage of the call bandwidth presentations can occupy. The default value is 50. Presentation mode Specifies the mode of the presentation you want to share. The default value is Presentation. Presentation: When the video is switched, the presentation remains unchanged. Only one site in the conference can share a presentation one time. Live: The presentation viewed by Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 13 Feature Configuration Parameter Description Setting each site is switched along with the video. All sites in a conference can share presentations simultaneously. NOTE When connected to an IMS network, the endpoint cannot share a presentation in Live mode. Auto: The endpoint automatically shares presentations along with videos. This parameter can be set to Auto only when Presentation mode is set to Live. Manual: You must manually share presentations by using the remote control. Specifies whether your site automatically shares presentations with remote sites once presentation input is detected. Presentation sharing mode Presentation plug-and-share The default value is Manual. The default value is Disable. Conference line type Specifies the type of line used during a conference. The default value is Auto. If you select Auto and your endpoint has registered with a network gatekeeper
(GK) server, your endpoint preferentially uses H.323 to initiate a conference. Conference bandwidth Specifies the transmission bandwidth for a conference. The default value is Normal. This parameter is not selected by default. When the network is running within normal parameters, retain the default value. When the network is not running within normal parameters, select this parameter. The default value is Enable. Dynamic bandwidth reserved presentation bandwidth Specifies whether the endpoint implements the following if the packet loss rate increases due to insufficient network bandwidth: automatically decreases the conference bandwidth until packet loss does not occur constantly or the conference bandwidth is decreased to 64 kbit/s. If constant packet loss is detected, the endpoint can dynamically adjust bandwidth to recover stable conference quality within 1 minute. Disable this parameter if your site is not going to send or receive presentations during a conference and the Received value for Presentation bandwidth
[frame rate] is not -. If this parameter is disabled, the Received value for Presentation bandwidth [frame rate] restores to -
Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 13 Feature Configuration Parameter Description Setting when you rejoin the conference. NOTE To view the Presentation bandwidth
[frame rate] value, choose Advanced >
Diagnostics > Status > Conference. Preferred IP protocol Specifies the protocol that IP sites preferentially use. The default value is H.323. Face detection When Line type is set to Auto for IP sites, your endpoint uses this protocol to call the IP sites. Specifies whether to perform HD encoding and decoding to improve face recognition video quality. You can increase the video sharpness by enabling this parameter in low bandwidths. The default value is Disable. Site called during startup Specifies the site that your endpoint automatically calls when it starts. The default value is None. None: The endpoint does not call any sites. Select site from address book: The endpoint displays the address book screen from which you can specify the site you want your endpoint to call after its startup. You can proceed to set Call times only after you set this parameter. Specifies the maximum number of attempts your endpoint calls a specified site after startup. The default value is 1. The maximum value is 10. If you set this parameter to 0, your endpoint does not call the specified site after startup. Call times 13.4 Setting SNMP Parameters To enable the videoconferencing network management system to manage your endpoint, configure the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) settings. Your endpoint communicates with and is remotely managed by the videoconferencing network management system using SNMP. The videoconferencing network management system implements the following:
Configures endpoint settings, including the H.323, SIP. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Checks endpoint alarms. Backs up and restores endpoint settings. Upgrades the endpoint online. 13 Feature Configuration On the endpoint web interface, choose System Settings > Network and click the SNMP Settings tab. Set the SNMP parameters described in Table 13-4. Table 13-4 SNMP parameters Parameter Description Setting Enable SNMP Specifies whether the videoconferencing network management system uses SNMP to manage your endpoint. The default value is Enable. Get community name Set community name Trap community name NOTE If you set this parameter to Enable, you must set other SNMP parameters. Specifies the read-only SNMP community name. The default value is Change_Me. Set this parameter to the value defined on the videoconferencing network management system. The value is a string of 1 to 32 characters. Specifies the read-write SNMP community name. The default value is Change_Me. Set this parameter to the value defined on the videoconferencing network management system. The value is a string of 1 to 32 characters. The default value is Change_Me. Set this parameter to the value defined on the videoconferencing network management system. The value is a string of 1 to 32 characters. No default value is set for this parameter. You can leave this parameter blank. Specifies the trap community name. Trap server address 1 Trap server address 2 Trap server address 3 Specify the IP address to which your endpoint sends traps, namely, the IP address of the computer where the videoconferencing network management system server is installed. NOTE A trap is an unrequested message that a managed device (for example, an endpoint) sends to a trap server (for example, the SMC) Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 13 Feature Configuration Parameter Description Setting to report urgent and important events. Trap version Version of the traps that the endpoint The default value is v3 trap. sends to the videoconferencing network management system through SNMP. Trap timeout time Specifies the timeout interval for traps, in seconds. The default value is 1. This parameter is available only when Trap version is set to v2 inform or v3 inform. Trap retry times Specifies the number of retry attempts for sending a trap. The default value is 5. This parameter is available only when Trap version is set to v2 inform or v3 inform. User name Specifies the user name for sending traps. The default value is trapinit. This parameter is available only when Trap version is set to v3 trap or v3 inform. ID Specifies the engine ID for the videoconferencing network management system. This ID is used only when your endpoint sends traps of version 3. Set this parameter to the ID defined on the videoconferencing network management system. This parameter is available only when Trap version is set to v3 trap or v3 inform. Authenticati on protocol Authenticati on password Specify the authentication mode and password that your endpoint uses to send traps to the videoconferencing network management system through SNMP. This parameter is available only when Trap version is set to v3 trap or v3 inform. Encryption protocol Encryption password Specify the encryption protocol and password that your endpoint uses to send traps to the videoconferencing network management system through SNMP. If you select No encryption for Encryption protocol, traps are transmitted using plaintext. This parameter is available only when Trap version is set to v3 trap or v3 inform. The default value of Authentication protocol is MD5. Set Authentication password to the password defined on the videoconferencing network management system. If the two passwords are not the same, authentication fails. The default value of Encryption protocol is DES. Set Encryption password to a string of 1 to 32 characters, which contains letters, digits, and special characters. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 13 Feature Configuration Parameter Description Setting SNMPv3 Authentication Information Specifies the user name for connecting your endpoint to the videoconferencing network management system through SNMPv3. Specifies the user permissions of your endpoint when it connects to the videoconferencing network management system. Read and write:read and write Read only: read-only Specify the authentication mode and password for connecting the videoconferencing network management system to your endpoint. User name User rights Authenticati on protocol Current password New password The default value is v3user. The default value is Read and write. The default value of Authentication protocol is MD5. When the videoconferencing network management system attempts to connect to your endpoint, Authentication protocol and New password set on your endpoint are required. Encryption protocol Encryption password Specify the encryption protocol and password for connecting the videoconferencing network management system to your endpoint. Available encryption protocols are DES, AES, and No encryption. The default value of Encryption protocol is DES. Set Encryption password to a string of 32 characters or less, consisting of letters, digits, and special characters. 13.5 Setting QoS Parameters Quality of service (QoS) settings determine the mode for processing IP data packets during a conference. Choose Advanced > Settings > Network > QoS. Set the QoS parameters described in Table 13-5. Table 13-5 QoS parameters Parameter Description Setting QoS type Specifies the type of the Quality of Service
(QoS) network security measure used to deal with the network latency, congestion, and other issues. Priority: If you select this option, you The default value is Priority. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 13 Feature Configuration Parameter Description Setting must also set IP priority and Service type. DiffServ: If you select this option, you must also set DSCP. IP priority Specifies the priority that a network device gives to forwarding the data packets sent by your endpoint. The default value is 7. Value range: 0-7 The default value is Minimum delay. Service type A larger value indicates a higher priority. Specifies how the data packets sent and received by your endpoint are processed on the network. Normal: Network devices transmit the data packets without special processing. Minimum delay: Data packets are transmitted at the highest rate with the minimum delay. Maximum throughput: A large number of data packets can be transmitted on the network. Highest reliability: Data packets can be transmitted to remote sites completely and correctly. Minimum cost: Network devices transmit data packets of the same traffic at lower costs. DSCP audio DSCP video DSCP data DSCP signaling Specify the service level of data packets sent by your endpoint during transmission. The default value is 63. Value range: 0-63 A larger value indicates a higher service level. Network jitter Adjusts network jitter settings to address:
Labial synchronization problems during conferences Choppy audio problems, by increasing the network jitter value. The default value is 0ms. Value range: 0 ms to 1000 ms Lip sync. Fine-tunes network jitter settings if a slight labial synchronization problem persists after the network jitter settings are adjusted. The default value is 0ms. Value range: 0 ms to 300 ms Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 13.6 Setting Network Diagnostics Parameters 13 Feature Configuration Correct settings on the ports used for diagnostics enable you to use a network diagnostics tool to diagnose your endpoint using the ports. Choose Advanced > Settings > Network > Network diagnostics. Set the network diagnostics parameters described in Table 13-6. You can use a network diagnostics tool to diagnose your endpoint only when the endpoint is not used in any conferences. Table 13-6 Network diagnostics parameters Parameter Description Setting Network diagnostics Specifies whether to enable the Registration, Admission and Status
(RAS) ports, H.323 call port, and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) port to be used for network diagnostics. H.323 call port Specifies the port the network diagnostics tool uses to receive and send call signaling during communication with your endpoint. RAS source port Specifies the port your endpoint uses to receive and send RAS signaling during communication with the network diagnostics tool. RAS destination port Specifies the port the network diagnostics tool uses to receive and send RAS signaling during communication with your endpoint. The default value is Disable. The default value is 1820. The default value is 1819. The default value is 1819. SIP call port Specifies the port your endpoint uses to The default value is 5160. send SIP signaling during communication with the network diagnostics tool. Test network after exiting conference Specifies whether to perform the ping operation after your endpoint exits a conference. Ping results are recorded in a log. The default value is Enable. Log in to the web interface of the endpoint, choose System Settings > Network > Network diagnostics to set Diagnostics tool user name and Diagnostics tool password. The default value of Diagnostics tool user name and Diagnostics tool password are admin and Change_Me respectively. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide 14 Ports on the Rear Panel 14 Ports on the Rear Panel This section describes the ports on the rear panel and their functions, helping you correctly connect the required devices to the endpoint. Figure 14-1 to Figure 14-3 show the ports on the rear panels of the different models covered by this document and illustrate the differences between them. Figure 14-1 TE40 Figure 14-2 TE50 Figure 14-3 TE60 Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide A E1/T1 Grounding Criteria A E1/T1 Grounding Criteria Read the following grounding criteria carefully and comply with the relevant requirements during the installation of the endpoint. The grounding design of the telecom office (station) follows the principle of equalized voltage. That is, the work grounding and the protection grounding (including the shielded grounding and the surge protection grounding of the distribution frame) share a set of grounding conductors. When the E1 cable of the cabinet is over 7.5 m and the T1 cable of the cabinet is over 10 m, a shielded cable and a shielded connector should be used and grounded. When the E1 interface is connected to other devices using coaxial cables, the external shield layers at the transmitting endpoint and receiving endpoint should be connected to the protection ground at the same time. The dual in-line package (DIP) switch offers the possible disconnection function at the receiving end. Copper-core materials instead of aluminum materials should be used for the ground cable. The plastic insulated copper wires with yellow and green insulation color should be used for the protective ground cable. The protective ground cable should not exceed 30 m, and the shorter the better. When the protective ground cable exceeds 30 m, the ground bar should be rearranged. In a balanced circuit, the joint of the E1 (T1) cable and the connector should be grounded using the external shield layer (the grounding conductor) or an additional wire to ensure normal reception and transmission in each E1 (T1) channel. In an unbalanced circuit, the metal braid shield layer of the cable should be seamlessly connected to the coaxial connector. When the E1 cable exceeds 30 m and the T1 cable exceeds 40 m, use the multi-point grounding mode. In addition, connect the E1 cable to the ground at every 15 m and the T1 cable to the ground at every 20 m. When the E1 or T1 cable is extended out of the office (station), the E1 or T1 cable should go through the main distribution frame (MDF) attached with the security unit. The shield layer of the E1 or T1 cable should be firmly connected to the protection ground of the MDF. The security unit on the MDF should have the overvoltage protection, overcurrent protection, and failure alarm functions. The maintenance personnel should check the equipment periodically and replace the ineffective protection unit in time. For questions about grounding the device, contact the device provider for technical support. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide B Technical Specifications B Technical Specifications Knowing technical specifications of the endpoint helps you better use it. Table B-1 lists the technical specifications of the endpoint. Table B-1 Technical specifications Catego ry Standar ds complia nce Item Specifications Multimedia frame protocol ITU-T H.323 and IETF SIP Video standard H.261, H264 SVC, H264 HP, H264 BP, H263, and H263+
Audio standard AAC-LD, G.711A, G.711U, G.719, G.722, G.728, G.729A, HWA-LD, G.722.1 and G.722.1C Dual-stream standard ITU-T H.239 and BFCP Communication standard H.221, H.225, H.231, H.233, H.234, H.235, H.241, H.242, H.243, H.245, H.281, H.283, H.350, H.460, and T.140 Network standard TCP/IP, FTP, DHCP, SNMP, Telnet, HTTP, SSH, HTTPS, PPPoE, RTP, RTCP, and SNTP H.281 and H.224 AES and DES H.235, SRTP, and TLS Protocol for signaling and media stream encryption Media stream encryption protocol Protocol for signaling and media stream encryption Call IP 64 kbit/s-8 Mbit/s Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide B Technical Specifications Catego ry bandwi dth Item Specifications 4E1(only for the TE60) 64 kbit/s-8 Mbit/s Video Input TE40: 1 x HD-VI/DVI, 1 x HDMI/DVI (audio input supported), and 1 x VGA/YPbPr TE50: 1 x HD-VI/DVI, 1 x HDMI/DVI (audio input supported), 1 x VGA/YPbPr, 1 x 3G-SDI, and 1 x CVBS TE60: 2 x HD-VI/DVI, 2 x DVI-I (HDMI, VGA, and YPbPr supported with conversion cables), 1 x CVBS/S-VIDEO (converted from a DVI-I port), 1 x HDMI/DVI (audio input supported), 1 x DisplayPort
(audio input supported), and 1x3G-SDI Output TE40: 2 x HDMI/DVI (audio output supported) and 1 x VGA/YPbPr TE50: 2 x HDMI/DVI (audio output supported), 1 x VGA/YPbPr, 1 x 3G-SDI, and 1 x CVBS TE60: 2 x HDMI/DVI (audio output supported), 2 x DVI-I (HDMI, VGA, and YPbPr supported with conversion cables), 1 x CVBS/S-VIDEO (converted from a DVI-I port), and 1 x 3G-SDI Video resolution 1080p60 with a minimum bandwidth of 1 Mbit/s
(optional) Presentation resolution 1080p30 with a minimum bandwidth of 512 kbit/s
(optional) 720p60 with a minimum bandwidth of 512 kbit/s 720p30 with a minimum bandwidth of 384 kbit/s 4SIF/4CIF with a minimum bandwidth of 128 kbit/s SIF/CIF with a minimum bandwidth of 64 kbit/s SQSIF/SQCIF/QSIF/QCIF with a minimum bandwidth of 64 kbit/s Input: 1920 x 1200 60fps, 1080p 60fps, 1680 x 1050 60fps, 1600 x 1200 60fps, 1600 x 900 60fps, 1400 x 1050 60fps, 1440 x 900 60fps, 1366 x 768 60fps, 1360 x 768 60fps, 1280 x 1024 60/75/85fps, 1280 x 960 60/75/85fps, 1280 x 800 60/75/85fps, 1280 x 768 60/75/85fps, 1280 x 600 60fps, 1152 x 864 60/75/85fps, 720p 60/75/85fps, 1024 x 768 60/70/75/85fps, 800 x 600 56/60/72/75/85fps, 640 x 480 60/72/75/85fps Output: 1600 x 1200, 1920 x 1200, 1920 x 1080, 1280 x 1024, 1280 x 720, 1024 x 768, 800 x 600 Coding/Decoding resolution: 1600 x 1200, 1920 x 1200, 1920 x 1080, 1280 x 1024, 1280 x 720, 1024 x 768, 800 x 600, 4CIF, CIF Other video Video Motion Enhancement Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide B Technical Specifications Catego ry Item features Specifications VideoIntensifier ViewProcessing Facial Recognition The TE40 and TE50 support the following:
dual 1080p60 (presentation mode: presentation) 1080p60+1080p30 (presentation mode: live) The TE60 supports the following: dual 1080p60
(presentation modes: presentation or live) Audio Input TE40: 1 x XLR, 2 x RCA, 1 x microphone array HD-AI port, and 1 x HDMI port (supporting audio input) TE50: 1 x XLR, 2 x RCA, 1 x microphone array HD-AI port, 1 x 3.5 mm, and 1 x HDMI port
(supporting audio input) TE60: 2 x XLR, 2 x RCA, 1 x microphone array HD-AI port, 1 x HDMI port (supporting audio input), and 1 x DisplayPort (supporting audio input) Output TE40: 4 x RCA port and 2 x HDMI port (supporting audio output) TE50: 4 x RCA port and 2 x HDMI port (supporting audio output) TE60: 4 x RCA port, 2 x HDMI port (supporting audio output), and 2 x DVI-I (output using DVI-HDMI conversion cables) Audio processing AEC, ANS, and AGC Network port 2 x 10/100/1000 M LAN, 1 x Wi-Fi, 1 x 4 E1 connector
(optional, only for the TE60), and 1 x PSTN (Only available in China) USB 2 USB 2.0 COM 2 COM VPC600 and VPC620 HD cameras Endpoint control by using the camera to forward infrared signals VPM220 and VPM220W microphone arrays The TE40 and TE50 can be connected to only one VPM220 or VPM220W microphone array. The TE60 can be connected to up to two VPM220 or VPM220W microphone arrays. Networ k port USB port COM port Periphe rals Electric ity Operating voltage and frequency 100 V AC240 V AC; 50 Hz60 Hz;
Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide B Technical Specifications Catego ry supply require ments Environ mental require ments Item Specifications Maximum power consumption TE40: 60 W TE50: 60 W TE60: 150 W Operating state Ambient temperature 0C to 40C (32F to 104F) Relative humidity 10% to 80%
Ambient noise
< 46 dBA SPL Minimum illuminance Recommended illuminance 7lux
> 300 lux Non-operating state Ambient temperature 40C to +85C Relative humidity 0% to 95%
Physica l specific ations Codec dimensions
(H x W x D) 72.5 mm x 435 mm x 265.5 mm (2.85 in. x 17.13 in. x 10.45 in) Package dimensions (H x W x D) 220 mm x 545 mm x 355 mm (8.66 in. x 21.46 in. x 13.98 in) Weight TE40: 3.9 kg (net weight) and 5.8 kg (gross weight) TE50: 4.1 kg (net weight) and 6.0 kg (gross weight) TE60: 4.6 kg (net weight) and 6.8 kg (gross weight) Infrared signal reception NEC Infrared remote control port Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide C Status Icons C Status Icons The icons provided on the user interface indicate the status and settings of the system. The icons help show the system status and perform operations as required. Table C-1 lists the icons that will appear on the lower-right corner of the call screen and indicate the current network status. Before initiating a conference, check the status of these icons. Table C-1 Network status icons Icon Name Indicates SIP registration failure The endpoint fails to be registered with the SIP server. GK registration failure Network disconnection DNS resolution failure Wi-Fi connection status The endpoint fails to register with the gatekeeper after the gatekeeper is enabled. The endpoint is disconnected from an IP network. The network cable may be disconnected. After the DNS server is enabled and domain names are adopted as SIP server or GK server addresses, the DNS server fails to resolve the domain names. The first icon indicates that the Wi-Fi network has disconnected after the Wi-Fi client is enabled. The other icon indicates the signal status of a connected Wi-Fi network. When you view a video, the icons listed in Table C-2 are used to indicate the status of certain operations. During a conference, pay attention to the status of these icons to ensure that the relevant operations are performed correctly. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Table C-2 Operating status icons Icon Name Indicates C Status Icons Microphone status Speaker status The status of the microphone of the local site when displayed on the lower right corner of the screen. In this case, the microphone is a physical device used at the local site. When one of these icons is displayed in other positions of the screen, it indicates the microphone status of a remote site in a conference. The status of the speaker of the local site when displayed on the lower right corner of the screen. When one of these icons is displayed in other positions of the screen, it indicates the speaker status of a remote site in a conference. Encrypted conference The current conference is an encrypted conference (with media streams encrypted). Chair The local site is the chair site. Remote site A remote site is currently being viewed. Local site The local site is currently being viewed. Presentation sharing A presentation is currently being shared. Local site broadcast The local site is being broadcast in the current conference. Do Not Disturb The Do Not Disturb function is enabled at the local site. Hide Video The local video is hidden during a conference. You can use this function to prevent the local video from being seen by remote sites. After this function is enabled, the local site is displayed as a blue screen at remote sites. Camera control (up and down) The camera lens is turned upward or downward. Camera control (left and right) The camera lens is turned leftward or rightward. Camera control
(zooming) The video input from the camera is shrank or enlarged. Poor network condition Network impairments or packet loss occurs in the network where the endpoint is located. see 8.2 Customizing Onscreen Status Icons. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide Icon Name Indicates C Status Icons Video monitoring A remote site is recording or taking photos of the conference from the endpoint web interface. Recording The current conference is being recorded. Connected to a VPM220W The endpoint is connected to a VPM220W. The first icon indicates that the VPM220W has insufficient battery while the other icon indicates a sufficient battery. Remote site muted The remote site is muted, and the local site cannot hear the remote site. Local site's speaker muted by the chair site Local site's microphone muted by the chair site The chair site mutes the local site's speaker so the local site cannot hear other sites. The chair site mutes the local site's microphone so other sites cannot hear the local site. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide D Menus D Menus This section describes the structure of the menus, which helps users to quickly identify each function item. The Advanced tab on the menu screen is the interface to all the function configuration items of the endpoint. Figure D-1 shows the menu structure. Figure D-1 Menu structure Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide D Menus Only the TE60 supports 4E1 functions. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide E Terminology E Terminology This appendix provides the terms you will encounter in this administrator guide. Numerics 1080i 1080p 2 panes 2CIF 2SIF 3 panes 4CIF 4SIF 1080i is the shorthand name for a format of high-definition video modes. 1080 denotes the number of horizontal scan lines - also known as vertical resolution - and the letter i stands for interlaced. In the alternate format of high-definition video mode, known as 1080p, the p would stand for progressive scan. 1080i is generally used in place of 1440x1080, at a frame rate of 29.97 (30000/1001), while 1080p is usually used in place of 1920x1080 (full HD), at a frame rate of 23.976 fps (24000/1001). 1080p is the shorthand name for a category of HDTV video modes. The number 1080 represents 1,080 lines of vertical resolution (1,080 horizontal scan lines), while the letter p stands for progressive scan
(meaning the image is not interlaced). 1080p can be referred to as full HD or full high definition although 1080i is also "Full HD"
(1920x1080 pixels). The term usually assumes a wide-screen aspect ratio of 16:9, implying a horizontal resolution of 1920 pixels. This creates a frame resolution of 19201080, or 2,073,600 pixels in total. The frame rate in hertz can be either implied by the context or specified after the letter p (or i), such as 1080p30, meaning 30 Hz. Users see two sites on one display device in two panes. The two panes are of the same size. Each pane is about 1/4 of the screen. Use 2-pane as an adjective. 2CIF defines a video with a resolution of 352 576 pixels and using progressive scanning. 2SIF defines a video with a resolution of 352 480 pixels and using progressive scanning. Users see three sites on one display device in three panes. Use 3-pane as an adjective. 4CIF defines a video resolution of 704 576 pixels. 4SIF defines a video with a resolution of 704 480 pixels and using progressive scanning. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide E Terminology 720p 720p is the shorthand name for a category of HDTV video modes. The number 720 stands for the 720 horizontal scan lines of display resolution (also known as 720 pixels of vertical resolution), while the letter p stands for progressive scan or non-interlaced. When broadcast at 60 frames per second, 720p features the highest temporal (motion) resolution possible under the ATSC standard. Progressive scanning reduces the need to prevent flicker by filtering out fine details, so sharpness is much closer to 1080i than the number of scan lines would suggest. B C D broadcast (site) All sites, except for the site being broadcast, view the site that is broadcast. On the Broadcast Site screen, users can choose between Broadcast Single and Broadcast in Turn. broadcast single
(site) Broadcast one specified site. call absent (sites) Place calls to all the sites that are on the site list but are absent from the conference. call site cascading camera preset CIF continuous presence Place a call to a site to add the site to the conference. Multiple MCUs are connected in series at different layers to allow the number of participants to expand beyond what a single MCU can support. In cascading mode, an MCU in an upper layer can control an MCU in a lower layer. Users can control a camera by zooming, panning, and tilting the camera or changing the focus. Then, users can store this camera position and assign a number to this position. This preset position is a camera preset. During a conference, users can move the camera to a camera preset by selecting the relevant number. CIF (Common Intermediate Format), also known as FCIF (Full Common Intermediate Format), is a format used to standardize the horizontal and vertical resolutions in pixels of YCbCr sequences in video signals, commonly used in video teleconferencing systems. It was first proposed in the H.261 standard. A feature in multi-point conferencing that allows the video endpoint to see images from multiple video endpoints at the same time. All parties remain continuously visible or 'present' for the duration of the call and the user can have control over the screen layout. Continuous presence is better suited for team collaboration since it allows participants to see the reactions (body language) of all participants, not just the speaker. delete site Remove a site from the site list. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide E Terminology dual stream During a conference, two channels of video streams can be sent or received simultaneously. For example, one channel is used for transmitting video (such as video captured by a camera) and the other channel is used for transmitting presentation (such as a computer desktop). The two channels of videos can be displayed on two displays. E F G H end conference End a conference. In this case, all sites leave the conference. full-duplex A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with one lane for each direction. G.711 G.722 G.728 give floor H.239 G.711, also known as Pulse Code Modulation (PCM), is a very commonly used waveform codec. G.711 uses a sampling rate of 8,000 samples per second, with the tolerance on that rate 50 parts per million (ppm). Non-uniform quantization (logarithmic) with 8 bits is used to represent each sample, resulting in a 64 kbit/s bit rate. There are two slightly different versions; -law, which is used primarily in North America, and A-law, which is in use in most other countries outside North America. G.722 is an ITU-T standard 7 kHz wideband speech codec operating at 48, 56 and 64 kbit/s. It was approved by ITU-T in November 1988. Technology of the codec is based on sub-band ADPCM
(SB-ADPCM). G.728 is an ITU-T standard for speech coding operating at 16 kbit/s. It is officially described as Coding of speech at 16 kbit/s using low-delay code excited linear prediction. After the chair site gives floor to a site, the other sites view and hear the site. All the sites, except the chair site and the site that is given the floor, are muted. H.239 is an ITU-T recommendation from the H.32x Multimedia Communications' macrofamily of standards for multimedia communications over various networks. The H.239 recommendation is titled "Role management and additional media channels for H.3xx-series endpoints". Practical importance of this recommendation is its setting forth a way to have multiple video channels (for example, one for conferencing, another for Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide E Terminology H.263 H.264 H.323 half-duplex presentation) within a single session (call). H.263 is a video codec standard originally designed as a low-bitrate compressed format for videoconferencing. It was developed by the ITU-T Video Coding Experts Group (VCEG) in a project ending in 1995/1996 as one member of the H.26x family of video coding standards in the domain of the ITU-T. H.263v2 (H.263+) added support for flexible customized picture formats and custom picture clock frequencies. Previously the only picture formats supported in H.263 had been Sub-QCIF, QCIF, CIF, 4CIF, and 16CIF, and the only picture clock frequency had been 30000/1001 (approximately 29.97) clock ticks per second. H.264/AVC/MPEG-4 Part 10 (Advanced Video Coding) is a standard for video compression. The final drafting work on the first version of the standard was completed in May 2003. H.264/AVC is the latest block-oriented motion-compensation-based codec standard developed by the ITU-T Video Coding Experts Group (VCEG) together with the ISO/IEC Moving Picture Experts Group (MPEG), and it was the product of a partnership effort known as the Joint Video Team (JVT). The ITU-T H.264 standard and the ISO/IEC MPEG-4 AVC standard
(formally, ISO/IEC 14496-10 - MPEG-4 Part 10, Advanced Video Coding) are jointly maintained so that they have identical technical content. H.264 is used in such applications as Blu-ray Disc, videos from YouTube and the iTunes Store, DVB broadcast, direct-broadcast satellite television service, cable television services, and real-time videoconferencing. H.323 is a recommendation from the ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector (ITU-T) that defines the protocols to provide audio-visual communication sessions on any packet network. The H.323 standard addresses call signaling and control, multimedia transport and control, and bandwidth control for point-to-point and multi-point conferences. A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both directions, but only one direction at a time
(not simultaneously). Typically, once a party begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before replying. hang up (site) Hang up a remote site and remove the site from the conference. HD Refers to a video system of higher resolution than standard-definition
(SD) video, most commonly at display resolutions of 1280720
(720p) or 19201080 (1080i or 1080p, full HD). High definition
(HD) refers to an increase in display or visual resolution of television formats (HDTV), high definition video (used in HDTV broadcasting, digital film and computer HD video film formats), high definition multimedia interface (HDMI), an all-digital audio and video interface capable of transmitting uncompressed streams and other formats for recording and transmitting visual and audio communications. hide video During a conference, a site can hide its video to prevent other sites from viewing the video of the site. Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide E Terminology I L P R S intelligent mode A video transforming mode, in this mode, cut the video first and then stretch the video. Ensure that the aspect ratio of the video remains unchanged. For example, to change a wide-screen video to a narrow-screen video, crop the left and right edges of the wide-screen video, and then stretch the video to full screen. lock conference
(presentation) After the chair site locks a conference and if site A is sharing presentation, the other sites in the conference cannot share presentation until site A stops sharing presentation. lock site
(presentation) After the chair site locks the presentation, only the site that is currently sharing the presentation can continue sharing presentation. Other sites cannot share presentation. presentation During a conference, the local site can share the content input by a computer with remote sites, such as an excel file, a diagram, or a presentation. release chair Pass the chair control to another site. request chair Request chair rights and become the chair site. request floor revoke chair Request to speak. During a conference, users can request the floor from the chair site. When chair control rights are revoked, no chair site exists in the conference. If the site that revokes the chair rights wants to become the chair site, the site needs to request chair rights. revoke presentation After the chair site revokes the presentation token, the relevant site stop sharing the presentation. S-Video Separate Video[1], more commonly known as S-Video, also called Y/C, and sometimes incorrectly [2] referred to as Super Video[3], is an analog video signal that carries video data as two separate signals:
luma (luminance) and chroma (color). This differs from composite video, which carries picture information as a single lower-quality signal, and component video, which carries picture information as three separate higher-quality signals. S-Video carries standard definition video (typically at 480i or 576i resolution), but does not carry audio on the same cable. SIF Source Input Format (SIF) defined in MPEG-1, is a video format that was developed to allow the storage and transmission of digital video. 625/50 SIF format (PAL/SECAM) has a resolution of (360 or) 352 x Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide E Terminology 288 active pixels and a refresh rate of 25 frames per second. 525/59.94 SIF Format (NTSC) has a resolution of (360 or) 352 x 240 active pixels and a refresh rate of 29.97 frames per second. site group A group of conference sites. If certain sites attend a conference frequently, users can define these sites as a group to facilitate site management. start presentation Start sharing local-site presentation with remote sites. stop broadcasting
(site) Stop broadcasting a site. The other sites stop viewing the site. stop presentation Stop sharing local-site presentation with remote sites. SVGA Super Video Graphics Array or Ultra Video Graphics Array, almost always abbreviated to Super VGA, Ultra VGA or just SVGA or UVGA is a broad term that covers a wide range of computer display standards. Originally, it was an extension to the VGA standard first released by IBM in 1987. Unlike VGAa purely IBM-defined standardSuper VGA was defined by the Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA), an open consortium set up to promote interoperability and define standards. When used as a resolution specification, in contrast to VGA or XGA for example, the term SVGA normally refers to a resolution of 800 600 pixels. UXGA Ultra extended graphics array, supporting a maximum resolution of 1600 x 1200 pixels. video The video is generally output from the HD OUT 1 interface of an HD video endpoint and is captured by a camera. view single (site) View any site. view site View any site. On the View Site screen, users can choose between View Single and View in Turn. voice activation This function is used for discussion or arguing scenarios. The site with the loudest voice is broadcast. XGA XGA, the Extended Graphics Array, is an IBM display standard introduced in 1990. Today, it is the most common appellation of the 1024768 pixels display resolution, but the official definition is broader than that. U V X Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide F Acronyms and Abbreviations F Acronyms and Abbreviations Numerics 4CIF A AAC-LD ADSL B BFCP BNC BRI C CAS CCS CRC CVBS D DHCP DNS DP DSCP DVI DVR 4 x Common Intermediate Format Advanced Audio Coding-Low Delay Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line Binary Floor Control Protocol Bayonet Neill-Concelman connector Basic Rate Interface Channel Associated Signaling Common Channel Signaling Cyclic Redundancy Check Composite Video Base Signal Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Domain Name Server DisplayPort Differentiated Services Code Point Digital Visual Interface Digital Video Recorder Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide F Acronyms and Abbreviations F FTP G GK H HD File Transfer Protocol Gatekeeper High Definition HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface I ISDN IMS M MCU N NAT NTP NTSC P PAL PPPoE PSF PSTN PTZ Q QoS Integrated Services Digital Network IP multimedia subsystem Multipoint Control Unit Network Address Translation Network Time Protocol National Television Standards Committee Phase Alternating Line Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet Progressive Segmented Frame Public Switched Telephone Network Pan/Tilt/Zoom Quality of Service Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint Administrator Guide F Acronyms and Abbreviations S SD SDI SIP SMB SSH SVC SXGA V VGA W Wi-Fi WOL Y YPbPr standard definition Serial Digital Interface Session Initiation Protocol SubMiniature version B connector Secure Shell Scalable Video Coding Super Extended Graphics Array Video Graphics Array Wireless Fidelity Wake on LAN Issue 01 (2013-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172 Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2015-02-05 | 2422 ~ 2452 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
2 | 2013-12-17 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2015-02-05
|
||||
1 2 |
2013-12-17
|
|||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0007419963
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
Administration Building, Headquarters of Huawei
|
||||
1 2 |
Shenzhen, N/A
|
|||||
1 2 |
China
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 | TCB Application Email Address |
f******@us.tuv.com
|
||||
1 2 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
QIS
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
HW-TE60
|
||||
1 2 |
TE60
|
|||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
Z******** X********
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
+86-7********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
+86-7********
|
||||
1 2 |
z******@huawei.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
TUV Rheinland (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
S****** L****
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
3F,Cybio Tech. Bldg. No.1,Langshan No.2 Rd.
|
||||
1 2 |
Shenzhen, 518057
|
|||||
1 2 |
China
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
86755********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
86755********
|
||||
1 2 |
s******@tuv.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
TUV Rheinland (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
S******** L****
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
3F,Cybio Tech. Bldg. No.1,Langshan No.2 Rd.
|
||||
1 2 |
Shenzhen, 518057
|
|||||
1 2 |
China
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
86755********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
86755********
|
||||
1 2 |
s******@tuv.com
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Videoconferencing Endpoint | ||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | Power Output listed is conducted. | ||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Huawei Technologies Co., LTD
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
Z****** F****
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
86-75********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
86-75********
|
||||
1 2 |
z******@huawei.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | 2412 | 2462 | 0.0877 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 15C | 2422 | 2452 | 0.0526 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.0711200 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC